al parameters

Alcatel-Lucent GSM

Telecom Parameters Dictionary

OMC Document

Reference Guide

Release B11

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Status RELEASED

Short title

All rights reserved. Passing on and copying of this document, useand communication of its contents not permitted without writtenauthorization from Alcatel.

BLANK PAGE BREAK

2 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Contents

Contents

Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71.1 Parameter Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81.2 Parameter Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

2.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

3 LCS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51

4 IP Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 734.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

5 GSM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1155.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1165.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2055.3 System (CST) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 787

6 GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 789

6.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7906.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 836

7 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11797.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11807.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1183

8 DTM Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12038.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1204

9 2G-LTE Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1207

9.1 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1208

10 2G-3G Telecom Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123510.1 Network (CDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123610.2 Site (CAE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1237

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 3 / 1278

Contents

4 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

Preface

Preface

Purpose The BSS Parameter Dictionary lists all of the Telecom Parameters for GSMand GPRS.

What’s New In Edition 09This document was generated from the edition 18rl of the BSS TelecomParameters database.

In Edition 08This document was generated from the edition 17rl of the BSS TelecomParameters database.







3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 5 / 1278

Preface

In Edition 01First official release of document.

Audience This manual is designed for OMC-R users, O&M technicians and systemdesigners.

Assumed Knowledge Not applicable.

6 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

1 Introduction

1 Introduction

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 7 / 1278

1 Introduction

1.1 Parameter ClassificationThe GSM and GPRS parameters are classified into three categories:

Network : customer dependent parameters, related to the network topology,

defined by the customer and valid for the complete network (e.g. BTS name,Cell ID, LAC number ...). They can be adjusted by CDE scripts.

Site : adjustable parameters from one cell to the next or from one BSC to the

next. They are set to a default value. They can be adjusted from the OMC-R.

System : fixed parameters, i.e. BSS system mandatory rules orautomatically populated in the DLS skeleton and let unchanged because

not customer dependent. Some of them are coded in BTS Software andconfiguration files.

1.2 Parameter DescriptionTo each parameter are associated the following characteristics:

Logical Parameter Name : Mnemonic conventionally used in Alcatel

documentation.

Definition : definition/purpose of the parameter.

Coding rules :, Rules of coding, when necessary.

Mandatory rules : Mandatory relationships or inter-dependence of some

data.

Recommended rules : Recommended relationships or inter-dependenceof some data.

Feature : Indicates to which feature the parameter is linked.

Category : Category into which the parameter is classified.

Instance : Possible instance of the parameter.

Value

Min/Max values : Possible range of the parameter values.

Default value : Parameter value in release B9 for a generic configuration.

Modifiable : Indicates if the parameter is modifiable at the OMC-R.

Parameter Access : Indicates where the parameter is accessible at theOMC-R.

External Comments : Specific information, when necessary, relatedto the parameter.

8 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

2 VGCS Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 9 / 1278


2.1 Site (CAE)

2.1.1 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)) -(CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n))

HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)Parameter Name

Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(n)

Definition Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is ina different location area.

Coding rules step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB)

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules –

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell

Unit Minimum Maximum DefaultValue

dB 0 14 6

External Comment –

Cell Type Dependent No

Nb of TRX Dependent No

10 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.2 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) -(CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC))

HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSETParameter Name

Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(BSC)

Definition Permanent offset to C2 criterion.

Coding rules step size = 2dB; coded on 6 bits (000000:0 dB, 111111 : 126 dB)

Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) =CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 126 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 11 / 1278


2.1.3 (EN_INBAND_NOTIF) - (EN_INBAND_NOTIF)

HMI Name EN_INBAND_NOTIFParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INBAND_NOTIF

Definition Flag to disable/enable the in-band notification

Coding rules 0: disabled, 1:enabled

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




12 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.4 (EN_INBAND_PAGING) - (EN_INBAND_PAGING)

HMI Name EN_INBAND_PAGINGParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INBAND_PAGING

Definition Flag to disable/enable the in-band paging

Coding rules 0: disabled, 1: enabled

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 13 / 1278


2.1.5 (EN_UPLINK_REPLY) - (EN_UPLINK_REPLY)

HMI Name EN_UPLINK_REPLYParameter Name

Logical Name EN_UPLINK_REPLY

Definition Flag to disable/enable the uplink reply procedure


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




14 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.6 (EN_VGCS) - (EN_VGCS)

HMI Name EN_VGCSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_VGCS

Definition Flag to disable/enable the VGCS in the cell


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommendedto- include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIREDmessage (RESP_REQ).- to configure, at least, one TRX with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 in thecell.- to set EN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the valueof MIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 15 / 1278


2.1.7 (INBAND_PAGING_THR) - (INBAND_PAGING_THR)

HMI Name INBAND_PAGING_THRParameter Name

Logical Name INBAND_PAGING_THR

Definition If the eMLPP priority included in the Paging message from the MSCis higher than or equal to this parameter, then the BSS shall triggerin-band paging within cells, that are identified to be paged from thePAGING message, and that have existing VGC active.

Coding rules Coded over 3 bits000 : deactivation of inband paging001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)010 : call priority level 3011 : call priority level 2100 : call priority level 1101 : call priority level 0110 : call priority level B111 : call priority level A (highest priority)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4




16 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.8 (MAX_VGCS_TS) - (MAX_VGCS_TS)

HMI Name MAX_VGCS_TSParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_VGCS_TS

Definition Maximum number of radio timeslots that can be used by the VGCScalls in the cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TSIf EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) <Total number of TCHs of the cell".If EN_VGCS= disabled, then" MAX_VGCS_TS = 0"


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 127 0

External Comment 127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.To support VGCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_VGCS_TS> 0



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 17 / 1278


2.1.9 (MIN_VGCS_TS) - (MIN_VGCS_TS)

HMI Name MIN_VGCS_TSParameter Name

Logical Name MIN_VGCS_TS

Definition Minimum number of radio timeslots that are reserved for the VGCScalls in the cell in normal situation (point-to-point CS call can NOTuse these timeslots).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules MIN_VGCS_TS <= MAX_VGCS_TS

Recommended rules - The following rules about the upper limit are recommended :i) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) -2 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1:CCCH combined"ii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) -3 if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0:CCCH not combined"iii) MIN_VGCS_TS <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0) -1 if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX.

- If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to setEN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value ofMIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 31 0

External Comment 127 is a theoretical value : 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.



18 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.10 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC))

HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCHParameter Name

Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(BSC)

Definition Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use whenaccessing the cell until otherwise commanded, broadcast on PBCCHfor CS service establishment.

Coding rules P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm,0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm 5 43 43

External Comment According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band isP-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreteddifferently:- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS;interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS;interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MSand the Phase 2/onwards MS).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 19 / 1278


2.1.11 (NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR) -(NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR)

HMI Name NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THRParameter Name

Logical Name NOTIF_FACCH_OTHER_VGCS_CALL_THR

Definition If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, theNotifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all other on-goingVGCS call.

Coding rules Coded over 3 bits000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of other on-going VGCScalls001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)010 : call priority level 3011 : call priority level 2100 : call priority level 1101 : call priority level 0110 : call priority level B111 : call priority level A (highest priority)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




20 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.12 (NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR) -(NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR)

HMI Name NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THRParameter Name

Logical Name NOTIF_FACCH_PTP_CALL_THR

Definition If the eMLPP priority is higher than or equal to this parameter, theNotifications message shall be sent on FACCH of all on-going pointto point call whose MS is VGCS capable.

Coding rules Coded over 3 bits000 : deactivation of notification on FACCH of all on going point topoint calls in the cell001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)010 : call priority level 3011 : call priority level 2100 : call priority level 1101 : call priority level 0110 : call priority level B111 : call priority level A (highest priority)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 21 / 1278


2.1.13 (NOTIF_PCH_THR) - (NOTIF_PCH_THR)

HMI Name NOTIF_PCH_THRParameter Name

Logical Name NOTIF_PCH_THR

Definition The priority threshold for notification over PCH.The BSS shall consider, for Notification/PCH, only VGCS-Calls whichhave a priority (eMLPP priority) not below this parameter. If morethan one is selected, all these voice group calls shall be notified onPCH and all with the same frequency of occurrence.

Coding rules Coded over 3 bits000 : deactivation of notification on PCH in the cell001 : call priority level 4 (lowest priority)010 : call priority level 3011 : call priority level 2100 : call priority level 1101 : call priority level 0110 : call priority level B111 : call priority level A (highest priority)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




22 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.14 (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS) - (NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS)

HMI Name NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKSParameter Name

Logical Name NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS

Definition This parameter defines the maximum number of blocks usable forNCH.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules if EN_VGCS is enabled :- BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS- if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 7 2

External Comment The parameter is significant when EN_VGCS is enabled



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 23 / 1278


2.1.15 (NY2) - (NY2)

HMI Name NY2Parameter Name

Logical Name NY2

Definition Maximum number of repetitions for the VGCS UPLINK GRANTmessage during an uplink access procedure

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 7 3




24 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.16 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC))

HMI Name PENALTY_TIMEParameter Name

Logical Name PENALTY_TIME(n)(BSC)

Definition Time during which MS shall apply TEMPORARY_OFFSET to C2criterion.

Coding rules step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARYOFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negativevalue

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 20 620 20


Single inhibited (31)

Umbrella inhibited (31)

Concentric inhibited (31)

Concentric Umbrella inhibited (31)

Microcell 20 s (0)

Minicell 20 s (0)

Extended inner cell inhibited (31)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell inhibited (31)


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 25 / 1278


2.1.17 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC))

HMI Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MINParameter Name

Logical Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)

Definition Minimum received level at the MS required for initial access to thecell.

Coding rules Coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm.

Mandatory rules RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -100




26 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.18 (START_UPLINK_REPLY) - (START_UPLINK_REPLY)

HMI Name START_UPLINK_REPLYParameter Name

Logical Name START_UPLINK_REPLY

Definition Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message (withthe Uplink Access Request bit set to L) during the initial part of theuplink access procedure (i.e. before sending the first UPLINK FREEmessage with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H)

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 1024 256

External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 27 / 1278


2.1.19 (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY) - (T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY)

HMI Name T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAYParameter Name

Logical Name T_NOTIF_RESPONSE_DELAY

Definition This Timer is used to delay the Multiple SACCH Info Modify andthe VGCS_ADD_INFO in order to give the MS a chance to receivethe immediately transmitted VGCS_ADD_INFO/FACCH and SI6messages

Coding rules step size = 100 ms

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


ms 100 1000 200




28 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.20 (T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE) -(T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE)

HMI Name T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASEParameter Name

Logical Name T_REPETITION_CHANNEL_RELEASE

Definition This parameter defines the repetition period of CHANNEL RELEASEmessage sent on FACCH


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 200 1000 200




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 29 / 1278


2.1.21 (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE) - (T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE)

HMI Name T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREEParameter Name

Logical Name T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE

Definition Delay between consecutive repetitions of the UPLINK FREEmessage, sent to the mobile station. The UPLINK FREE messagesshall be repeated as long as no uplink is granted to a mobile station.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 20 480 200




30 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.22 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)

HMI Name T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESSParameter Name

Logical Name T_WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS

Definition Guard timer to wait for an Uplink Access. If no such bursts arereceived at this timer expiry, the BSC releases the voice group callchannel in that cell and provide notifications containing no channeldescription.

Coding rules step size = 1sec

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T_Wait_Uplink_Access >= [START_UPLINK_REPLY + (10 *WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)] * T_REPETITION_UPLINK_FREE

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 3 300 60

External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 31 / 1278


2.1.23 (T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK) -(T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK)

HMI Name T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name T_WAIT_UPLINK_REQUEST_ACK

Definition Guard timer to wait for UPLINK REQUEST ACK or UPLINKREQUEST REJECT message from the MSC.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


ms 500 5000 500




32 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.24 (T14) - (T14)

HMI Name T14Parameter Name

Logical Name T14

Definition Maximum queuing time for the VGCS Assignment Requests


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 1 19 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 33 / 1278


2.1.25 (T3115) - (T3115)


Logical Name T3115

Definition This timer is used for the repetition of the VGCS UPLINK GRANTmessage during the uplink access procedure. If the timer expiresbefore the reception of a correctly decoded frame from MS, the BTSrepeats the VGCS UPLINK GRANT message to the requesting MS

Coding rules step size = 20ms

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 100 480 200




34 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.26 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))

HMI Name TEMPORARY_OFFSETParameter Name

Logical Name TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)

Definition Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME.

Coding rules step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 infinity 0


Single 0 dB (0)

Umbrella 0 dB (0)

Concentric 0 dB (0)

Concentric Umbrella 0 dB (0)

Microcell infinity (7)

Minicell infinity (7)

Extended inner cell 0 dB (0)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell 0 dB (0)


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 35 / 1278


2.1.27 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC)

HMI Name VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODECParameter Name

Logical Name VGCS_FIX_AMR_FR_CODEC

Definition This parameter defines the type of FR AMR codec used in thenetwork.

Coding rules 0 : AMR Full Rate Codec 12,2 kbit/s;1 : AMR Full Rate Codec 10,2 kbit/s;2 : AMR Full Rate Codec 7,95 kbit/s;3 : AMR Full Rate Codec 7,40 kbit/s;4 : AMR Full Rate Codec 6,70 kbit/s;5 : AMR Full Rate Codec 5,90 kbit/s;6 : AMR Full Rate Codec 5,15 kbit/s;7 : AMR Full Rate Codec 4,75 kbit/st;

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 7 1




36 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


2.1.28 (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC) - (VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC)

HMI Name VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODECParameter Name

Logical Name VGCS_FIX_AMR_HR_CODEC

Definition This parameter defines the type of HR AMR codec used in thenetwork.

Coding rules 0 : AMR Half Rate Codec 7,95 kbit/s;1 : AMR Half Rate Codec 7,40 kbit/s;2 : AMR Half Rate Codec 6,70 kbit/s;3 : AMR Half Rate Codec 5,90 kbit/s;4 : AMR Half Rate Codec 5,15 kbit/s;5 : AMR Half Rate Codec 4,75 kbit/s;

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 2 5 4

External Comment AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,95 kb/s is not supported by AlcatelBSS.AMR Half Rate codec mode 7,4kb/s is not supported as a"stand-alone" codec



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 37 / 1278


2.1.29 (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS) - (WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS)

HMI Name WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESSParameter Name

Logical Name WAIT_UPLINK_ACCESS

Definition Maximum number of repetitions for the UPLINK FREE message(with the Uplink Access Request bit set to L) per cycle, during thenon-initial part of the uplink access procedure (i.e. after sending thefirst UPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit setto H).Each time the value of this counter becomes zero, the BTS send oneUPLINK FREE message with the Uplink Access Request bit set to H.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 32 3

External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_UPLINK_REPLY is set to true.



38 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

3 LCS Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 39 / 1278


3.1 Network (CDE)

3.1.1 (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN) - (CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN)

HMI Name CONFIDENCE_ORIGINParameter Name

Logical Name CONFIDENCE_ORIGIN

Definition Confidence origin used in the 3D linear regression of the confidenceof the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS when providing the referencelocation to the A-GPS server.

Coding rules step size = 0.1

Mandatory rules –


Category Network (CDE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


% 0 100 50.7




40 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.1.2 (CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE) -(CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE)

HMI Name CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPEParameter Name

Logical Name CONFIDENCE_VS_ARC_FACTOR_SLOPE

Definition Slope ratio between the confidence and the arc factor used in the 3Dlinear regression of the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned bythe MFS when providing the reference location to the A-GPS server.


Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


% 0 100 25




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 41 / 1278


3.1.3 (CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE) -(CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE)

HMI Name CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPEParameter Name

Logical Name CONFIDENCE_VS_RADIUS_SLOPE

Definition Slope ratio between the confidence and the sum of minimum radiusfactor and maximum radius factor used in the 3D linear regressionof the confidence of the ellipsoid arc returned by the MFS whenproviding the reference location to the A-GPS server.


Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


% 0 100 15.28




42 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.1.4 (MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST) -(MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST)

HMI Name MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LISTParameter Name

Logical Name MS_BASED_AGPS_ASSIST_DATA_LIST

Definition Bitmap (8 bits) defining the types of optional assistance data to beretrieved from the A-GPS server when using the MS based A-GPSpositioning method. The following optional assistance data type areconsidered: Almanac, UTC model, DGPS corrections, referencetime, acquisition assistance, real-time integrity.

Coding rules bit 8 (most significant) and bit 7 are not used (i.e. always set to 0); bit6=1: real-time integrity is retrieived; bit 5=1: acquisition assistanceis retrieived; bit 4=1: reference time is retrieived; bit 3=1: DGPScorrections is retrieived; bit 2=1: UTC model is retrieived; bit 1 (leastsignificant)=1: Almanac is retrieived.

Mandatory rules –



Type Reference

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0 63 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 43 / 1278


3.1.5 (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1) - (PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1)

HMI Name PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1Parameter Name

Logical Name PREF_GPS_LIST_Priority_1

Definition The most preferred GPS positioning method.

Coding rules It contains a reference to a GPS method: 1 for MS Assisted A-GPS,2 for MS Based A-GPS, 3 for Conventional GPS.

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The same GPS methods reference should not be used for differentpriorities


Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 3 1




44 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition The second preferred GPS positioning method.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The same GPS methods reference should not be used for differentpriorities.


Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 3 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 45 / 1278





Definition The third preferred GPS positioning method.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The same GPS methods reference should not be used for differentpriorities.


Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 3 3




46 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.1.8 (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT) - (SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT)

HMI Name SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUTParameter Name

Logical Name SAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT

Definition Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based onTCP keep alive mechanism. This timer controls the retransmissiontimeout for the sending of the individual data segments.

Coding rules step size = 1 second

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 4 10 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 47 / 1278


3.1.9 (SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL) -(SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL)

HMI Name SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVALParameter Name

Logical Name SAGI_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL

Definition Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCPkeep alive mechanism. This timer determines the interval separatingkeep alive retransmissions until a response is received. Once aresponse is received, the delay until the next keep alive transmissionis again controlled by the value of this timer. The connectionwill be aborted after the number of retransmissions specified bySAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS have gone unanswered.

Coding rules step size = 1 second

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 4 10 5




48 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.1.10 (SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS) -(SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS)

HMI Name SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANSParameter Name

Logical Name SAGI_TCP_MAX_DATA_RETRANS

Definition Parameter used in the context of supervision of SAGI based on TCPkeep alive mechanism. This parameter controls the number of timesTCP will retransmit an individual data segment before aborting theconnection. The retransmission timeout is given by the parameterSAGI_TCP_DATA_TIMEOUT.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 4 10 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 49 / 1278


3.1.11 (T_SAGI_GUARD) - (T_SAGI_GUARD)

HMI Name T_SAGI_GUARDParameter Name

Logical Name T_SAGI_GUARD

Definition Timer to guard the response from the A-GPS server (on SAGI:interface with A-GPS server).

Coding rules step size = 1 sec

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 300 60

External Comment The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_SAGI=1.



50 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2 Site (CAE)

3.2.1 (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR) - (ARC_SIZE_FACTOR)

HMI Name ARC_SIZE_FACTORParameter Name

Logical Name ARC_SIZE_FACTOR

Definition Factor used in the computation of the width in degree of the ellipsoidarc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based onTA positionning method.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 1.5 1.2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 51 / 1278


3.2.2 (AZIMUTH) - (LCS_AZIMUTH)

HMI Name AZIMUTHParameter Name

Logical Name LCS_AZIMUTH

Definition Antenna direction orientation for the sector supporting the cell (usedby the MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionningmethod).

Coding rules 0: 0 degree,..., 359: 359 degree, 360: omnidirectional cell

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 360 0

External Comment 0 corresponds to the North orientation and is counted clockwise.



52 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.3 (EN_CONV_GPS) - (EN_CONV_GPS)

HMI Name EN_CONV_GPSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_CONV_GPS

Definition Flag to enable or disable the positioning method ’Conventional GPS’.

Coding rules 0 = disabled; 1 = enabled

Mandatory rules EN_CONV_GPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment - The activation of this positioning method is meaningful whenEN_LCS=1.- Only the value 0 is supported (from B11 MR3)



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 53 / 1278


3.2.4 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (BSC))

HMI Name EN_LCSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_LCS (BSC)

Definition Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS.


Mandatory rules - Equal to EN_LCS (MFS)- EN_LCS = "disabled" on BSC G2 (from B11 MR3)- EN_LB and EN_LCS shall not be both enabled at the same time


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only (from B11 MR3).- Only the value 0 is supported on G2 BSC (from B11 MR3)



54 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.5 (EN_LCS) - (EN_LCS (MFS))

HMI Name EN_LCSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_LCS (MFS)

Definition Enables/Disables the Location Services (LCS) in the BSS.


Mandatory rules - Equal to EN_LCS (BSC)- EN_LCS = "disabled" on BSC G2 (from B11 MR3)- EN_LB and EN_LCS shall not be both enabled at the same time


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only (from B11 MR3).- Only the value 0 is supported on G2 BSC (from B11 MR3)



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 55 / 1278


3.2.6 (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS)

HMI Name EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS

Definition Flag to enable or disable the positioning method ’MS AssistedA-GPS’.


Mandatory rules - EN_MS_ASSISTED_AGPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




56 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.7 (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS) - (EN_MS_BASED_AGPS)

HMI Name EN_MS_BASED_AGPSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MS_BASED_AGPS

Definition Flag to enable or disable the positioning method ’MS Based A-GPS’.


Mandatory rules - EN_MS_BASED_AGPS = 0 (from B11 MR3)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 57 / 1278


3.2.8 (EN_SAGI) - (EN_SAGI)

HMI Name EN_SAGIParameter Name

Logical Name EN_SAGI

Definition Flag indicating whether SAGI (interface with the A-GPS server) isconfigured or not for this BSS.

Coding rules 0: disabled; 1: enabled

Mandatory rules - EN_SAGI = 0 (from B11 MR3)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment - Only the value 0 is supported (from B11 MR3)



58 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.9 (Geographical Coordinates) -(GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG)

HMI Name Geographical CoordinatesParameter Name

Logical Name GEOGRAPHICAL_COORDINATES_FLAG

Definition Indicates whether latitude and longitude are significant or not.

Coding rules 0: not significant, 1: significant

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 59 / 1278


3.2.10 (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH) - (HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH)

HMI Name HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTHParameter Name

Logical Name HALFPWR_BEAM_WIDTH

Definition Antenna half power beam for the sector supporting the cell (used bythe MFS to compute location estimate based on TA positionningmethod).

Coding rules 0: half power beam width unknown, 1: 1 degree,..., 360: 360 degree(omnidirectional cell)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 360 0




60 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.11 (LATITUDE) - (LCS_LATITUDE)

HMI Name LATITUDEParameter Name

Logical Name LCS_LATITUDE

Definition Latitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS to computelocation estimate based on TA positionning method).

Coding rules Sequence of:- number of degrees (from 0 to 90)- number of minutes (from 0 to 59)- number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999)- direction (boolean, true for South and false for North)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type List of numbers

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0,0,0,false 90,59,9999,true #

External Comment 1) 0 latitude corresponds to the Equator;2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&MParameters" document, parameter "LCS-Latitude".



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 61 / 1278


3.2.12 (LONGITUDE) - (LCS_LONGITUDE)

HMI Name LONGITUDEParameter Name

Logical Name LCS_LONGITUDE

Definition Longitude of the BTS supporting the cell (used by the MFS tocompute location estimate based on TA positionning method).

Coding rules Sequence of:- number of degrees (from 0 to 180)- number of minutes (from 0 to 59)- number of fractional minutes (from 0 to 9999)- direction (boolean, true for West and false for East)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)


SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0,0,0,false 180,59,9999,true #

External Comment 1) 0 longitude corresponds to the Greenwich Meridian;2) The coding for OMC-R HMI is described in the "BSS O&MParameters" document, parameter "LCS-Longitude".



62 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.13 (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR)

HMI Name MAX_RADIUS_FACTORParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_RADIUS_FACTOR

Definition Factor used in the computation of the maximum radius of the ellipsoidarc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based onTA positionning method.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.5 1 0.6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 63 / 1278


3.2.14 (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR) - (MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR)

HMI Name MIN_RADIUS_FACTORParameter Name

Logical Name MIN_RADIUS_FACTOR

Definition Factor used in the computation of the minimum radius of the ellipsoidarc returned by the MFS when computing location estimate based onTA positionning method.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.5 1 0.85




64 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.15 (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant)

HMI Name T_LCS_Delay_TolerantParameter Name

Logical Name T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant

Definition SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (including theRRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a DelayTolerant Location Request.


Mandatory rules T_Location + T_Location_Longer > T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant >=T_LCS_Low_Delay


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 1 300 10

External Comment The timer is meaningful in the MFS when EN_LCS=1.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 65 / 1278


3.2.16 (T_LCS_Low_Delay) - (T_LCS_Low_Delay)

HMI Name T_LCS_Low_DelayParameter Name

Logical Name T_LCS_Low_Delay

Definition SMLC timer to guard the calculation of the MS position (includingthe RRLP message exchange with the target MS) in case of a LowDelay Location Request.

Coding rules step size = 0.1 sec



Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.1 180 3




66 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.17 (T_Loc_abort) - (T_Loc_abort)

HMI Name T_Loc_abortParameter Name

Logical Name T_Loc_abort

Definition BSC timer supervising the response from the SMLC in case ofLocation Abort.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T_Loc_abort < T_Location

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 1 30 2

External Comment The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 67 / 1278


3.2.18 (T_Location) - (T_Location)

HMI Name T_LocationParameter Name

Logical Name T_Location

Definition BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from theSMLC in case of Location request, when no RRLP exchange istriggered with the MS.



Recommended rules -

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 1 300 15

External Comment The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1.



68 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.19 (T_Location_Longer) - (T_Location_Longer)

HMI Name T_Location_LongerParameter Name

Logical Name T_Location_Longer

Definition BSC timer, on a per call basis, supervising the response from theSMLC in case of Location request, when a RRLP exchange istriggered with the MS.



Recommended rules T_Location_Longer > T_Location

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 1 300 30

External Comment The timer is meaningful in the BSC when EN_LCS=1, and replacesT_Location timer in case of Conventional GPS, MS Assisted A-GPSand MS Based A-GPS positioning methods.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 69 / 1278


3.2.20 (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant) - (T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant)

HMI Name T_RRLP_Delay_TolerantParameter Name

Logical Name T_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant

Definition SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between theSMLC and the target MS, in case of a Delay Tolerant LocationRequest.


Mandatory rules T_LCS_Delay_Tolerant > T_RRLP_Delay_TolerantT_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 1 300 9




70 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


3.2.21 (T_RRLP_Low_Delay) - (T_RRLP_Low_Delay)

HMI Name T_RRLP_Low_DelayParameter Name

Logical Name T_RRLP_Low_Delay

Definition SMLC timer to guard the RRLP message exchange between theSMLC and the target MS, in case of a Low Delay Location Request.


Mandatory rules T_Low_Delay > T_RRLP_Low_DelayT_RRLP_Delay_Tolerant >= T_RRLP_Low_Delay


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.1 120 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 71 / 1278


72 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

4 IP Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 73 / 1278


4.1 Site (CAE)

4.1.1 (—) - (MSC_OFFLOAD_STATE)

HMI Name —Parameter Name

Logical Name MSC_OFFLOAD_STATE

Definition State assigned to a given MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature),for the load redistribution function. That function removes the "offloaded" MSC from the list of candidate MSCs on BSS side.

Coding rules 0: off loaded1: on loaded

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 0 1 1

External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled.- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.- If a MSC server is in high load situation, the operator can avoidthe MSC to enter the overload situation through the update of thatparameter to "off loaded" for the concerned MSC.

Parameter change: on going traffic is not disrupted. Change appliedimmediately after modification. The complete redistribution of the MSrequires the same change done on Core Network side too.



74 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.2 (—) - (SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE)

HMI Name —Parameter Name

Logical Name SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE

Definition State assigned to a given SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflexfeature), for the load redistribution function. That function removesthe "off loaded" SGSN from the list of candidate SGSNs on BSS side.

Coding rules 0: off loaded1: on loaded

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviourof the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to the same SGSN,must have the same SGSN_OFFLOAD_STATE.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance NSE


None 0 1 1

External Comment - Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled.- If a SGSN server is in high load situation, the operator can avoidthe SGSN to enter the overload situation through the update of thatparameter to "off loaded" for all the NSEs of all the BSSs connectedto the concerned SGSN.

Parameter change: on going traffic is not disrupted. Change appliedimmediately after modification. The complete redistribution of the MSrequires the same change done on Core Network side too.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 75 / 1278


4.1.3 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1) -(ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1)

HMI Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1Parameter Name

Logical Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1

Definition Primary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) onthe MSC side.

Coding rules coded on 15 characters string

Mandatory rules - ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 andASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquelyidentify a SCTP endpoint inside one MSC- 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden


Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem BSC

Instance SCTP EndPoint


None None None None

External Comment Parameter change: before any modification, the operator must lockthe associated A Signalling Link (ASL).



76 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.4 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2) -(ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2)

HMI Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2Parameter Name

Logical Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2

Definition Secondary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol)on the MSC side.It is an optional address used in case of SCTP multihoming in MSCside.


Mandatory rules - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden


Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem BSC



None None None None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 77 / 1278


4.1.5 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST) - (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST)

HMI Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LISTParameter Name

Logical Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LIST

Definition List of the SCTP endpoints (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSCside.Up to 4 endpoints can be defined in that list.

Coding rules coded as an array of 4 entriesEach entry is an SCTP endpoint, composedof ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1,ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT andASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_2

Mandatory rules When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number ofSCTP endpoints configured in the ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LISTmust be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_


Category Site (CAE)


SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None None None None

External Comment Parameter change: before any modification, the operator must lockthe associated A Signalling Link(s) (ASL).



78 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.6 (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) - (ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

HMI Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORTParameter Name

Logical Name ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT

Definition Port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on the MSC side.

Coding rules Step size = 1

Mandatory rules ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 andASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquely identify aSCTP endpoint inside one MSC


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC



None 1 65535 None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 79 / 1278


4.1.7 (EN_A_FLEX) - (EN_A_FLEX)

HMI Name EN_A_FLEXParameter Name

Logical Name EN_A_FLEX

Definition Enables/disables the support of the "Aflex" feature (for signalingtraffic). The Aflex feature allows a BSS to be connected to morethan one MSC.


Mandatory rules EN_A_FLEX is enabled only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is enabledWhen EN_A_FLEX is enabled, up to 16 MSCs can be connected toone BSC.When EN_A_FLEX is disabled, only one MSC can be connectedto one BSC.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment - Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.- Support of A-Flex by the MSC server is mandatory.- Support of Virtual MGW feature by the Media Gateway is mandatory.

Parameter change: Before disabling the feature from the BSC side,the operator must delete all the excessive MSCs (except one, ie nomore than one MSC connected to the BSC).Before enabling the feature, the operator must have configured theNULL_NRI and NRI_LENGTH parameters. Then the Aflex featuredeals with the unlocked MSC(s).



80 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.8 (EN_ASIG_OVER_IP) - (EN_ASIG_OVER_IP)

HMI Name EN_ASIG_OVER_IPParameter Name

Logical Name EN_ASIG_OVER_IP

Definition Enables/disables the support of "A signalling over IP"


Mandatory rules - EN_A_FLEX is enabled only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is enabled.- EN_ASIG_OVER_IP can be enabled if, at least, one MSC SCTPendpoint has been configured.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only.

- Parameter change: A BSC reset procedure is needed, aftermodification, to resynchronize all the channels of the A interface.This ’BSC reset’ leads to a total outage of several minutes. Notelecom service is provided during this procedure.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 81 / 1278


4.1.9 (EN_GB_FLEX) - (EN_GB_FLEX)

HMI Name EN_GB_FLEXParameter Name

Logical Name EN_GB_FLEX

Definition Enables/disables the support of the "Gbflex" feature (for data andsignaling traffic). The GbFlex feature allows a BSS to be connectedto more than one SGSN.


Mandatory rules - EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if Gb_Transport_Mode is IP- If Gb_Transport_Mode is FR then EN_GB_FLEX must be disabled- EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if SGSNR = 1- When EN_GB_FLEX is enabled, up to 8 SGSNs can be connectedto one BSS.- When EN_GB_FLEX is disabled, only one SGSN can be connectedto one BSS.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment Support of Gb-Flex by the SGSN is mandatory.

Parameter change: no impact on the on going telecom service.Before disabling the feature from the MFS side, the operator shalldelete all the excessive NSEs (no more than one NSE per GPU, ieno more than one SGSN connected to the BSS).



82 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.10 (Gb_Configuration_Type) - (Gb_Configuration_Type)

HMI Name Gb_Configuration_TypeParameter Name

Logical Name Gb_Configuration_Type

Definition Configuration type used with Gb over IP.In case of static configuration, the SGSN IP endpoint(s) are given byO&M.In case of dynamic configuration, the SGSN IP endpoint(s) aresent dynamically by the SGSN. For that exchange, at least onepre-configured SGSN IP endpoint is previously given by O&M.

Coding rules 0 : Static configuration1: Dynamic configuration

Mandatory rules In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration where Gb_Transport_Modeis IP, all the NSEs connected to the same SGSN, having childrenSGSN IPendpoint(s), must have the same Gb_Configuration_Type.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem MFS

Instance NSE


None 0 1 0

External Comment Gb_Configuration type is significant only when Gb_Transport modeis IP.Parameter change: before any parameter modification, the operatorhas to delete the children SGSN IP endpoint(s).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 83 / 1278


4.1.11 (GPU_Gb_Base_IP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_IP)

HMI Name GPU_Gb_Base_IPParameter Name

Logical Name GPU_Gb_Base_IP

Definition Base address of the IP address of the local Gb IP endpoint, used todefine the GPU_Gb_IP_Address of each GPU board (for Gb over IPinterface).

Coding rules coded on 32 bitsThe last group is set to 000 (base address)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0 4294967295 None

External Comment Parameter change: if Gb_transport_Mode is already in IP mode, achange of this parameter must be followed by a manual reset of theassociated GP/GPU (during the IP settings preparation phase, nomanual reset is needed since the reset is automatically performed bythe MFS at the feature activation time).



84 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.12 (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP) - (GPU_Gb_Base_UDP)

HMI Name GPU_Gb_Base_UDPParameter Name

Logical Name GPU_Gb_Base_UDP

Definition Base port number of the UDP port number of the local Gb IPendpoint, used to define the GPU_Gb_UDP_port of each GPU board(for Gb over IP interface).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 63488 64512 64512




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 85 / 1278


4.1.13 (GPU_Gb_IP_Address) - (GPU_Gb_IP_Address)

HMI Name GPU_Gb_IP_AddressParameter Name

Logical Name GPU_Gb_IP_Address

Definition Allows to display the IP address of the local Gb IP endpoint, used bya GPU board in a NSE instance (for Gb over IP interface)

Coding rules coded on 32 bitscoded default value is for implementation purposes only

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem MFS

Instance GPU


None 0 4294967295 None

External Comment Calculated by the MFS from the GPU_Gb_Base_IP value.



86 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.14 (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port) - (GPU_Gb_UDP_Port)

HMI Name GPU_Gb_UDP_PortParameter Name

Logical Name GPU_Gb_UDP_Port

Definition Allows to display the UDP port number of the local Gb IP endpoint,used by a GPU board in a NSE instance (for Gb over IP interface).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance GPU


None 63488 64512 64512

External Comment equal to GPU_Gb_base_UDP.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 87 / 1278


4.1.15 (IP_Address) - (SGSN_IP_Address)

HMI Name IP_AddressParameter Name

Logical Name SGSN_IP_Address

Definition IP address of a SGSN Ipendpoint, used in case of static configurationof Gb over IP interface.IP address of a pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint, used in case ofdynamic configuration of Gb over IP interface.


Mandatory rules - Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port)must be unique per NSE.- in case of static configuration, up to 16 SGSN IP endpoints can bedefined per NSE.- In case of dynamic configuration, only a single pre-configuredSGSN IP endpoint can be defined per NSE.


Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem MFS

Instance SGSN-IPEndPoint


None 0 4294967295 None




88 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.16 (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS) - (IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS)

HMI Name IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFSParameter Name

Logical Name IPGB_SUBNET_MASK_MFS

Definition Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of MFS addressesused forGb telecom protocols


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0 4294967295 None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 89 / 1278


4.1.17 (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1) -(LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1)

HMI Name LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1Parameter Name

Logical Name LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1

Definition Local primary IP adress of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UAprotocol) on the BSC side.


Mandatory rules - LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 andLOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquelyidentify a SCTP endpoint inside the BSC

Recommended rules 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden

Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem BSC



None None None None




90 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.18 (LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT) -(LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT)

HMI Name LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORTParameter Name

Logical Name LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT

Definition Local port of a SCTP endpoint (used by M3UA protocol) on theBSC side.


Mandatory rules LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_IP_Address_1 andLOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT shall together uniquelyidentify a SCTP endpoint inside the BSC

Recommended rules By default, the LOCAL_ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_PORT values aretaken in the range 61953-61999.

It is recommended to change these values only in case of IOT issuewith the MSC. In this case it is recommended:- to not use values in the range 0..49151 ("well known" and "ianaregistered" ports)-to avoid the values already used by other BSS protocols using IP,-and especially to not use the ports used by the IP_BSSAsig protocol(to avoid conflicts during the transition from ’Asig over TDM’ to ’Asigover IP’).

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC



None 1 65535 None

External Comment Parameter change: Before any modification of theLocal_Asig_SCTP_Endpoint_Port, If the Aflex feature is enabled,Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concerned MSC into the"off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffic towards otherMSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A Signalling Links (ASL)of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g. that MSC isthe only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state among all theMSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previously lockedtoo. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls and wait forsome minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down the on goingcalls. After modification of the Local_Asig_SCTP_Endpoint_Port, thelocked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopenthe telecom service.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 91 / 1278




92 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.19 (MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP) - (MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP)

HMI Name MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSPParameter Name

Logical Name MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP

Definition The minimum number of active IP server processes (IPSP) in theMSC server required to handle the traffic with that MSC.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number ofSCTP endpoints configured in the ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LISTmust be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 1 4 1

External Comment - This parameter is significant when the TRAFFIC_MODE of theMSC is load sharing mode.- Parameter change: before any modification of theMIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP, If the Aflex feature isenabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly set the concernedMSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirect the new traffictowards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lock all the A SignallingLinks (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under some circumstances (e.g.that MSC is the only MSC still operational, ie in IT or FIT, state amongall the MSCs connected to a BSC), the BSS-TEL is to be previouslylocked too. This procedure leads the BSC to reject any new calls andwait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear) before shutting down theon going calls. After modification of the MIN_NB_ACTIVE_IPSP, thelocked objects must be unlocked and be "on loaded" again to reopenthe telecom service.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 93 / 1278


4.1.20 (MSC_CN_ID) - (MSC_CN_ID)

HMI Name MSC_CN_IDParameter Name

Logical Name MSC_CN_ID

Definition This parameter indicates, within a given PLMN, the Core NetworkIdentifier.It is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC forthe Aflex feature.

Coding rules coded on 2 bytesThe coded default value is for implementation purposes only; thisdummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MSCidentifier yet.

Mandatory rules - All the MSCs, connected to one BSC, must have differentMSC_CN_ID.

Recommended rules - The operator must control that, in a PLMN, 2 MSCs must have2 different MSC_CN_ID.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 0 4095 None

External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.- The operator must control that the BSC and all the MSCs connectedto that BSC via Aflex feature must belong to the same PLMN.- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on goingcalls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Changeapplied immediately on the new calls established after modification.



94 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.21 (MSC_MCC) - (MSC_MCC)

HMI Name MSC_MCCParameter Name

Logical Name MSC_MCC

Definition Mobile Country Code of the MSC, connected to the BSC. It is part ofthe Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as(PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflexfeature.

Coding rules 3 digits BCDThe coded default value is for implementation purposes only; thisdummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MCCyet.

Mandatory rules The OMC-R initializes the parameter with the MCC field of theBSC-OwnPLMN. It is not changeable on the HMI.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 0 999 None

External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.- The operator must control that the BSC and all the MSCs connectedto that BSC via Aflex feature must belong to the same PLMN.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 95 / 1278


4.1.22 (MSC_MNC) - (MSC_MNC)

HMI Name MSC_MNCParameter Name

Logical Name MSC_MNC

Definition Mobile Network Code of the MSC, connected to the BSC. It is part ofthe Global Core Network Identifier, defined in 3GPP TS 23.003 as(PLMN-id + CN-id), which uniquely identifies a MSC for the Aflexfeature.

Coding rules 3 digits BCDThe coded default value is for implementation purposes only; thisdummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any MNCyet.

Mandatory rules The OMC-R initializes the parameter with the MNC field of theBSC-OwnPLMN. It is not changeable on the HMI.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 0 999 None

External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.- The operator must control that the BSC and all the MSCs connectedto that BSC via Aflex feature must belong to the same PLMN.



96 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.23 (MSC_SPC) - (MSC_SPC)

HMI Name MSC_SPCParameter Name

Logical Name MSC_SPC

Definition Signalling Point Code of a given MSC, connected to the BSC.

Coding rules coded over 14 bits

Mandatory rules All the MSCs connected to one BSC must have different MSC_SPC.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 0 16383 None

External Comment - Significant only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is set to TRUE- "A signalling over IP" function is available on BSC Evolution only.- Parameter change: Before any modification of the MSC_SPC, If theAflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstly setthe concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirectthe new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lockall the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under somecircumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, iein IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), theBSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads theBSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait TrafficClear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modificationof the MSC_SPC, the locked objects must be unlocked and be "onloaded" again to reopen the telecom service.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 97 / 1278


4.1.24 (MSC_WEIGHT) - (MSC_WEIGHT)

HMI Name MSC_WEIGHTParameter Name

Logical Name MSC_WEIGHT

Definition Weight assigned to a MSC, connected to the BSC (Aflex feature), forthe load balancing function. A high value is to be associated to ahigh capacity MSC.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set a weight value consistent with the numberof A-trunks connected to that MSC.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 1 255 1

External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on goingcalls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Changeapplied immediately on the new calls established after modification.



98 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.25 (NRI_LENGTH) - (NRI_LENGTH)

HMI Name NRI_LENGTHParameter Name

Logical Name NRI_LENGTH

Definition This parameter defined the configurable length of a NRI (NetworkResource Identification), expressed as a number of bits It is usedby the BSC to derive the NRI value from the received temporaryidentity TMSI, and to identify the serving MSC, connected to the BSC(Aflex feature). The NRI is coded starting from the bit 23 (the mostsignificant bit of the NRI) of the TMSI, regardless of the NRI length.

Coding rules The coded default value is for implementation purposes only; thisdummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any lengthvalue yet.

Mandatory rules - Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH - 1- NULL_NRI <= 2^NRI_LENGTH 1

Recommended rules - The operator must control that the same NRI_LENGTH isconfigured in all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area.- A larger length allows to define/connect more MSCs per CS poolarea, but reduce the number of available TMSI for a given timeperiod, since the NRI is part of the TMSI.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 10 None

External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.

Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going callsare not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Changeapplied immediately on the new calls established after modification.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 99 / 1278


4.1.26 (NRI_LENGTH_PS) - (NRI_LENGTH_PS)

HMI Name NRI_LENGTH_PSParameter Name

Logical Name NRI_LENGTH_PS

Definition This parameter defined the configurable length of a NRI (NetworkResource Identification), expressed as a number of bits It is usedby the MFS to derive the NRI value from the received TLLI, and toidentify the serving SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature).The NRI is coded starting from the bit 23 (the most significant bit ofthe NRI) of the TLLI, regardless of the NRI length.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules - Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1- NULL_NRI_PS <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1

Recommended rules The operator must control that the same NRI_LENGTH_PS isconfigured in all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 10 None

External Comment Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled.

Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going trafficis not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification.



100 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.27 (NRI_LIST) - (NRI_LIST)

HMI Name NRI_LISTParameter Name

Logical Name NRI_LIST

Definition List of the Network Resource Identifiers, associated to a given MSC,connected to the BSC (Aflex feature). Up to 8 NRIs can be definedper MSC.The NRI is part of the temporary identity TMSI, which is assigned bythe serving MSC to the MS. The BSC derives the NRI from any Initiallayer 3 message, in order to identify the serving MSC.

Coding rules Coded on 2 bytesThe empty list (length = 0) value 1024 is for implementation purposeonly; this dummy list indicates that the operator does not provideany NRI yet.

Mandatory rules - 2 different MSCs, connected to the BSC, must have 2 differentNRI_LIST.- A NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST of all the MSCsconnected to the BSC (and especially when the BSC is in theoverlapping zone of 2 CS pool areas).- Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH 1- The NULL_NRI shall not be included in any NRI_LIST of any MSCsconnected to the BSC- When EN_A_FLEX is enabled, the NRI_LIST must contain at leastone NRI

Recommended rules - The operator must control that one NRI shall be unique among allthe NRI_LIST of all the MSCs, which serve in parallel a given CSpool area.- When several BSCs, belonging to the same CS pool area, areconnected to the same MSC, the operator must control that theNRI_LIST of that MSC is configured with the same value in eachBSC of the CS pool area.

Category Site (CAE)


SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 0 1023 None

External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on goingcalls are not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Changeapplied immediately on the new calls established after modification.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 101 / 1278




102 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.28 (NRI_LIST_PS) - (NRI_LIST_PS)

HMI Name NRI_LIST_PSParameter Name

Logical Name NRI_LIST_PS

Definition List of the Network Resource Identifiers, associated to a givenSGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature). Up to 8 NRIs can bedefined per SGSN (and at least one).The NRI is part of the temporary identity P-TMSI, which is assignedby the serving SGSN to the MS. The MFS derives the NRI from theTLLI received from the MS, in order to identify the serving SGSN.

Coding rules coded on 2 bytesThe value 1024 is only defined for implementation purpose (it is nota valid value).

Mandatory rules - In a BSS, 2 different SGSNs must have 2 different NRI_LIST_PS.- A NRI shall be unique among all the NRI_LIST_PS of all the NSEsof one GP /GPU.- Each NRI of the list <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1- For a BSS, the NULL_NRI_PS shall not be included in anyNRI_LIST_PS of any NSE connected to that BSS.

Recommended rules - For all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area, the NSEsconnected to one SGSN must all have the same NRI_LIST_PS, inorder for a MS to be served by that dedicated SGSN inside the wholepool area (area belonging or not to the same MFS)- In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviourof the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to one SGSN, musthave the same NRI_LIST_PS.

Category Site (CAE)


SubSystem MFS

Instance NSE


None 0 1024 None

External Comment Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 103 / 1278


4.1.29 (NULL_NRI) - (NULL_NRI)

HMI Name NULL_NRIParameter Name

Logical Name NULL_NRI

Definition Upon reception of a message with that dummy/reserved NRIincluded, the BSC uses the load balancing algorithm for selectingone MSC, among the "on loaded" MSC connected to the BSC (Aflexfeature), and for re-routing the received message to that MSC.

Coding rules coded on 2 bytesThe coded default value is for implementation purposes only; thisdummy value indicates that the operator does not provide any nullNRI yet.

Mandatory rules - NULL_NRI <= 2^NRI_LENGTH - 1- The NULL_NRI shall not be included in any NRI_LIST of any MSCsconnected to the BSC.

Recommended rules The operator must control that the NULL_NRI is common inside allthe BSSs of one PLMN.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1023 None

External Comment - Significant only if EN_A_FLEX is enabled- Aflex function is available on BSC Evolution only.

Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going callsare not disrupted (still established with the same MSC). Changeapplied immediately on the new calls established after modification.



104 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.30 (NULL_NRI_PS) - (NULL_NRI_PS)

HMI Name NULL_NRI_PSParameter Name

Logical Name NULL_NRI_PS

Definition In UL cases, upon TLLI reception with that dummy/reserved NRIincluded, while a SGSN is not already selected for a mobile, the MFSuses the load balancing algorithm for selecting one SGSN amongthe "on loaded" SGSN connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature).

Coding rules coded on 2 bytes

Mandatory rules - NULL_NRI_PS <= 2^NRI_LENGTH_PS 1- For a BSS, the NULL_NRI_PS shall not be included in anyNRI_LIST_PS of any NSE connected to that BSS.

Recommended rules The operator must control that the NULL_NRI_PS is common insideall the BSSs of one PLMN

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1023 None





3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 105 / 1278


4.1.31 (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Data_Weight)

HMI Name Peer_NSE_Data_WeightParameter Name

Logical Name Peer_NSE_Data_Weight

Definition Indicates the data weight assigned to the peer NSE, in case of staticconfiguration of the Gb over IP interface.

Coding rules step size = 1

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS



None 0 255 10

External Comment Declared by the operator in case of static configuration.If Peer_NSE_Data_Weight=0, the SGSN IP endpoint will not beselected as a data endpoint by the load sharing function.



106 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.32 (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight) - (Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight)

HMI Name Peer_NSE_Signalling_WeightParameter Name

Logical Name Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight

Definition Indicates the signalling weight assigned to the peer NSE, in case ofstatic configuration of the Gb over IP interface.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS



None 0 255 10

External Comment Declared by the operator in case of static configuration.If Peer_NSE_Signalling_Weight=0, the SGSN IP endpoint will not beselected as a signalling endpoint.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 107 / 1278


4.1.33 (Port_Number) - (SGSN_UDP_Port)

HMI Name Port_NumberParameter Name

Logical Name SGSN_UDP_Port

Definition UDP port number of a SGSN Ipendpoint, used in case of staticconfiguration of Gb over IP interface.UDP port number of a pre-configured SGSN IP endpoint, used incase of dynamic configuration of Gb over IP interface.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules - Each SGSN IP EndPoint (SGSN_IP_Address, SGSN_UDP_Port)must be unique per NSE.- in case of static configuration, up to 16 SGSN IP endpoints can bedefined per NSE.- In case of dynamic configuration, only a single pre-configuredSGSN IP endpoint can be defined per NSE.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS



None 1024 65535 49152

External Comment Following IANA.org: "Registered Ports" are in the range 1024-49151and "Dynamic and/or Private Ports" are those from 49152 through65535 (ALU BSS ports are taken in the private range, however SGSNports taken in the registered ports are accepted by the ALU BSS).



108 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.34 (SGSN_ID) - (CN_ID_PS)

HMI Name SGSN_IDParameter Name

Logical Name CN_ID_PS

Definition This parameter uniquely identifies one SGSN inside one BSS for theGbflex feature.For that, the operator has the possibility to use the Core NetworkIdentifier, which is part of the Global Core Network Identifier, definedin 3GPP TS 23.003 as (PLMN-id + CN-id). But in such case, thesame identifier can identify 2 different SGSN, belonging to 2 differentPLMN.

Coding rules coded on 2 bytes

Mandatory rules - All the NSEs of one GP/GPU must have different CN_ID_PS.

Recommended rules - The operator must control that, in a BSS, 2 SGSNs must have 2different CN_ID_PS.- For a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviourof the Gbflex feature, the operator must connect all the GP/GPU(s) tothe same SGSN(s) and define the same CN_ID_PS on all the NSEs,connected to one SGSN.- It is highly recommended to extend that rule (same CN_ID_PS valuefor all the NSEs connected to one SGSN) in all the BSSs managedby the MFS; and even more, in the whole managed network.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance NSE


None 0 65535 None

External Comment - Significant only if EN_GB_FLEX is enabled- The default value depends on the configuration. The value givenhere is for implementation purposes only.- The operator must control that the BSS and all the SGSNsconnected to that BSS via Gbflex feature must belong to the samePLMN.




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 109 / 1278


4.1.35 (SGSN_WEIGHT) - (SGSN_WEIGHT)

HMI Name SGSN_WEIGHTParameter Name

Logical Name SGSN_WEIGHT

Definition Weight assigned to a SGSN, connected to the MFS (Gbflex feature),for the load balancing function. A high value is to be associated toa high capacity SGSN, because it will be chosen more often than aSGSN with a lower weight (e.g. a SGSN with weight = 10 will bechosen twice as often as a SGSN with weight = 5).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In a BSS in multi-GP/GPU configuration, for a consistent behaviourof the Gbflex feature, all the NSEs, connected to the same SGSN,must have the same SGSN_WEIGHT. Same rule is to be extendedto all the NSEs of all the BSSs belonging to a same pool area, andconnected to the same SGSN.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance NSE


None 1 255 1





110 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.36 (SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR) - (SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR)

HMI Name SLOW_MOVING_FACTORParameter Name

Logical Name SLOW_MOVING_FACTOR

Definition Number of times one SGSN is used, once selected by the NodeSelection Function.

Coding rules —

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules There is no advantage to define different values for the BSSs of theMFS.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 100 10





3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 111 / 1278


4.1.37 (START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC) -(START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC)

HMI Name START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSCParameter Name

Logical Name START_TELECOM_IP_ADDRESS_BSC

Definition First IP address for the range of telecom addresses shown to theexternal world. The BSC deduces every address of its telecomendpoint from this base address.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden

Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None None None None

External Comment Parameter change: when this parameter is changed from the BSCoperator terminal, the BSC resets autonomously.



112 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


4.1.38 (TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC) -(TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC)

HMI Name TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSCParameter Name

Logical Name TELECOM_IP_SUBNET_MASK_BSC

Definition Mask of the subnet where is allocated the range of BSC addressesused fortelecom protocols


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - 255.255.255.255 and 0.0.0.0 are both forbidden

Category Site (CAE)

Type IP address

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None None None None

External Comment Parameter change: Changing the IP configuration (e.g. subnetmask, and so routing table) of any IP equipment of the network(BSC included) may impact the ongoing traffic. Usually, the changeis also to be done accordingly in the gateway(s). As consequence,Alcatel-Lucent recommends to shut down the traffic before anychange.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 113 / 1278


4.1.39 (TRAFFIC_MODE) - (TRAFFIC_MODE)

HMI Name TRAFFIC_MODEParameter Name

Logical Name TRAFFIC_MODE

Definition Traffic mode of the MSC server.

Coding rules 0: load sharing mode (ie the traffic is distributed over all the activeIPSPs)1 :override mode (ie only one of the IPSPs handle the traffic)2: broadcast mode (ie all the active IPSPs receive the samemessages)

Mandatory rules - The value "broadcast mode" is not allowed.- When the MSC TRAFFIC_MODE is in load sharing, the number ofSCTP endpoints configured in the ASIG_SCTP_ENDPOINT_LISTmust be equal or greater than MIN_NB_ACTIVE_


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance MSC


None 0 2 0

External Comment - Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here isfor implementation purposes.- The broadcast mode is not supported by the BSS.- Parameter change: Before any modification of the TRAFFIC_MODE,If the Aflex feature is enabled, Alcatel-Lucent recommends to firstlyset the concerned MSC into the "off loaded" state in order to redirectthe new traffic towards other MSCs. Then, the operator must lockall the A Signalling Links (ASL) of the modified MSC. Under somecircumstances (e.g. that MSC is the only MSC still operational, iein IT or FIT, state among all the MSCs connected to a BSC), theBSS-TEL is to be previously locked too. This procedure leads theBSC to reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait TrafficClear) before shutting down the on going calls. After modification ofthe TRAFFIC_MODE, the locked objects must be unlocked and be"on loaded" again to reopen the telecom service.



114 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

5 GSM Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 115 / 1278


5.1 Network (CDE)

5.1.1 (ADDR_MON) - (ADDR_MON)

HMI Name ADDR_MONParameter Name

Logical Name ADDR_MON

Definition Time it takes to ADDR_TR to be reached to report an alarm. Ontimeout, the address error counter is reset.

Coding rules step size = 0.1sec

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 15




116 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.2 (ADDR_TR) - (ADDR_TR)

HMI Name ADDR_TRParameter Name

Logical Name ADDR_TR

Definition Address error threshold for alarm detection.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 255 60




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 117 / 1278


5.1.3 (Autocleaning_Timer) - (T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP)

HMI Name Autocleaning_TimerParameter Name

Logical Name T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP

Definition Guard time for detection of SDCCH/TCH autocleaning procedure.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so thatT_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0.- Alcatel-Lucent recommends to configure the present BSSguard timer strictly greater than Max(RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS,RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR) x 0.480 sec of any cells of theBSS in order to let the radio link failure defence mechanism endedbefore internal cleanup.


Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 0 255 40

External Comment T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP = 0 inhibits the autocleaningprocedure.



118 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.4 (BF_HI_RX) - (BF_HI_RX)

HMI Name BF_HI_RXParameter Name

Logical Name BF_HI_RX

Definition Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from normalto busy condition.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules BF_HI_RX > BF_LO_RX


Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 80




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 119 / 1278


5.1.5 (BF_HI_TX) - (BF_HI_TX)

HMI Name BF_HI_TXParameter Name

Logical Name BF_HI_TX

Definition Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from normalto busy condition.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules BF_HI_TX > BF_LO_TX


Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 30 16




120 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.6 (BF_LO_RX) - (BF_LO_RX)

HMI Name BF_LO_RXParameter Name

Logical Name BF_LO_RX

Definition Threshold on LAPD RX buffers occupancy for transition from busyto normal condition.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules BF_LO_RX < BF_HI_RX


Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 70




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 121 / 1278


5.1.7 (BF_LO_TX) - (BF_LO_TX)

HMI Name BF_LO_TXParameter Name

Logical Name BF_LO_TX

Definition Threshold on LAPD TX buffers occupancy for transition from busyto normal condition.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules BF_LO_TX < BF_HI_TX


Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 30 8




122 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.8 (CGI_REQUIRED) - (CGI_REQD)

HMI Name CGI_REQUIREDParameter Name

Logical Name CGI_REQD

Definition Controls format of cell identifications sent to the MSC.

Coding rules 0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Alcatel recommend to set the CGI_REQD parameter to 1 providedthat the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_REQD parametershall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN 2Gto 2G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it isrecommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid anyadditional Telecom outage.


Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1

External Comment Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is forimplementation purposes.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 123 / 1278


5.1.9 (COUNT_DECR) - (COUNT_DECR)

HMI Name COUNT_DECRParameter Name

Logical Name COUNT_DECR

Definition Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reactionto TCU overload is decremented upon T_COUNT_I expiry.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 10 1




124 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.10 (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD) - (COUNT_I_THRESHOLD)

HMI Name COUNT_I_THRESHOLDParameter Name

Logical Name COUNT_I_THRESHOLD

Definition Leaky bucket counter threshold used to trigger defense actions uponTCU overload.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 50 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 125 / 1278


5.1.11 (COUNT_INCR_1) - (COUNT_INCR_1)

HMI Name COUNT_INCR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name COUNT_INCR_1

Definition Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reactionto TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 1.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules COUNT_INCR_1 <= COUNT_INCR_2


Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 10 2




126 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.12 (COUNT_INCR_2) - (COUNT_INCR_2)

HMI Name COUNT_INCR_2Parameter Name

Logical Name COUNT_INCR_2

Definition Stepsize by which the leaky bucket counter used during the reactionto TCU overload is incremented upon TCU overload level 2.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules COUNT_INCR_2 >= COUNT_INCR_1


Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 10 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 127 / 1278


5.1.13 (CRC_MON) - (CRC_MON)

HMI Name CRC_MONParameter Name

Logical Name CRC_MON

Definition Time in which CRC_TR is to be reached to report an alarm. Ontimeout, the CRC error counter is reset.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 25.5 10




128 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.14 (CRC_TR) - (CRC_TR)

HMI Name CRC_TRParameter Name

Logical Name CRC_TR

Definition CRC error threshold for alarm detection.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 255 50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 129 / 1278


5.1.15 (EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY) -(EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY)

HMI Name EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGYParameter Name

Logical Name EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY

Definition Defines if the G1 non-capable MS is supported or not in the network

Coding rules 0: G1 non-capable MS-s are only supported in the cells where theBCCH is not configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured onPGSM band or on DCS1800 band).1: G1 non-capable MS-s are not supported in any cell that containsat least one G1 TRX of the network (Note these MS-s are stillsupported in other cells).

Mandatory rules When EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY is set to "0", if the BCCH isnot configured on the G1 band (i.e. BCCH is configured on PGSMband or on DCS1800 band), then:1) the OMC-R does not allow the operator to define the CCCH,SDCCH and CBCH on a G1 TRX.2) TRX_PREF_MARK must be <> 0 for a hopping G1 TRX.



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0




130 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.16 (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF) - (EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF)

HMI Name EN_FR_IF_HR_PREFParameter Name

Logical Name EN_FR_IF_HR_PREF

Definition When set, this flag allows, when bugged MS asking for a "dual rate,half-rate preferred", to allocate a full rate channel.

Coding rules 0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled

Mandatory rules –



Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 131 / 1278


5.1.17 (I_TX_LAPD) - (I_TX_LAPD)

HMI Name I_TX_LAPDParameter Name

Logical Name I_TX_LAPD

Definition Maximum LAPD transmission queue length.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 5 204 105




132 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.18 (LB_DECR) - (LB_DECR)

HMI Name LB_DECRParameter Name

Logical Name LB_DECR

Definition Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC isdecremented on T_LB_OV expiry.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 10 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 133 / 1278


5.1.19 (LB_INCR) - (LB_INCR)

HMI Name LB_INCRParameter Name

Logical Name LB_INCR

Definition Stepsize by which a leaky bucket overload counter in the BSC isincremented each time an OVERLOAD is received from the FU.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 10 2




134 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.20 (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]) - (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1])

HMI Name MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]Parameter Name

Logical Name MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [1]

Definition Percentage of MEASUREMENT RESULT messages discarded bythe TCU at step I.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 135 / 1278


5.1.21 (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i [10]) - (MEAS_RES_DISCARDED_i[10])




Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 0




136 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 137 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 30




138 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 40




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 139 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 0




140 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 141 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 0




142 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 143 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 0




144 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.30 (NBLK) - (NBLK)

HMI Name NBLKParameter Name

Logical Name NBLK

Definition Maximum number of BLOCK messages that can be sent if the ACKfrom the MSC is not received.

Coding rules 255: infinite transmission

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 255 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 145 / 1278


5.1.31 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1)

HMI Name NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1Parameter Name

Logical Name NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1

Definition Number of steps needed to reduce the load upon TCU overloadlevel 1.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1 <= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2


Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 10 1




146 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.32 (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2) - (NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2)

HMI Name NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2Parameter Name

Logical Name NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2

Definition Number of steps to reduce the load upon TCU overload level 2.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules NBR_STEPS_OVRL_2 >= NBR_STEPS_OVRL_1


Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 10 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 147 / 1278


5.1.33 (NUBLK) - (NUBLK)

HMI Name NUBLKParameter Name

Logical Name NUBLK

Definition Maximum number of UNBLOCK messages that are sent if the ACKfrom the MSC is not received.

Coding rules 255: infinite transmission

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 255 2




148 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.34 (PROT_MON) - (PROT_MON)

HMI Name PROT_MONParameter Name

Logical Name PROT_MON

Definition Time in which PROT_TH is to be reached to report an alarm. Ontimeout, the protocol error counter is reset.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 149 / 1278


5.1.35 (PROT_TH) - (PROT_TH)

HMI Name PROT_THParameter Name

Logical Name PROT_TH

Definition Protocol error threshold for alarm detection.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 255 10




150 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.36 (RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB) - (RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB)

HMI Name RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NBParameter Name

Logical Name RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB

Definition Maximum number of measured neighbour frequencies, reported bythe BTS to the BSC in the Radio Measurements. The actual number,reported by a TRE, depends on its generation. One frequency,identified by one (BCCH frequency/BSIC) couple, is reported intoone CI vector.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Configuring a multiple of 14 as value allows optimizing theblock usage in the RMS measurements returned to OMC in theperformance counters.


Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 42 154 84

External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.- Significant only if EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC is enabled.- A G3 TRE supports up to 84 (BCCH frequency/BSIC) couples;others up to 154 couples.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 151 / 1278


5.1.37 (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD) - (SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD)

HMI Name SDCCH_AVG_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name SDCCH_AVG_PERIOD

Definition Period used to average the processor occupancy measurements.

Coding rules 8 bits, step size=1sec

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 16 10




152 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.38 (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY) - (SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY)

HMI Name SDCCH_HIGH_DELAYParameter Name

Logical Name SDCCH_HIGH_DELAY

Definition Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor loadis high.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 10 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 153 / 1278


5.1.39 (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY) - (SDCCH_LOW_DELAY)

HMI Name SDCCH_LOW_DELAYParameter Name

Logical Name SDCCH_LOW_DELAY

Definition Delay added to SDCCH internal release when TCU processor load islow.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 10 0




154 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.40 (SMS_INHIBIT) - (SMS_INHIBIT)

HMI Name SMS_INHIBITParameter Name

Logical Name SMS_INHIBIT

Definition This flag enables/disables SMS support.

Coding rules 0: SMS permitted, 1: SMS inhibited

Mandatory rules –



Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 155 / 1278


5.1.41 (SSF) - (SSF)

HMI Name SSFParameter Name

Logical Name SSF

Definition This parameter inditifies the numbering plan of the Signalling PointCode.

Coding rules coded over 4 bits.only values 0, 4, 8 and 12 are defined : Value =0, international network; Value = 4, Spare, reserved for internationaluse; Value = 8, National network; Value = 12 , Reserved for nationaluse

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 12 12

External Comment SSF (Sub-Service Field) is composed of 4 bits: 2bits for NetworkIndicator and 2 spare bits.



156 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.42 (T_BTS_EST_CNF) - (T_BTS_EST_CNF)

HMI Name T_BTS_EST_CNFParameter Name

Logical Name T_BTS_EST_CNF

Definition Supervision of the SAPI 3 Establishment procedure.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 157 / 1278


5.1.43 (T_BTS_RLS_CNF) - (T_BTS_RLS_CNF)

HMI Name T_BTS_RLS_CNFParameter Name

Logical Name T_BTS_RLS_CNF

Definition Supervision of the SAPI 3 Release procedure.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 4




158 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.44 (T_CBC_READY) - (T_CBC_READY)

HMI Name T_CBC_READYParameter Name

Logical Name T_CBC_READY

Definition Defines the maximum period during which the BSC tries to connectto the CBC before issueing an alarm or returning CMD-MODE Resp.

Coding rules step size: 1 sec

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T_CBC_READY > 8 * T_CONNECT


Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 10 600 300




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 159 / 1278


5.1.45 (T_COUNT_I) - (T_COUNT_I)

HMI Name T_COUNT_IParameter Name

Logical Name T_COUNT_I

Definition Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reaction toTCU overload.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 50 12




160 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.46 (T_i) - (T_i)

HMI Name T_iParameter Name

Logical Name T_i

Definition Duration of SSP or SPI condition that triggers an Internal Resetprocedure.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 120 22

External Comment Some "slow" MSC (e.g. legacy MSC) may take more than one minuteto reply the BSC request (e.g. the SST message sent by the BSC).If the BSC is connected to such kind of "slow" MSC, increasing theT_i value up to 120 seconds may be necessary. Otherwise after T_iexpiry, the BSC triggers an unexpected Internal Reset procedure.This leads to telecom outage for several minutes.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 161 / 1278


5.1.47 (T_LB_OV) - (T_LB_OV)

HMI Name T_LB_OVParameter Name

Logical Name T_LB_OV

Definition Supervision of the leaky bucket counter used during the reactionto FU overload.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.1 25.5 10




162 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.48 (T_OVL_MSC) - (T_OVL_MSC)

HMI Name T_OVL_MSCParameter Name

Logical Name T_OVL_MSC

Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive OVERLOAD messagessent to the MSC.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.1 6553.5 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 163 / 1278


5.1.49 (T_RCR_ACK) - (T_RCR_ACK)

HMI Name T_RCR_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name T_RCR_ACK

Definition Supervision of the RF Channel Release procedure.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 5




164 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.50 (T_SMSCB_RESP) - (T_SMSCB_RESP)

HMI Name T_SMSCB_RESPParameter Name

Logical Name T_SMSCB_RESP

Definition Maximum waiting time to get a response from the BTS to a primitive.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 1 10 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 165 / 1278


5.1.51 (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL) - (T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL)

HMI Name T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_RELParameter Name

Logical Name T_WAIT_DTM_TCH_REL

Definition This timer defines the time that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSCShared DTM Information Indication message indicating that the TCHresource allocated to a DTM capable MS is being released at theBSC side, the MFS shall wait before releasing the TCH resourcein its turn.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


ms 0 5000 1000

External Comment The value "0" indicates that, upon reception of a BSCGP BSCShared DTM Information Indication message, the MFS shall releaseimmediately the related TCH resource.



166 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.52 (T1_0858) - (T1_0858)

HMI Name T1_0858Parameter Name

Logical Name T1_0858

Definition Delay during which, after reception of an OVERLOAD from the BTS,a new OVERLOAD is ignored.


Mandatory rules T1_0858 < T2_0858



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 3 6553.5 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 167 / 1278


5.1.53 (T2_0858) - (T2_0858)

HMI Name T2_0858Parameter Name

Logical Name T2_0858

Definition Minimum delay between debarring of an access class, in the casewhere the BTS stops sending OVERLOAD.


Mandatory rules T2_0858 > T1_0858



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 3 6553.5 50




168 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.54 (T9101) - (T9101)


Logical Name T9101

Definition Supervision of the SCCP connection release procedure.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 169 / 1278


5.1.55 (T9103) - (T9103)


Logical Name T9103

Definition Supervision of the Channel Activation procedure.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 3




170 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.56 (T9108) - (T9108)


Logical Name T9108

Definition Supervision of the Physical Context procedure.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 171 / 1278


5.1.57 (T9110) - (T9110)


Logical Name T9110

Definition Guards the response of the MSC when no resources areallocated to the SCCP connection (started on the receptionof CONN_IND(SCCP_CON_REQ) not carrying a HANDOVERREQUEST message and stopped when a HANDOVER REQUESTmessage is received on the same SCCP connection as theSCCP_CON_REQ message). Guards also the response of the MSCwhen a HANDOVER FAILURE or ASSIGNMENT FAILURE messagehas been sent (stopped when a HANDOVER REQUEST or CLEARCOMMAND message is received).


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T9110 << max [T(ias), T(iar)].


Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 20




172 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.58 (TCH_INFO_PERIOD) - (TCH_INFO_PERIOD)

HMI Name TCH_INFO_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name TCH_INFO_PERIOD

Definition Periodicity of TCH usage information update in the BSC.

Coding rules stepsize = 0.1

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 2 25.5 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 173 / 1278


5.1.59 (THR_LB_OV) - (THR_LB_OV)

HMI Name THR_LB_OVParameter Name

Logical Name THR_LB_OV

Definition Counter threshold for triggering global defence actions in the BSCupon FU overload.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 50 10




174 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.60 (THRESHOLD_1_0) - (THRESHOLD_1_0)

HMI Name THRESHOLD_1_0Parameter Name

Logical Name THRESHOLD_1_0

Definition Free buffer thresholds separating "no overload" condition and"overload level 1" condition when pointer P points at position 0.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules THRESHOLD_1_0 >= THRESHOLD_2_0



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 25




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 175 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 28




176 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 55




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 177 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 31




178 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 34




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 179 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 37




180 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 40




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 181 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 43




182 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 46




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 183 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 49




184 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 52




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 185 / 1278





Definition Free buffer thresholds separating "overload level 1" condition and"overload level 2" condition when pointer P points at position 0.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules THRESHOLD_2_0 <= THRESHOLD_1_0



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 22




186 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 25




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 187 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 52




188 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 28




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 189 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 31




190 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 34




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 191 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 37




192 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 40




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 193 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 43




194 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 46




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 195 / 1278






Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 49




196 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.82 (TL_TCUA) - (TL_TCUA)

HMI Name TL_TCUAParameter Name

Logical Name TL_TCUA

Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load increaseby thelocal overload controller.


Mandatory rules TL_TCUA >TS_TCUA



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.1 50 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 197 / 1278


5.1.83 (TL0) - (TL0)

HMI Name TL0Parameter Name

Logical Name TL0

Definition Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "LowOverload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher or equalto TL0 and less than TL3." The TCU is in "No Overload" state if itsProcessor Occupancy Level is less than TL0.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules TL0 < TL3 < TL4



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 60




198 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.84 (TL1) - (TL1)


Logical Name TL1

Definition BSC processor occupancy threshold used to decrement pointer Pon buffer occupancy thresholds.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules TL1 < TL2



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 70




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 199 / 1278


5.1.85 (TL2) - (TL2)


Logical Name TL2

Definition BSC processor occupancy threshold used to increment pointer Pon buffer occupancy thresholds.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules TL3 > TL4



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 85




200 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.86 (TL3) - (TL3)


Logical Name TL3

Definition Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level:1) In upward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "High Overload"state if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4";2) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is still in "Very HighOverload" State if "TL3 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL4";3) In downward direction, the TCU Overload State is in "LowOverload" state if "TL0 <= TCU Processor Occupancy Level < TL3.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules T0 < TL3 < TL4



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 75




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 201 / 1278


5.1.87 (TL4) - (TL4)


Logical Name TL4

Definition Threshold on TCU Processor Occupancy Level. The TCU is in "VeryHigh Overload" state if its Processor Occupancy Level is higher orequal to TL4.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules TL4 > TL3 > TL0



Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 95




202 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.1.88 (TRG_SDCCH) - (TRG_SDCCH)

HMI Name TRG_SDCCHParameter Name

Logical Name TRG_SDCCH

Definition Controls if local overload controller is triggered upon SDCCHoverload.

Coding rules 1 for TCU, 0 for others

Mandatory rules –



Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC proc


None 0 1 1

External Comment This parameter is set by default to 1 for TCUs. It shall be set to 0for other BSC processors



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 203 / 1278


5.1.89 (TS_TCUA) - (TS_TCUA)

HMI Name TS_TCUAParameter Name

Logical Name TS_TCUA

Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive TCU load reduction by thelocal overload controller.


Mandatory rules TS_TCUA < TL_TCUA



Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.1 50 10




204 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2 Site (CAE)

5.2.1 (A_LEV_HO) - (A_LEV_HO)

HMI Name A_LEV_HOParameter Name

Logical Name A_LEV_HO

Definition Window size for level averages for handover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32

Recommended rules A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC. A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 31 8


Single 8

Umbrella 8

Concentric 8

Concentric Umbrella 8

Microcell 4

Minicell 8

Extended inner cell 8

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell 8


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 205 / 1278


5.2.2 (A_LEV_MCHO) - (A_LEV_MCHO)

HMI Name A_LEV_MCHOParameter Name

Logical Name A_LEV_MCHO

Definition Window size for level averages for microcell handover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 15 2


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A

Concentric Umbrella N/A

Microcell 2

Minicell N/A

Extended inner cell N/A

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell N/A


206 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.3 (A_LEV_PC) - (A_LEV_PC)

HMI Name A_LEV_PCParameter Name

Logical Name A_LEV_PC

Definition Window size for level averages for power control.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32

Recommended rules A_LEV_HO = 2 x A_LEV_PC

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 31 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 207 / 1278


5.2.4 (A_PBGT_DR) - (A_PBGT_DR)

HMI Name A_PBGT_DRParameter Name

Logical Name A_PBGT_DR

Definition Window size for neighbour cell level averages for forced directed retry.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 15 4




208 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.5 (A_PBGT_HO) - (A_PBGT_HO)

HMI Name A_PBGT_HOParameter Name

Logical Name A_PBGT_HO

Definition Window size for averaging neighbour cell levels and averagingcurrent cell levels for power budget calculation.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32

Recommended rules A_PBGT_HO = 2 x A_LEV_HO

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 31 16

External Comment should be set to 6 in suburban area, to 8 in urban area and to 12in rural area

Single 12

Umbrella 12

Concentric 12


Microcell 6

Minicell 12


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 209 / 1278


5.2.6 (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR) - (A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR)

HMI Name A_QUAL_CA_FR_HRParameter Name

Logical Name A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR

Definition Quality averaging window size for AMR-NB FR-to-HR channeladaptation (handover Cause 27).

Coding rules step size = 1 Samfr

Mandatory rules A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 61 61




210 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.7 (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR) - (A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR)

HMI Name A_QUAL_CA_HR_FRParameter Name

Logical Name A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR

Definition Quality averaging window size for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channeladaptation.


Mandatory rules A_QUAL_CA_FR_HR >= A_QUAL_CA_HR_FR


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 61 8




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 211 / 1278


5.2.8 (A_QUAL_HO) - (A_QUAL_HO)

HMI Name A_QUAL_HOParameter Name

Logical Name A_QUAL_HO

Definition Window size for quality averages for handover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32

Recommended rules A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 31 8


Single 8

Umbrella 8

Concentric 8


Microcell 4

Minicell 8


Cell Type Dependent



212 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.9 (A_QUAL_PC) - (A_QUAL_PC)

HMI Name A_QUAL_PCParameter Name

Logical Name A_QUAL_PC

Definition Window size for quality averages for power control.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32

Recommended rules A_QUAL_HO = 2 x A_QUAL_PC

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 31 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 213 / 1278


5.2.10 (A_RANGE_HO) - (A_RANGE_HO)

HMI Name A_RANGE_HOParameter Name

Logical Name A_RANGE_HO

Definition Window size for distance averages.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 31 8




214 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.11 (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (A_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

HMI Name A_TRAFFIC_LOADParameter Name

Logical Name A_TRAFFIC_LOAD

Definition Window size for load averages.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 16 12



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

4 4 8 8 12 12 12 12 12 12 12 12

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 215 / 1278


5.2.12 (AC 0) - (AC_0)

HMI Name AC 0Parameter Name

Logical Name AC_0

Definition Indicates if Access Class 0 is barred.

Coding rules 0: not barred, 1: barred

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




216 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.13 (AC 1) - (AC_1)


Logical Name AC_1



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 217 / 1278


5.2.14 (AC 11) - (AC_11)


Logical Name AC_11



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




218 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.15 (AC 12) - (AC_12)


Logical Name AC_12



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 219 / 1278


5.2.16 (AC 13) - (AC_13)


Logical Name AC_13



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




220 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.17 (AC 14) - (AC_14)


Logical Name AC_14



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 221 / 1278


5.2.18 (AC 15) - (AC_15)


Logical Name AC_15



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




222 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.19 (AC 2) - (AC_2)


Logical Name AC_2



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 223 / 1278


5.2.20 (AC 3) - (AC_3)


Logical Name AC_3



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




224 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.21 (AC 4) - (AC_4)


Logical Name AC_4



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 225 / 1278


5.2.22 (AC 5) - (AC_5)


Logical Name AC_5



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




226 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.23 (AC 6) - (AC_6)


Logical Name AC_6



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 227 / 1278


5.2.24 (AC 7) - (AC_7)


Logical Name AC_7



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




228 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.25 (AC 8) - (AC_8)


Logical Name AC_8



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 229 / 1278


5.2.26 (AC 9) - (AC_9)


Logical Name AC_9



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




230 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.27 (ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST) - (ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST)

HMI Name ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LISTParameter Name

Logical Name ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LIST

Definition Enables/disables the addition of the legacy HR codec type in the listof supported codec type provided to the TFO remote partner for agiven AMR-NB call, when that call is currently established in HalfRate for cell load reason and when TFO is possible for that call (TFOon AMR-NB supported by the TC and configured in the cell).

Coding rules 0: HR SV1 is never provided in the list of supported codec types.1: HR SV1 may be provided (if supported by the MS and configuredin the cell) in the list of supported codec types, in addition to HR SV3.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment - Significant if EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled- TFO on AMR-NB function is available on BSC Evolution only.- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on goingcalls are not disrupted. Change applied only on new AMR-NB callallocated in Half Rate after modification



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 231 / 1278


5.2.28 (ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM) -(ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM)

HMI Name ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAMParameter Name

Logical Name ADDITIONAL_RESELECT_PARAM

Definition Indicates if C2 cell selection parameters are present inSYS_INFO_7&8 or SYS_INFO_4.

Coding rules 1bit; 0= the SI 4 rest octets, if present, are used to derive the value ofPI and possibly C2 parameters.1= the value of PI and possibly C2 parameters in a SYS INFO TYPEor message 8 are used

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




232 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.29 (AG_PREMPT_PCH) - (AG_PREMPT_PCH)

HMI Name AG_PREMPT_PCHParameter Name

Logical Name AG_PREMPT_PCH

Definition Flag to enable pre-emption of Paging sub-channels for Access Grantmessages when there is one remaining free AGCH block.

Coding rules 0 = disabled, 1 = enabled

Mandatory rules Let’s define the free AGCH blocks as the number of blocks remainingfor the AGCH messages when the BCCH extended block and NCHblocks have been excluded.- If there is no free AGCH block then the flag is not used (pre-emptionmandatory, defaultvalue 0 is not used by BTS )- If there is only one free AGCH block then AG_PREMPT_PCH =1 or0 (pre-emption allowed)- If there is more than one free AGCH then AG_PREMPT_PCH = 0(pre-emption forbidden).


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 233 / 1278


5.2.30 (ALLOC_ANYWAY) - (ALLOC_ANYWAY)

HMI Name ALLOC_ANYWAYParameter Name

Logical Name ALLOC_ANYWAY

Definition Controls whether a queued request can be allocated on freeresource at expiry of its queuing timer independently of the thresholdNUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment only relevant when NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0



234 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.31 (AMR_FR_HYST) - (AMR_FR_HYST)

HMI Name AMR_FR_HYSTParameter Name

Logical Name AMR_FR_HYST

Definition Hysteresis for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation.

Coding rules step size=0.5 dB; 0 = 0.0 dB, 1 = 0.5 dB, ..., 15 = 7.5 dB

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST +AMR_FR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 1...3).The recommended value for the preferred AMR FRconfigurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via thePREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter is:AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14: 2 dB.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 7.5 2

External Comment Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset(12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s).Significant only if EN_AMR_FR is set to TRUE.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 235 / 1278


5.2.32 (AMR_FR_SUBSET) - (AMR_FR_SUBSET)

HMI Name AMR_FR_SUBSETParameter Name

Logical Name AMR_FR_SUBSET

Definition Bitmap (8 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used forAMR-NB FR calls (up to 4 codecs selected by the operator or codecsassociated to the selected preferred AMR configuration).

Coding rules bit 8 (most significant)=1: 12,2 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 7=1: 10,2 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 6=1: 7,95 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 5=1: 7,40 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 4=1: 6,70 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 3=1: 5,90 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 2=1: 5,15 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset.

AMR configuration 0 is composed of the codec: 4.75 Kbit/secAMR configuration 1 is composed of the codec: 12.20, 7.40, 5.90and 4.75 Kbit/secAMR configuration 2 is composed of the codec: 5.90 Kbit/secAMR configuration 3 is composed of the codec: 6.70 Kbit/secAMR configuration 4 is composed of the codec: 7.40 Kbit/secAMR configuration 5 is composed of the codec: 7.95 Kbit/secAMR configuration 6 is composed of the codec: 10.20 Kbit/secAMR configuration 7 is composed of the codec: 12.20 Kbit/secAMR configuration 8 is composed of the codec: 5.90 and 4.75Kbit/secAMR configuration 9 is composed of the codec: 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75Kbit/secAMR configuration 10 is composed of the codec: 7.40, 6.70, 5.90and 4.75 Kbit/secAMR configuration 12 is composed of the codec: 10.20, 6.70, 5.90and 4.75 Kbit/secAMR configuration 14 is composed of the codec: 12.20, 7.95, 5.90and 4.75 Kbit/sec(The list of all the 16 standardized AMR-NB FR configurations aregiven in 3GPP TS 28.062)

Mandatory rules In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (amaximum of 4 bits can be set to 1).

Recommended rules The AMR configuration 1 is especially recommended for callsbetween GERAN and UMTS, because it leads in all call cases toTFO/TrFO compatible connections with optimal voice quality.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS

236 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09



None 1 240 164

External Comment - Default value corresponds to an optimal codec subset:12.2kbit/s,7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s- The AMR-NB FR configurations 11, 13 and 15 (allowing theoptimization mode) are not supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 237 / 1278


5.2.33 (AMR_FR_THR_1) - (AMR_FR_THR_1)

HMI Name AMR_FR_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name AMR_FR_THR_1

Definition Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between lowestcodec mode and second lowest codec mode.


Mandatory rules AMR_FR_THR_1 <= AMR_FR_THR_2

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST +AMR_FR_THR_1 <= 16dB.The recommended value for the preferred AMR FRconfigurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via thePREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter is:AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10, 12 and 14: 4 dB.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.5 6.5

External Comment Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset(12.2kbit/s, 7.95kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s). AMR_FR_THR_1 is not used if lessthan 2 codecs are in the AMR FR subset.Significant only if EN_AMR_FR is set to TRUE.



238 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between secondlowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode.


Mandatory rules AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2 >= AMR_FR_THR_1

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST +AMR_FR_THR_2 <= 16dB.The recommended values for the preferred AMR FRconfigurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via thePREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter are:AMR configuration 1 and 14: 6.5 dB;AMR configuration 9, 10 and 12: 5.5 dB.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.5 11.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 239 / 1278





Definition Threshold for AMR-NB FR codec mode adaptation between thirdlowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode.


Mandatory rules AMR_FR_THR_3 >= AMR_FR_THR_2

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_FR_HYST +AMR_FR_THR_3 <= 16dB.The recommended values for the preferred AMR FRconfigurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via thePREF_CONFIG_FR_AMR_NB parameter are:AMR configuration 1 and 14: 11.5 dB;AMR configuration 10: 6.5 dB;AMR configuration 12: 8 dB.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.5 11.5




240 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.36 (AMR_HR_HYST) - (AMR_HR_HYST)

HMI Name AMR_HR_HYSTParameter Name

Logical Name AMR_HR_HYST

Definition Hysteresis for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST +AMR_HR_THR_i <= 16dB (with i = 1...3).The recommended value for the preferred AMR HRconfigurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via thePREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter is:AMR configuration 1, 8, 9, 10: 2 dB.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 7.5 2

External Comment Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset(7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s).Significant only if EN_AMR_HR is set to TRUE.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 241 / 1278


5.2.37 (AMR_HR_SUBSET) - (AMR_HR_SUBSET)

HMI Name AMR_HR_SUBSETParameter Name

Logical Name AMR_HR_SUBSET

Definition Bitmap (6 bits) defining the codec subset that shall be used forAMR-NB HR calls (up to 4 codecs selected by the operator or codecsassociated to the selected preferred AMR configuration).

Coding rules Coded on 1 byte.bit 8 (most significant) = 0bit 7 = 0;bit 6 =1: 7,95 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 5=1: 7,40 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 4=1: 6,70 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 3=1: 5,90 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 2=1: 5,15 kbit/s is part of the subset;bit 1 (least significant)=1: 4,75 kbit/s is part of the subset;

AMR configuration 0 is composed of the codec: 4.75 Kbit/secAMR configuration 1 is composed of the codec: 7.40, 5.90 and 4.75Kbit/secAMR configuration 2 is composed of the codec: 5.90 Kbit/secAMR configuration 3 is composed of the codec: 6.70 Kbit/secAMR configuration 8 is composed of the codec: 5.90 and 4.75Kbit/secAMR configuration 9 is composed of the codec: 6.70, 5.90 and 4.75Kbit/secAMR configuration 10 is composed of the codec: 7.40, 6.70, 5.90and 4.75 Kbit/sec(The list of all the 9 standardized AMR-NB HR configurations aregiven in 3GPP TS 28.062)

Mandatory rules - In one subset a maximum of 4 codec modes can be chosen (amaximum of 4 bits can be set to 1).- The subset shall not contain only 7.4 kbit/s codec mode. Asconsequence, the AMR configuration 4 is forbidden too.

Recommended rules The AMR configuration 1 is especially recommended for callsbetween GERAN and UMTS, because it leads in all call cases toTFO/TrFO compatible connections with optimal voice quality.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 1 60 22

242 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


External Comment - Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset(7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s).- The codec mode 7.95 kbit/s (and AMR configuration 5, asconsequence) is not supported by the Alcatel-Lucent BSS.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 243 / 1278


5.2.38 (AMR_HR_THR_1) - (AMR_HR_THR_1)

HMI Name AMR_HR_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name AMR_HR_THR_1

Definition Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between lowestcodec mode and second lowest codec mode.


Mandatory rules AMR_HR_THR_1 <= AMR_HR_THR_2

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST +AMR_HR_THR_1 <= 16dB.The recommended values for the preferred AMR HRconfigurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via thePREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter are:AMR configuration 1, 9 and 10: 10.5 dB;AMR configuration 8: 11 dB.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.5 11

External Comment Default value corresponds to the optimal default codec subset(7.4kbit/s, 5.9kbit/s, 5.15kbit/s). AMR_HR_THR_1 is not used if lessthan 2 codecs are in the AMR HR subset.Significant only if EN_AMR_HR is set to TRUE.



244 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between secondlowest codec mode and third lowest codec mode.


Mandatory rules AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2 >= AMR_HR_THR_1

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST +AMR_HR_THR_2 <= 16dB.The recommended value for the preferred AMR HRconfigurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via thePREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter is:AMR configuration 1, 9 and 10: 12 dB.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.5 12.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 245 / 1278





Definition Threshold for AMR-NB HR codec mode adaptation between thirdlowest codec mode and fourth lowest codec mode.


Mandatory rules AMR_HR_THR_3 >= AMR_HR_THR_2

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16dB, following rule is highly recommended : AMR_HR_HYST +AMR_HR_THR_3 <= 16dB.The recommended value for the preferred AMR HRconfigurations given in 3GPP TS 28.062 and selected via thePREF_CONFIG_HR_AMR_NB parameter is:AMR configuration 10: 13 dB.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.5 12.5




246 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.41 (AMR_START_MODE_FR) - (AMR_START_MODE_FR)

HMI Name AMR_START_MODE_FRParameter Name

Logical Name AMR_START_MODE_FR

Definition Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB FR call, untilcodec mode adaptation is started by the BTS.

Coding rules 0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec modeof the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subsetcontains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode(used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highestcodec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 4 0

External Comment When the TFO function is enabled in case of AMR narrow bandcodec (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) in the cell, the Alcatel-Lucent BSSalways considers the implicit rule is used for the initial codec mode.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 247 / 1278


5.2.42 (AMR_START_MODE_HR) - (AMR_START_MODE_HR)

HMI Name AMR_START_MODE_HRParameter Name

Logical Name AMR_START_MODE_HR

Definition Indicates the codec used at the beginning of a AMR-NB HR call, untilcodec mode adaptation is started by the BTS.

Coding rules 0: implicit rule is used for initial codec mode; 1: lowest codec modeof the subset; 2: second lowest codec mode (used if the subsetcontains more than one codec mode); 3: third lowest codec mode(used if the subset contains more than two codec modes); 4: highestcodec mode (used if the subset contains four codec modes)

Mandatory rules If AMR_START_MODE_HR is explicit (I.e. not equal to 0), thechosen codec mode shall not correspond to 7.40 kbit/s.

Recommended rules Use codec mode 6.7 kbit/s as start mode for AMR-NB HR shouldbe avoided.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 4 0

External Comment When the TFO function is enabled in case of AMR narrow bandcodec (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) in the cell, the Alcatel-Lucent BSSalways considers the implicit rule is used for the initial codec mode.



248 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.43 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1)

HMI Name AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1Parameter Name

Logical Name AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1

Definition Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transitionbetween lowest codec mode and second lowest codec mode.


Mandatory rules AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB,following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1+ AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 7.5 2.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 249 / 1278


5.2.44 (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2)

HMI Name AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2Parameter Name

Logical Name AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2

Definition Hysteresis for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation, for transitionbetween highest codec mode and second lowest codec mode


Mandatory rules AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<=AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB,following rules is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2+ AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 7.5 2.5




250 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.45 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1)

HMI Name AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1

Definition Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation betweenlowest codec mode and secondlowest codec mode.


Mandatory rules - AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2- AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<= AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB,following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1 +AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 <= 16dB

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.5 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 251 / 1278


5.2.46 (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2) - (AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2)

HMI Name AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2Parameter Name

Logical Name AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2

Definition Threshold for AMR-WB GMSK codec mode adaptation betweensecond lowest codec mode and highest codec mode


Mandatory rules - AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1 < AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2- AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_1+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_1<= AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2+AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2

Recommended rules As the BTS is not able to compute C/I values higher than 16 dB,following rule is highly recommended : AMR_WB_GMSK_HYST_2 +AMR_WB_GMSK_THR_2 <= 16dB

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.5 8




252 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.47 (AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOAD) - (EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR)

HMI Name AUTO_BAR_BSS_OVERLOADParameter Name

Logical Name EN_BSS_OVRL_CLASS_BAR

Definition This flag enables/disables access class automatic barring uponBTS/BSC overload.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 253 / 1278


5.2.48 (AUTO_BAR_CELL) - (AUT_BAR)

HMI Name AUTO_BAR_CELLParameter Name

Logical Name AUT_BAR

Definition This flag enables/inhibits automatic barring of cell.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




254 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.49 (AUTO_BAR_EC) - (EC_BAR)

HMI Name AUTO_BAR_ECParameter Name

Logical Name EC_BAR

Definition This flag enables/disables automatic barring of Emergency Class.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 255 / 1278


5.2.50 (Automatic AC barring on TCH load) - (EN_LOAD_MNGT)

HMI Name Automatic AC barring on TCH loadParameter Name

Logical Name EN_LOAD_MNGT

Definition This flag enables/disables automatic barring of access classes onTCH load criterion.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




256 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.51 (B_NUM) - (B_NUM)

HMI Name B_NUMParameter Name

Logical Name B_NUM

Definition Number of BLOCK/UNBLOCK messages sent in one burst.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 35 5

External Comment Default value depends on MSC type.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 257 / 1278


5.2.52 (BCC) - (BCC (BSC))

HMI Name BCCParameter Name

Logical Name BCC (BSC)

Definition BTS colour code of the cell.


Mandatory rules Equal to BCC (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0

External Comment Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated hereis for implementation purposes.



258 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.53 (BCC) - (BCC (MFS))


Logical Name BCC (MFS)

Definition BTS colour code of the cell.


Mandatory rules Equal to BCC (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 259 / 1278


5.2.54 (BCC) - (BCC (n))


Logical Name BCC (n)

Definition BTS colour code of the adjacent cell.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 7 0




260 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.55 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC))

HMI Name BCCH_ARFCNParameter Name

Logical Name BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC)

Definition Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of thefrequency used as BCCH in the adjacent cell.

Coding rules The coded default value of -1 is for implementation purposes only;this dummy value indicates that the operator does not provide anyBCCH yet.

Mandatory rules - BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)

For Evolium serving cell:- there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set ofall the target cells for reselection (no matter the 2G/3G neighborhoodof the serving cell for reselection) .- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, thenthere can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of allthe target cells for handover.- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is mixed 2G/3G,then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequenciesfor the set of all the target cells for handover.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1023 None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 261 / 1278


5.2.56 (BCCH_ARFCN) - (BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS))

HMI Name BCCH_ARFCNParameter Name

Logical Name BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)

Definition Indicates the Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number of thefrequency used as BCCH in the adjacent cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules - BCCH_ARFCN(n)(BSC) = BCCH_ARFCN(n)(MFS)

For Evolium serving cell:- there can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set ofall the target cells for reselection (no matter the 2G/3G neighborhoodof the serving cell for reselection) .- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is 2G only, thenthere can be up to 32 different BCCH 2G frequencies for the set of allthe target cells for handover.- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is mixed 2G/3G,then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequenciesfor the set of all the target cells for handover.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 1023 None




262 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.57 (BCCH_EXT) - (BCCH_EXT)

HMI Name BCCH_EXTParameter Name

Logical Name BCCH_EXT

Definition This flag enables / disables the use of extended BCCH.

Coding rules 0: false, 1:true

Mandatory rules -When EN_SOLSA is enabled, the BCCH_EXT shall be set to true.-When EN_VGCS is disabled :. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1-When EN_VGCS is enabled :. if BCCH_EXT = false, BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS

Recommended rules The support of extended BCCH (parameter BCCH_EXT) is HIGHLYrecommended in cells having adjacent cells in several frequencybands and at least 18 adjacent BCCH within the same band.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 263 / 1278


5.2.58 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC))

HMI Name BS_AG_BLKS_RESParameter Name

Logical Name BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC)

Definition Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel(AGCH).

Coding rules coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7)

Mandatory rules -BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a givencell-when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell,BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0- when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 andBS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell.-When EN_VGCS is disabled :. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1-When EN_VGCS is enabled :. if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4

External Comment - Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0- For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1- Parameter change:no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted.But any modification impacts Paging (paging queues are reset andpaging is suspended until the reconfiguration is completed).



264 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.59 (BS_P_CON_ACK) - (BS_P_CON_ACK)

HMI Name BS_P_CON_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name BS_P_CON_ACK

Definition Supervision of the BS Power Control procedure.

Coding rules step size=1 (2 x Samfr)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


2 x Samfr 0 31 3


Single 3

Umbrella 3

Concentric 3


Microcell 2

Minicell 3


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 265 / 1278


5.2.60 (BS_P_CON_INT) - (BS_P_CON_INT)

HMI Name BS_P_CON_INTParameter Name

Logical Name BS_P_CON_INT

Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive BS power commands.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


2 x Samfr 0 31 1


Single 1

Umbrella 1

Concentric 1


Microcell 0

Minicell 1


Cell Type Dependent



266 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.61 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC))

HMI Name BS_PA_MFRMSParameter Name

Logical Name BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC)

Definition Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrencesof a Paging Group.

Coding rules coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9)

Mandatory rules BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 2 9 5

External Comment The bigger this parameter is, the lesser the MS power consumptionis.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 267 / 1278


5.2.62 (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION) - (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION)

HMI Name BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATIONParameter Name

Logical Name BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION

Definition This parameter defines the power reduction, expressed in 0.1dB,applied on the output power (after leveling). In a concentric ormulti-band cell, this attenuation applies on the output power of theTRX(s) of the outer zone.

Coding rules step size = 0.1dB.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.9 0




268 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.63 (BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER) -(BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER)

HMI Name BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNERParameter Name

Logical Name BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNER

Definition This parameter defines the power reduction, expressed in 0.1dB,applied on the output power of the TRX(s) of the inner zone in aconcentric or multi-band cell (after leveling).

Coding rules step size = 0.1dB.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 31.9 0

External Comment The parameter value depends on configuration. The default valueindicated here is for implementation purposes

Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric #

Concentric Umbrella #

Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 269 / 1278


5.2.64 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC))

When a cell is shared, the BS_TX_POWER_MAX andBS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNER powers must always be defined against theactual physical power of the main sector. If the actual power of the secondarysector is lower than the actual power of the main sector, the operator has toadjust the values of BS_TX_POWER_MAX and BS_TX_POWER_MAX_INNERto avoid requiring too high an output power than is actually available.

HMI Name BS_TXPWR_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)

Definition This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the attenuatedmaximum GMSK output power of the BTS.It is always set to 0 by the OMC.A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION defined instep of 0.1dB, is managed instead.

Coding rules step size = 2dB. 0: 0 dB, 1: -2dB, ..., 15: -30dB

Mandatory rules Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -30 0 0

External Comment The BTS maximum allowed transmit power is defined relatively tothe sector maximum RF transmit power in GMSK (due to hardwarelimitation).



270 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.65 (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC))


HMI Name BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNERParameter Name

Logical Name BS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER (BSC)

Definition This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the attenuatedmaximum GMSK output power of the TRX of the inner zone in aconcentric or multi-band cell.It is always set to 0 by the OMC.A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION_INNERdefined in step of 0.1dB, is managed instead.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -30 0 0


The parameter value depends on configuration. The default valueindicated here is for implementation purposes.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 271 / 1278


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric #


Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



272 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.66 (BS_TXPWR_MIN) - (BS_TXPWR_MIN)

HMI Name BS_TXPWR_MINParameter Name

Logical Name BS_TXPWR_MIN

Definition This parameter defines the maximum value of the power attenuation(so the minimum allowed transmission power) relative to theattenuated maximum GMSK output power of the BTS.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -30 0 -24




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 273 / 1278


5.2.67 (BSC Primary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_primary_address)

HMI Name BSC Primary X25 AddressParameter Name

Logical Name BSC_X25_primary_address

Definition BSC X25 primary address.

Coding rules 0 to 15 characters string. *: default = empty string

Mandatory rules changeable if SMSCB_STATE=disabled


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem OMC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 *

External Comment The minimum, maximum and default values indicated are only forimplementation purposes.



274 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.68 (BSC Primary X25 Address [1]) - (BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1])

HMI Name BSC Primary X25 Address [1]Parameter Name

Logical Name BSC_X25_primary_address_i [1]

Definition First character of BSC X25 primary address.

Coding rules 1character of a string. default = blank character



Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 275 / 1278


5.2.69 (BSC Primary X25 Address [10]) - (BSC_X25_primary_address_i[10])



Definition Tenth character of BSC X25 primary address.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




276 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Eleventh character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 277 / 1278





Definition Twelfth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




278 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Thirteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 279 / 1278





Definition Fourteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




280 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Fifteenth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 281 / 1278





Definition Second character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




282 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Third character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 283 / 1278





Definition Fourth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




284 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Fifth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 285 / 1278





Definition Sixth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




286 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Seventh character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 287 / 1278





Definition Eighth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




288 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Ninth character of BSC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 289 / 1278


5.2.83 (BSC Secondary X25 Address) - (BSC_X25_secondary_address)

HMI Name BSC Secondary X25 AddressParameter Name

Logical Name BSC_X25_secondary_address

Definition BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem OMC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 *




290 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.84 (BSC Secondary X25 Address [1]) -(BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1])

HMI Name BSC Secondary X25 Address [1]Parameter Name

Logical Name BSC_X25_secondary_address_i [1]

Definition First character of BSC X25 secondary address.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 291 / 1278





Definition Tenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




292 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Eleventh character of BSC X25 secondary address.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 293 / 1278





Definition Twelfth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




294 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Thirteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 295 / 1278





Definition Fourteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




296 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Fifteenth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 297 / 1278





Definition Second character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




298 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Third character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 299 / 1278





Definition Fourth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




300 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Fifth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 301 / 1278





Definition Sixth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




302 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Seventh character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 303 / 1278





Definition Eighth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




304 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Ninth character of BSC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 305 / 1278


5.2.99 (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND) - (BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND)

HMI Name BSC_EN_RF_RES_INDParameter Name

Logical Name BSC_EN_RF_RES_IND

Definition Enables/disables the RF RESOURCE INDICATION processing bythe BSC.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




306 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.100 (BSIC) - (BSIC (GSM))

HMI Name BSICParameter Name

Logical Name BSIC (GSM)

Definition Concatenation of the NCC and the BCC.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Abstract

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None # # #




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 307 / 1278


5.2.101 (BTS_Queue_Length) - (BTS_Q_LENGTH)

HMI Name BTS_Queue_LengthParameter Name

Logical Name BTS_Q_LENGTH

Definition Maximum number of Assignment Requests and Handover Requeststhat can be queued simultaneously.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 64 3



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

4 4 6 6 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10

308 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.102 (CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENT) - (RE)

HMI Name CALL_RE_ESTABLISHMENTParameter Name

Logical Name RE

Definition This flag indicates to the MS if call reestablishment is allowed in thecell.

Coding rules 0: allowed, 1: not allowed

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 309 / 1278


5.2.103 (Call_User_Data_Selector) - (Call_user_data_sel)

HMI Name Call_User_Data_SelectorParameter Name

Logical Name Call_user_data_sel

Definition Identifies the higher protocol selector for an outgoing connection.

Coding rules 0 to 16 bytes string

Mandatory rules Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabled


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 0

External Comment Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here isfor implementation purposes.Each byte of the string can get a value in the range [0..255].



310 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.104 (Candidate cell priority) - (PRIORITY(0,n))

HMI Name Candidate cell priorityParameter Name

Logical Name PRIORITY(0,n)

Definition Priority of the cell n in the HO candidate cell evaluation process.

Coding rules 0: highest priority, 5: lowest priority

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


None 0 5 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 311 / 1278


5.2.105 (CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) -(CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)

HMI Name CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITIONParameter Name

Logical Name CAPTURE_TRAFFIC_CONDITION

Definition This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the servingcell to trigger a "general capture" handover.

Coding rules 0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 2 0




312 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.106 (CBC Primary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_primary_address)

HMI Name CBC Primary X25 AddressParameter Name

Logical Name CBC_X25_primary_address

Definition CBC X25 primary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 32




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 313 / 1278


5.2.107 (CBC Secondary X25 Address) - (CBC_X25_secondary_address)

HMI Name CBC Secondary X25 AddressParameter Name

Logical Name CBC_X25_secondary_address

Definition CBC X25 secondary address.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 32




314 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.108 (CBC_Operator) - (Operator)

HMI Name CBC_OperatorParameter Name

Logical Name Operator

Definition Identifies the CBC operator.

Coding rules 0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by theOMC on the OMC/BSC interface . BSC performs the padding ofOMC string with space characters on the right side of the string until20 bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded spacecharacters from the retrieved BSC value.



Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 32




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 315 / 1278


5.2.109 (CBC_Password) - (Password)

HMI Name CBC_PasswordParameter Name

Logical Name Password

Definition CBC password.

Coding rules 0 to 20 characters string (default = empty string) are sent by theOMC on the OMC/BSC interface. BSC performs the padding of OMCstring with space characters on the right side of the string until 20bytes are reached. At Upload, OMC RNL removes padded spacecharacters from the retrieved BSC value.



Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 32




316 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.110 (CBC_Window) - (CBC_window)

HMI Name CBC_WindowParameter Name

Logical Name CBC_window

Definition Maximum number of outstanding primitives on the BSC/CBCinterface for both incoming and outgoing primitives.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Can be changed only when SMSCB_State is disabledshall be set to "1" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 3 1

External Comment Default value corresponds to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1.If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, CBC_Window should be set to 3.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 317 / 1278


5.2.111 (CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIOD) - (RACHRT)

HMI Name CCCH_LOAD_IND_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name RACHRT

Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive sendings of CCCH LOADINDICATION messages.

Coding rules step size=1 (51mfr)

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules RACHRT > RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


51mfr 1 255 255




318 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.112 (CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIOD) - (RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER)

HMI Name CCCH_LOAD_MEAS_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER

Definition Period over which CCCH load measurements are made.

Coding rules step size=1

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules RACH_LOAD_MEAS_PER < RACHRT

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


51mfr 1 255 32




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 319 / 1278


5.2.113 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type)

HMI Name Cell TypeParameter Name

Logical Name Cell_Type

Definition Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE,CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an OMC own cell.Used for cell default parameter template.

Coding rules Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), UmbrellaConcentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7),Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), IndoorConcentric(11)

Mandatory rules - EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled whenCELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer".A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall havethe same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable).- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric"cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is"PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does notapply to the external cells.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Abstract

SubSystem OMC

Instance cell


None * * #

External Comment *: possible values are:- Single- Umbrella- Umbrella Concentric- Micro- Mini- Micro Concentric- Mini Concentric- Indoor- Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI)- Extended Inner- Extended Outer



320 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.114 (Cell Type) - (Cell_Type(n))

HMI Name Cell TypeParameter Name

Logical Name Cell_Type(n)

Definition Combination of CELL_DIMENSION_TYPE, CELL_LAYER_TYPE,CELL_PARTITION_TYPE, CELL_RANGE for an adjacent cell (OMCown cell or OMC external cell).

Coding rules Single (0), Concentric (1), Umbrella (2), Micro (3), UmbrellaConcentric (4), Mini (5), Extended Inner (6), Extended Outer (7),Mini Concentric (8), Micro Concentric (9), Indoor (10), IndoorConcentric(11), GAN(12)

Mandatory rules - EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled whenCELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer".A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall havethe same LAC (respectively RAC when they are PS capable).- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric"cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is"PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does notapply to the external cells.- The "GAN" value is allowed only for external cells


Category Site (CAE)

Type Abstract

SubSystem OMC

Instance cell


None * * #

External Comment *: possible values are:- Single- Umbrella- Umbrella Concentric- Micro- Mini- Micro Concentric- Mini Concentric- Indoor- Indoor Concentric (labelled "Indoor Multiband" on the HMI)- Extended Inner- Extended Outer- GAN



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 321 / 1278


5.2.115 (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY) - (CELL_BAR_QUALIFY)

HMI Name CELL_BAR_QUALIFYParameter Name

Logical Name CELL_BAR_QUALIFY

Definition Indicates the priority of the cell for cell selection.

Coding rules 0: normal priority, 1: low priority

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




322 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.116 (CELL_CIPH_SET) - (CELL_CIPH_SET)

HMI Name CELL_CIPH_SETParameter Name

Logical Name CELL_CIPH_SET

Definition List of flag indicating what are the ciphering algorithms allowed bythe operator (each bit represents an A5 algorithm).When several algorithms can be selected (depending on networkconfiguration, MS capabilities and operator choice), the one withthe highest A5 number is used.

Coding rules Coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates if correspondingencryption algorithm is permitted.Bit x=’0’ : algorithm A5/x not permittedBit x=’1’ : algorithm A5/x permitted

bit 0 : A5/0 (no ciphering)bit 1 : A5/1.bit 2 : A5/2bit 3 : A5/3bit 4 : A5/4...bit 7 : A5/7.

Mandatory rules The possible values are :- A5/0- A5/0 + A5/1- A5/0 + A5/1 +A5/3

- The value A5/0 + A5/3 is not allowed because today not all mobilessupport A5/3.- If CELL_CIPH_SET does not allow the A5/3 usage in the cell, thenEN_A53_PREF_ALLOC_STRATEGY cannot be enabled.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Bitmap

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 255 1

External Comment A5/2 is not supported by the BSS.In cells where EN_DTM = enabled, the algorithm A5/3 is not usedfor MS, DTM capable but not supporting ciphering changes in DTMmode.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 323 / 1278




324 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.117 (CELL_EVALUATION) - (CELL_EV)

HMI Name CELL_EVALUATIONParameter Name

Logical Name CELL_EV

Definition Handover cell evaluation process applied in the cell.

Coding rules 0: Order, 1: Grade

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1


Single grade (1)

Umbrella grade (1)

Concentric grade (1)

Concentric Umbrella grade (1)

Microcell order (0)

Minicell grade (1)

Extended inner cell grade (1)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell grade (1)


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 325 / 1278


5.2.118 (CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) -(CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESISParameter Name

Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS

Definition Level hysteresis for cell reselection applied when the new cell is in adifferent location area or, for a GPRS MS, in a different routing area,or when a GPRS MS is in GMM ready state.

Coding rules step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits (000 : 0 dB, 111 : 14 dB)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 14 6

External Comment If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via theprovisioning context of the OMC.



326 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.119 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(BSC))


Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (BSC)



Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 126 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 327 / 1278


5.2.120 (CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND) -(CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND)

HMI Name CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_INDParameter Name

Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_PARAM_IND

Definition Indicates to the MS if parameters for C2 reselection criterion arebroadcast.

Coding rules 0: not present, 1: present

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




328 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.121 (CI) - (CI (BSC))

HMI Name CIParameter Name

Logical Name CI (BSC)

Definition Cell Identity.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to CI (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 65535 65535




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 329 / 1278


5.2.122 (CI) - (CI(n) (BSC))


Logical Name CI(n) (BSC)

Definition Cell Identity of adjacent cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to CI(n)(MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 65535 65535




330 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.123 (CI_SI) - (CI_SI)

HMI Name CI_SIParameter Name

Logical Name CI_SI

Definition Specific Cell Identity to be broadcasted in the SI3 and SI6 messagesinstead of the value of the other O&M parameter "CI".

Coding rules When set to "0", it indicates that the feature is de-activated, i.e theexisting CI is sent in SI3 and SI6 messages

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 65535 0

External Comment Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going trafficis not disrupted. But any modification impacts System InformationBroadcasting. Change applied immediately after modification, inbroadcasted SI3 messages and in dedicated SI6 messages of thecurrent calls.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 331 / 1278


5.2.124 (Circuit Identity Code) - (CIC)

HMI Name Circuit Identity CodeParameter Name

Logical Name CIC

Definition Circuit Identity Code of an A interface circuit.

Coding rules Coded over 16 bits: top 11 bits = pcm number, remaining 5 bits =TS number

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance A ch


None 0 65535 65535




332 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.125 (DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_DEC_HO_margin)

HMI Name DELTA_DEC_HO_MARGINParameter Name

Logical Name DELTA_DEC_HO_margin

Definition Correction factor favouring handover cause "Power budget" whentraffic is high in the serving cell and low in neighbour cell(s).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 24 0


Single 5 dB (5)

Umbrella 5 dB (5)

Concentric 5 dB (5)


Microcell 4 dB (4)

Minicell 5 dB (5)


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 333 / 1278


5.2.126 (DELTA_INC_HO_MARGIN) - (DELTA_INC_HO_margin)

HMI Name DELTA_INC_HO_MARGINParameter Name

Logical Name DELTA_INC_HO_margin

Definition Correction factor penalizing handover cause "Power budget" whentraffic is low in the serving cell and high in neighbour cell(s).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 24 0


Single 5 dB (5)

Umbrella 5 dB (5)

Concentric 5 dB (5)


Microcell 4 dB (4)

Minicell 5 dB (5)


Cell Type Dependent



334 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.127 (Directed_Retry) - (EN_DR)

HMI Name Directed_RetryParameter Name

Logical Name EN_DR

Definition This flag enables/disables the execution of Directed Retry.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 335 / 1278


5.2.128 (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK)

HMI Name DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSKParameter Name

Logical Name DL_DTX_AMR_WB_GMSK

Definition This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-WBGMSK speech calls.

Coding rules 0 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK disabled,1 : DL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK enabled

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1- If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which"dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it isrecommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit thepotential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSsof the MC modules.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




336 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.129 (Downlink DTX) - (DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE)

HMI Name Downlink DTXParameter Name

Logical Name DOWNLINK_DTX_ENABLE

Definition This flag defines if downlink DTX is allowed for FR and EFR calls.

Coding rules 0: DTX not allowed, 1: DTX allowed

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1- If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which"dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it isrecommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit thepotential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSsof the MC modules.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 337 / 1278


5.2.130 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR)

HMI Name DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_FRParameter Name

Logical Name Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_FR

Definition This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NBFR speech calls.

Coding rules 0 : DL DTX for AMR FR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR FR enabled

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1- If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which"dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it isrecommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit thepotential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSsof the MC modules.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




338 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.131 (DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR)

HMI Name DOWNLINK_DTX_AMR_HRParameter Name

Logical Name Downlink_DTX_enable_AMR_HR

Definition This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for AMR-NBHR speech calls.

Coding rules 0 : DL DTX for AMR HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for AMR HR enabled

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1- If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which"dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it isrecommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit thepotential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSsof the MC modules.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 339 / 1278


5.2.132 (DOWNLINK_DTX_HR) - (Downlink_DTX_enable_HR)

HMI Name DOWNLINK_DTX_HRParameter Name

Logical Name Downlink_DTX_enable_HR

Definition This flag enables / disables the use of downlink DTX for HR speechcalls.

Coding rules 0 : DL DTX for HR disabled, 1 : DL DTX for HR enabled

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - should be enabled when EN_TFO = 1- If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which"dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it isrecommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit thepotential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSsof the MC modules.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




340 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.133 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR)

HMI Name DTX_FR_INDICATORParameter Name

Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_FR

Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM Phase 1 and 2 for FR. Appliesfor all codec types except AMR-NB and AMR-WB.

Coding rules 0: MS May Use DTX for FR1: MS Shall Use DTX for FR,2: MS shall not use DTX for FR

Mandatory rules The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR /DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR):may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not,shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR= shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem OMC

Instance cell


None 0 2 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 341 / 1278


5.2.134 (DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR)

HMI Name DTX_FR_INDICATOR_AMRParameter Name

Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR

Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only forAMR-NB FR.

Coding rules 0: MS may use DTX for AMR-NB FR,1: MS shall use DTX for AMR-NB FR,2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR-NB FR

Mandatory rules The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR /DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR):may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not,shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.The only combination that is NOT allowed is:DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not andDTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may.

Recommended rules The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1

Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem OMC

Instance cell


None 0 2 2




342 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.135 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR)

HMI Name DTX_HR_INDICATORParameter Name

Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_HR

Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 for HR. Applies for allcodec types except AMR-NB and AMR-WB.

Coding rules 0: MS May Use DTX for HR1: MS Shall Use DTX for HR,2: MS shall not use DTX for HR

Mandatory rules The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR /DTX_INDICATOR_HR are possible (FR/HR):may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not,shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.The only combination that is NOT allowed is: DTX_INDICATOR_FR= shall not and DTX_INDICATOR_HR = may, I.e. shall not/may.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem OMC

Instance cell


None 0 2 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 343 / 1278


5.2.136 (DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMR) - (DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR)

HMI Name DTX_HR_INDICATOR_AMRParameter Name

Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR

Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only forAMR-NB HR.

Coding rules 0: MS may use DTX for AMR-NB HR,1: MS shall use DTX for AMR-NB HR,2: MS shall not use DTX for AMR-NB HR

Mandatory rules The following combinations between DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR /DTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR are possible (FR_AMR / HR_AMR):may/shall, may/shall not, may/may, shall/shall, shall/shall not,shall/may, shall not/shall and shall not/shall not.The only combination that is NOT allowed is:DTX_INDICATOR_FR_AMR = shall not andDTX_INDICATOR_HR_AMR = may, I.e. shall not/may.

Recommended rules The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_NB =1

Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem OMC

Instance cell


None 0 2 2




344 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.137 (DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK) -(DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK)

HMI Name DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSKParameter Name

Logical Name DTX_INDICATOR_SACCH_AMR_WB_GMSK

Definition Controls uplink DTX usage for GSM phase 2 MS. Applies only toAMR-WB GMSK.

Coding rules 0= the MS may use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK,1= the MS shall use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK,2=the MS shall not use UL DTX for AMR-WB GMSK

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The value "1" is recommended when EN_TFO_AMR_WB =1

Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 2 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 345 / 1278


5.2.138 (DWELL_TIME_STEP) - (DWELL_TIME_STEP)

HMI Name DWELL_TIME_STEPParameter Name

Logical Name DWELL_TIME_STEP

Definition Step value for the modification (increasing or decreasing) ofMIN_DWELL_TIME.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 0 30 2




346 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.139 (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE) - (EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE)

HMI Name EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSEParameter Name

Logical Name EDR_ASSIGN_FAIL_CAUSE

Definition This parameter determines the cause filled in ASSIGNMENTFAILURE sent in case of External Directed Retry.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 127 13

External Comment Default value depends on MSC type



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 347 / 1278


5.2.140 (EDR_MSG_ORDER) - (EDR_MSG_ORDER)

HMI Name EDR_MSG_ORDERParameter Name

Logical Name EDR_MSG_ORDER

Definition This parameter determines the order of transmission ofASSIGNMENT FAILURE and HANDOVER REQUIRED on the Ainterface in case of an External Directed Retry.

Coding rules 0: Ass Failure before HO Reqd, 1: Ass Failure after HO Reqd

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




348 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.141 (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED) - (EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED)

HMI Name EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINEDParameter Name

Logical Name EDR_QUEUING_MAINTAINED

Definition This flag indicates whether or not Assignment Request is maintainedin queue during External Directed Retry attempt.

Coding rules 0: Request not maintained in queue, 1: Request maintained in queue

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 349 / 1278


5.2.142 (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL) - (EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL)

HMI Name EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAILParameter Name

Logical Name EDR_SEND_ASSIGN_FAIL

Definition This flag indicates whether ASSIGNMENT FAILURE is sent to theMSC in case of External Directed Retry.

Coding rules 0: Assignment Failure not sent, 1: Assignment Failure sent

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




350 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.143 (EFR_ENABLED) - (EFR_ENABLED)

HMI Name EFR_ENABLEDParameter Name

Logical Name EFR_ENABLED

Definition This flag indicates whether the operation of enhanced full rate (EFR)is allowed in the cell.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 351 / 1278


5.2.144 (EMERGENCY_CALL) - (EC)

HMI Name EMERGENCY_CALLParameter Name

Logical Name EC

Definition Indicates if Emergency calls are allowed for all access classes oronly for access classes 11 to 15.

Coding rules 0: all access classes, 1: access classes 11 to 15 only

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




352 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.145 (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU) - (EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU)

HMI Name EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCUParameter Name

Logical Name EN_4_DR_TRE_PER_TCU

Definition Defines if the limitation of TRE is static or dynamic.For static limitation only Nb FR TRE + 2 x DR TRE < 200 is allowed.For dynamic limitation only Nb TRE < 200 is allowed.

Coding rules 0: static1:dynamic

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 353 / 1278


5.2.146 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR) - (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR)

HMI Name EN_AMR_CA_FR_HRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR

Definition This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB FR-to-HRchannel adaptation (Handover Cause 27). According to the loadof the serving cell (high or normal), the handover is triggered withdifferent thresholds values.


Mandatory rules EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 ANDEN_AMR_HR=1}


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment - When EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled in the cell, the cause 27triggering will be automatically inhibited for the AMR-NB ongoing callwith TFO (and uninhibited if TFO is given up for any reason).- When EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED is enabled,then the cause 27 triggering under normal load is automaticallyinhibited.



354 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.147 (EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED) -(EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED)

HMI Name EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADEDParameter Name

Logical Name EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED

Definition This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB FR-to-HRchannel adaptation (Handover Cause 27) under high load only.

Coding rules 0: disabled1: enabled

Mandatory rules EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED can be enabledonly if EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR =1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment - When EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR_ONLY_WHEN_LOADED is enabled,then the cause 27 triggering under normal load is automaticallyinhibited (even if EN_AMR_CA_FR_HR is enabled).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 355 / 1278


5.2.148 (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR) - (EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR)

HMI Name EN_AMR_CA_HR_FRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR

Definition This flag enables/disables intracell HO for AMR-NB channeladaptation (Handover Cause 26).


Mandatory rules EN_AMR_CA_HR_FR can be enabled only if {EN_AMR_FR=1 ANDEN_AMR_HR=1}


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment When EN_TFO_AMR_NB is enabled in the cell, the cause 26triggering will be automatically inhibited for the AMR-NB ongoing callwith TFO (and uninhibited if TFO is given up for any reason).



356 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.149 (EN_AMR_FR) - (EN_AMR_FR)

HMI Name EN_AMR_FRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_AMR_FR

Definition This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB full rate is allowed in thecell.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 357 / 1278


5.2.150 (EN_AMR_HR) - (EN_AMR_HR)

HMI Name EN_AMR_HRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_AMR_HR

Definition This flag controls whether or not AMR-NB half rate is allowed in thecell.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




358 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.151 (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK) - (EN_AMR_WB_GMSK)

HMI Name EN_AMR_WB_GMSKParameter Name

Logical Name EN_AMR_WB_GMSK

Definition This flag controls whether or not AMR-WB GMSK is allowed in thecell.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 359 / 1278


5.2.152 (EN_BALANCED_CI) - (EN_BALANCED_CI)

HMI Name EN_BALANCED_CIParameter Name

Logical Name EN_BALANCED_CI

Definition This flag enables/disables to balance the C/I measure.

Coding rules 0:disable, 1: enable

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1

External Comment Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can bedefined. This allows to define "RMS templates" (see parameterRMS_template).



360 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.153 (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO) - (EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO)

HMI Name EN_BETTER_ZONE_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_BETTER_ZONE_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "too high level in outerzone" handover cause (cause 13).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric enable (1)

Concentric Umbrella enable (1)

Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 361 / 1278


5.2.154 (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)) - (EN_BI-BAND_MS(n))

HMI Name EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)Parameter Name

Logical Name EN_BI-BAND_MS(n)

Definition This flag enables/disables the incoming handovers of bi-band MSsfrom the preferred band.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




362 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.155 (EN_BS_PC) - (EN_BS_PC)

HMI Name EN_BS_PCParameter Name

Logical Name EN_BS_PC

Definition This flag enables/disables BS Power Control.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 363 / 1278


5.2.156 (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP) - (EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP)

HMI Name EN_CIRCUIT_GROUPParameter Name

Logical Name EN_CIRCUIT_GROUP

Definition This flag enables/disables the sending of Circuit group messages.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




364 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.157 (EN_DIST_HO) - (EN_DIST_HO)

HMI Name EN_DIST_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_DIST_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "distance" handovercause (cause 6).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1


Single enable (1)

Umbrella enable (1)



Microcell disable (0)

Minicell enable (1)

Extended inner cell enable (1)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell enable (1)


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 365 / 1278


5.2.158 (EN_EDR) - (EN_EXT_DR)

HMI Name EN_EDRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_EXT_DR

Definition This flag enables/disables the Outgoing External Directed Retryprocedure.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT isset to enable.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1

External Comment For external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whetheror not the external target cells (towards which the directed retryis triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to setRESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EDR is enabled in order to get a HandoverReject message from the MSC in case all target cells are congestedand thus to attempt other procedures.



366 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.159 (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP) - (EN_EXT_MEAS_REP)

HMI Name EN_EXT_MEAS_REPParameter Name

Logical Name EN_EXT_MEAS_REP

Definition This flag enables/disables the extended measurement reporting forMobile Assisted Frequency Allocation.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 367 / 1278


5.2.160 (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO)

HMI Name EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_FAST_TRAFFIC_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the use of Fast traffic handovers.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




368 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.161 (EN_FORCED_DR) - (EN_FORCED_DR)

HMI Name EN_FORCED_DRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_FORCED_DR

Definition This flag enables/disables the "Forced Directed Retry" handovercause detection.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 369 / 1278


5.2.162 (EN_GAN_HO) - (EN_GAN_HO)

HMI Name EN_GAN_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_GAN_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the handover to GAN


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




370 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.163 (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO) - (EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO)

HMI Name EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_GENERAL_CAPTURE_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "general capture"handover cause (cause 24).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 371 / 1278


5.2.164 (EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK) -(EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK)

HMI Name EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSKParameter Name

Logical Name EN_HR_FOR_AMR_WB_GMSK

Definition Enables/disables, when the cell is loaded, the support of the HalfRate allocation (at new call establishment and during inter-cellhandover) for possible AMR-WB calls.This feature deals with the possible AMR-WB calls, ie calls for whichAMR-WB is supported by the MS, and supported by the TC, andallowed by the MSC, and allowed in the cell.

Coding rules 0: disabled,1: enabled

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment - Significant if EN_AMR_WB_GMSK is enabled- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, calls ongoing in the cell are not disrupted. Change applied only on new calls(establishment or handover) allocated in the cell after modification.



372 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.165 (EN_HSL) - (EN_HSL)

HMI Name EN_HSLParameter Name

Logical Name EN_HSL

Definition Enables SS7 HSL (High speed Signalling Link).

Coding rules 0: HSL disabled1: HSL enabled

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment Changeable on the BSC terminal.if EN_HSL = 1 the following new Q703 parameters:Q703_N1_HSL, Q_703_N2_HSL, Q703_T1_HSL, Q703_T4E_HSLand Q703_T4N_HSLreplaces the old ones:Q703_N1, Q_703_N2, Q703_T1, Q703_T4E and Q703_T4N.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 373 / 1278


5.2.166 (EN_IMM_ASS_REJ) - (EN_IM_ASS_REJ)

HMI Name EN_IMM_ASS_REJParameter Name

Logical Name EN_IM_ASS_REJ

Definition This flag indicates if the Immediate Assignment Reject procedureis enabled.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment This parameter is only valid for circuit switched traffic. For packettraffic (GPRS or EGPRS) sending of IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENTREJECT messages cannot be disabled.



374 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.167 (EN_INCOMING_HO) - (EN_IC_HO)

HMI Name EN_INCOMING_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_IC_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables incoming handovers in the cell.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 375 / 1278


5.2.168 (EN_INTERBAND_HO) - (EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH)

HMI Name EN_INTERBAND_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INTERBAND_NEIGH

Definition This flag enables / disables the multiband operation by filtering thesending of SYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 2ter/5ter.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




376 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.169 (EN_INTRA_DL) - (EN_INTRA_DL)

HMI Name EN_INTRA_DLParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INTRA_DL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink"handover cause (cause 16) for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB norAMR-WB).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 377 / 1278


5.2.170 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR)

HMI Name EN_INTRA_DL_AMRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INTRA_DL_AMR

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink"handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-NB calls.

Coding rules 0: disable, 1: enable

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to disable this intracell downlink handover whenfrequency hopping is applied

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




378 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.171 (EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK) -(EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK)

HMI Name EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSKParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INTRA_DL_AMR_WB_GMSK

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell downlink"handover cause (cause 16) for AMR-WB GMSK calls.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to disable this intracell downlink handover whenfrequency hopping is applied

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 379 / 1278


5.2.172 (EN_INTRA_UL) - (EN_INTRA_UL)

HMI Name EN_INTRA_ULParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INTRA_UL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handovercause (cause 15) for non AMR calls (neither AMR-NB nor AMR-WB).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




380 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.173 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR) - (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR)

HMI Name EN_INTRA_UL_AMRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INTRA_UL_AMR

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handovercause (cause 15) for AMR-NB calls.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover whenfrequency hopping is applied

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 381 / 1278


5.2.174 (EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK) -(EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK)

HMI Name EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSKParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INTRA_UL_AMR_WB_GMSK

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "intracell uplink" handovercause (cause 15) for AMR-WB GMSK calls


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to disable this intracell uplink handover whenfrequency hopping is applied

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




382 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.175 (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED) - (EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED)

HMI Name EN_INTRACELL_REPEATEDParameter Name

Logical Name EN_INTRACELL_REPEATED

Definition This flag enables/disables the repetition of intracell handoverattempts.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 383 / 1278


5.2.176 (EN_LOAD_BALANCE) - (EN_LOAD_BALANCE)

HMI Name EN_LOAD_BALANCEParameter Name

Logical Name EN_LOAD_BALANCE

Definition Flag to enable/disable the balancing of load between the inner andouter zone of a multiband cell.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both"Enabled".

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment EN_LOAD_BALANCE significant only if EN_BETTER_ZONE_HOis enabled

Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric disable (0)

Concentric Umbrella disable (0)

Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



384 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.177 (EN_LOAD_ORDER) - (EN_LOAD_ORDER)

HMI Name EN_LOAD_ORDERParameter Name

Logical Name EN_LOAD_ORDER

Definition This flag indicates whether or not traffic load has to be taken intoaccount when setting up the list of target cells.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 385 / 1278


5.2.178 (EN_MA_SELECTION) - (EN_MA_SELECTION)

HMI Name EN_MA_SELECTIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MA_SELECTION

Definition This flag enables/disables channel selection according to MobileAllocation criterion.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




386 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.179 (EN_MCHO_H_DL) - (EN_MCHO_H_DL)

HMI Name EN_MCHO_H_DLParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MCHO_H_DL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink micro-cell"handover cause (cause 18).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0


Single disable (0) *

Umbrella disable (0) *

Concentric disable (0) *

Concentric Umbrella disable (0) *

Microcell enable (1)

Minicell disable (0) *

Extended inner cell disable (0) *

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell disable (0) *


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 387 / 1278


5.2.180 (EN_MCHO_H_UL) - (EN_MCHO_H_UL)

HMI Name EN_MCHO_H_ULParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MCHO_H_UL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink mirco-cell "handover cause (cause 17).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0









Cell Type Dependent



388 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.181 (EN_MCHO_NCELL) - (EN_MCHO_NCELL)

HMI Name EN_MCHO_NCELLParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MCHO_NCELL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "high level in neighbourlower or indoor cell" handover cause (cause 14).


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In a lower layer cell, the flag shall be disabled if there is no indoorlayer.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0



Umbrella enable (1)




Minicell disable (0)


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 389 / 1278


5.2.182 (EN_MCHO_RESCUE) - (EN_MCHO_RESCUE)

HMI Name EN_MCHO_RESCUEParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MCHO_RESCUE

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "consecutive bad SACCHframes" handover cause (cause 7).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0









Cell Type Dependent



390 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.183 (EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC) - (EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC)

HMI Name EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSICParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MORE_RMS_BCCH_BSIC

Definition Enables/disables the "RMS improvement" feature, which allowsreporting more than 42 neighbour frequencies per TRX in the 2Gradio link measurements performed by the MS.When enabled, the parameter RMS_BCCH_BSIC_NB gives themaximum number of frequencies reported by the BTS.When disabled, that maximum is not configurable (42, per default).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment -Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.-Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on goingcalls are not disrupted. But the RMS jobs, ongoing on the BTSs, arerestarted (all data already collected are discarded).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 391 / 1278


5.2.184 (EN_MS_PC) - (EN_MS_PC)

HMI Name EN_MS_PCParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MS_PC

Definition This flag enables/disables MS Power Control.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




392 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.185 (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO) - (EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO)

HMI Name EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MULTIBAND_PBGT_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the power budget handovers Cause 12and the traffic handovers Cause 23 between cells belonging todifferent frequency bands.

Coding rules 0 : function disabled, 1 : function enabled

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 393 / 1278


5.2.186 (EN_PBGT_FILTERING) - (EN_PBGT_FILTERING)

HMI Name EN_PBGT_FILTERINGParameter Name

Logical Name EN_PBGT_FILTERING

Definition This flag enables/disables filtering of candidate neighbour cells onHO_MARGIN_DIST/LEV/QUAL criterion.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules This parameter must be set to disabled in case of extended cell

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1


Single enable (1)

Umbrella enable (1)




Minicell enable (1)

Extended inner cell disable (0)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell disable (0)


394 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.187 (EN_PBGT_HO) - (EN_PBGT_HO)

HMI Name EN_PBGT_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_PBGT_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "power budget" handovercause (cause 12).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 395 / 1278


5.2.188 (EN_POWER_SAVING) - (EN_POWER_SAVING)

HMI Name EN_POWER_SAVINGParameter Name

Logical Name EN_POWER_SAVING

Definition Enables power saving on all TRXs in the cell.

Coding rules 0: the power saving is "disabled",1: the power saving is "enabled".

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment If EN_POWER_SAVING is set to "enabled", the TRX dynamic powersaving feature will be applied on all the TRXs in the cell belongingto G3, G4 or G5 TREs. The feature will however not be applied onthe TRXs in the cell belonging to MC modules, due to the specificarchitecture of MC modules (unique power amplifier for all the TRXs).



396 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.189 (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO) - (EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO)

HMI Name EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_PREFERRED_BAND_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of handover cause 21 (highlevel in neighbour cell in the preferred band).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 397 / 1278


5.2.190 (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING) - (EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING)

HMI Name EN_PRIORITY_ORDERINGParameter Name

Logical Name EN_PRIORITY_ORDERING

Definition This flag enables/disables the use of the parameter PRIORITY(0,n)in the candidate cell evaluation process.

Coding rules 0: Priority(0,n) not taken into account, 1: Priority(0,n) taken intoaccount

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




398 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.191 (EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERY) - (EN_RL_RECOV)

HMI Name EN_RADIOLINK_RECOVERYParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RL_RECOV

Definition This flag enables/disables the Radio Link Recovery procedure.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1


Single enable (1)

Umbrella enable (1)




Minicell enable (1)

Extended inner cell enable (1)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell enable (1)


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 399 / 1278


5.2.192 (EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2) - (EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2)

HMI Name EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2Parameter Name

Logical Name EN_RANDOMISE_FBL2

Definition Enables/disables the support of the "randomisation of fill bits in L2message" feature on the DL Air interface of the cell. That featurebrings more protection to voice calls using A5/1 encryption algorithm.

Coding rules 0: the DL randomisation is "disabled",1: the DL randomisation is "enabled".

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Since a MS may move from one cell to another cell, the activation ofthe feature on few cells makes no sense. Alcatel-Lucent recommendson a large set of cells, like the BSS level.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment Parameter change:No impact on the telecom service, on going calls are not disrupted.Change applied only on new CS calls established after modification.



400 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.193 (EN_REP_DL_FACCH) - (EN_REP_DL_FACCH)

HMI Name EN_REP_DL_FACCHParameter Name

Logical Name EN_REP_DL_FACCH

Definition Enables/Disables repeated downlink FACCH for AMR-NB orAMR-WB GMSK calls.

Coding rules 0: disabled1: enabled for LAPDm command frames2: enabled for LAPDm command frames, and also for LAPDmresponse frames (valid only for the MS having indicated the supportof the feature by Repeated ACCH Capability bit=1).

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 2 0

External Comment Function available on BSC Evolution only.Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 401 / 1278


5.2.194 (EN_REP_SACCH) - (EN_REP_SACCH)

HMI Name EN_REP_SACCHParameter Name

Logical Name EN_REP_SACCH

Definition Enables/Disables repeated SACCH for SAPI 0 frames in caseof AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls (for mobile station havingindicated the support of the feature).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment Function available on BSC Evolution only.Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



402 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.195 (EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLA) - (EN_RESCUE_UM)

HMI Name EN_RESCUE_UMBRELLAParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RESCUE_UM

Definition This flag determines if emergency handovers are directedpreferentially to umbrella cells.

Coding rules 0: disabled, 1: enabled, 2: indefinite

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 2 1


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A





Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 403 / 1278


5.2.196 (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO) - (EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO)

HMI Name EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO

Definition Flag enabling the intracell handovers allowing to move TCH from thePS zone to the CS zone of PDCH/TCH allocation (intracell handovercause 30).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




404 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.197 (EN_RXLEV_DL) - (EN_RXLEV_DL)

HMI Name EN_RXLEV_DLParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RXLEV_DL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "level downlink" handovercause (cause 5).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 405 / 1278


5.2.198 (EN_RXLEV_UL) - (EN_RXLEV_UL)

HMI Name EN_RXLEV_ULParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RXLEV_UL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "level uplink" handovercause (cause 3).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




406 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.199 (EN_RXQUAL_DL) - (EN_RXQUAL_DL)

HMI Name EN_RXQUAL_DLParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RXQUAL_DL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality downlink"handover cause (cause 4).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 407 / 1278


5.2.200 (EN_RXQUAL_UL) - (EN_RXQUAL_UL)

HMI Name EN_RXQUAL_ULParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RXQUAL_UL

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "quality uplink" handovercause (cause 2).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




408 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.201 (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE) - (EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE)

HMI Name EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODEParameter Name

Logical Name EN_SEND_OLD_CHAN_MODE

Definition This flag controls "Current channel" OIE inclusion in HANDOVERREQUIRED.

Coding rules 0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 409 / 1278


5.2.202 (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER) - (EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER)

HMI Name EN_SEND_SPEECH_VERParameter Name

Logical Name EN_SEND_SPEECH_VER

Definition This flag controls "Speech version (used)" OIE inclusion inHANDOVER REQUIRED.

Coding rules 0: IE is not included, 1: IE is included

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




410 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.203 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA)

HMI Name EN_SOLSAParameter Name

Logical Name EN_SOLSA

Definition This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature.


Mandatory rules May be set to Enabled only if BCCH_EXT=TRUE.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 411 / 1278


5.2.204 (EN_SOLSA) - (EN_SOLSA(n))

HMI Name EN_SOLSAParameter Name

Logical Name EN_SOLSA(n)

Definition This flag enables / disables SoLSA feature.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 1 0

External Comment This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configurethe value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameteris autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is anOMC internal cell.



412 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.205 (EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATION) - (EN_SPEED_DISC)

HMI Name EN_SPEED_DISCRIMINATIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_SPEED_DISC

Definition This flag enables/disables the speed discrimination process.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1



Umbrella disable (0)


Concentric Umbrella disable (0)




Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 413 / 1278


5.2.206 (EN_TCH_PREEMPT) - (EN_TCH_PREEMPT)

HMI Name EN_TCH_PREEMPTParameter Name

Logical Name EN_TCH_PREEMPT

Definition This flag enables/disables the TCH/VGCH pre-emption feature. Ifenabled, a point-to-point or voice group call with the pvi (pre-emptionvulnerability indication) bit set might be pre-empted for a point-to-pointor voice group call that has the pci (pre-emption capability indication)bit set if the concerned cell is in congestion state.

Coding rules 0:disabled, 1:enabled

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules - EN_EXT_DR should be set to enable when EN_TCH_PREEMPT isset to enable.- If EN_VGCS = enabled , then Alcatel recommends to setEN_TCH_PREEMPT to enabled, otherwise to set the value ofMIN_VGCS_TS to a value greater or equal to 2.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment In case one or more TCHs have been reserved for emergencyhandovers (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO > 0) in the concerned cell,the BSC will first try to use one of these resources before actuallyreleasing an ongoing call with lower priority and the pvi bit set.In case the cell is congested, if EN_TCH_PREEMPT is enabled andthe MSC does not allow the queing, the BSC will queue an incomingpoint-to-point request with pre-emption capability indicator set duringat most T11_forced seconds for a normal assignment or during atmost T_qho seconds for an handover request. For the voice groupcall request, the BSC will follow the MSC indicator.



414 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.207 (EN_TFO) - (EN_TFO)

HMI Name EN_TFOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_TFO

Definition Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function for FR, EFR andHR codec types.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 415 / 1278


5.2.208 (EN_TFO_AMR_NB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_NB)

HMI Name EN_TFO_AMR_NBParameter Name

Logical Name EN_TFO_AMR_NB

Definition Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function in case ofAMR-NB codec.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment Function available on BSC Evolution only



416 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.209 (EN_TFO_AMR_WB) - (EN_TFO_AMR_WB)

HMI Name EN_TFO_AMR_WBParameter Name

Logical Name EN_TFO_AMR_WB

Definition Flag to enable/ disable the use of the TFO function in case ofAMR-WB GMSK codec.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 417 / 1278


5.2.210 (EN_TFO_MATCH) - (EN_TFO_MATCH)

HMI Name EN_TFO_MATCHParameter Name

Logical Name EN_TFO_MATCH

Definition This flag enables/disables TFO codec mismatch resolution function(for FR, EFR, HR, AMR-NB and AMR-WB codecs).


Mandatory rules - may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO=1or if EN_TFO_AMR_WB=1 or if EN_TFO_AMR_NB=1- May be set to 0 only if EN_TFO_OPT = 0


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




418 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.211 (EN_TFO_OPT) - (EN_TFO_OPT)

HMI Name EN_TFO_OPTParameter Name

Logical Name EN_TFO_OPT

Definition This flag enables/disables TFO codec optimisation function.


Mandatory rules may be set to 1 only if EN_TFO_MATCH=1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 419 / 1278


5.2.212 (EN_TRAFFIC_HO) - (EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n))

HMI Name EN_TRAFFIC_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_TRAFFIC_HO(0,n)

Definition This flag enables/disables the detection of "traffic" handover cause(cause 23).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


None 0 1 0

External Comment As the traffic load of cells external to the BSC is unknown,no HO cause 23 will be triggered towards these cells, even ifEN_TRAFFIC_HO = 1.



420 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.213 (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT) - (EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT)

HMI Name EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUITParameter Name

Logical Name EN_UNEQUIPPED_CIRCUIT

Definition This flag enables/disables the sending of UNEQUIPPED CIRCUITmessage.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 421 / 1278


5.2.214 (EXT_HO_FORCED) - (EXT_HO_FORCED)

HMI Name EXT_HO_FORCEDParameter Name

Logical Name EXT_HO_FORCED

Definition This flag, when set, forces internal intercell handovers to be executedas external HO.

Coding rules 0: BSC performs internal HO, 1: MSC performs internal HO

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




422 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.215 (Extended CBCH) - (Use_of_Extended_CBCH)

HMI Name Extended CBCHParameter Name

Logical Name Use_of_Extended_CBCH

Definition This flag indicates if the extended CBCH is used.

Coding rules 0: not used, 1: used

Mandatory rules shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive"


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment Default value correspond to SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS1.If SMSCB_FEATURE_SET = FS2, Use_of_Extended_CBCH shouldbe set to "Yes".



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 423 / 1278


5.2.216 (FORBID_AMR_NS) - (FORBID_AMR_NS)

HMI Name FORBID_AMR_NSParameter Name

Logical Name FORBID_AMR_NS

Definition Flag to forbid / allow AMR-NB or AMR-WB noise suppressor in theMS.

Coding rules 0: the MS can use AMR NS, 1: the MS shall not use AMR NS.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment Significant only if EN_AMR_FR, EN_AMR_HR orEN_AMR_WB_GMSK is set to TRUE.



424 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.217 (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F) - (FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F)

HMI Name FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_FParameter Name

Logical Name FORBID_DTXD_NH_BCCH_F

Definition Forbid use of downlink DTX on non hopping TCH of the BCCH TRX.

Coding rules 0 : DTX DL on non-hopping BCCH TRX is allowed; 1 : DTX DL onnon-hopping BCCH TRX is forbidden

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If there are some MC modules handled by the BSC for which"dynamic power allocation" is applied (cf. BOP), then it isrecommended to enable the use of downlink DTX, so as to limit thepotential degradations during the downlink transmissions on the TSsof the MC modules.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 425 / 1278


5.2.218 (Force TFO versus AMR) - (FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR)

HMI Name Force TFO versus AMRParameter Name

Logical Name FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR

Definition Flag to enable/disable the basic functions of Tandem Free Operation(TFO) for GSM FR SV1, FR SV2 and HR SV1 codec types when thecurrent codec is AMR-NB FR or AMR-NB HR and when TFO is notpossible for the current call (TFO on AMR-NB not supported by theTC or not configured in the cell).

Coding rules 0: disabled,no TFO negotiation if AMR-NB, FR or HR, is currently used;

1: enabled,TFO negotiation will start even if AMR-NB, FR or HR, is currentlyused

Mandatory rules FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR = 1 only if EN_TFO=1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment FORCE_TFO_VS_AMR relevant only if (EN_AMR_FR = 1 orEN_AMR_HR = 1) AND (EN_TFO = 1) AND (EN_TFO_AMR_NB =0 or not supported by the BSS)



426 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.219 (Forced_Queuing) - (QUEUE_ANYWAY)

HMI Name Forced_QueuingParameter Name

Logical Name QUEUE_ANYWAY

Definition This flag enables/disables forced queuing for Assignment requestswhen queuing is not allowed by the MSC.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 427 / 1278


5.2.220 (Forward_CM_3) - (EN_SEND_CM3)

HMI Name Forward_CM_3Parameter Name

Logical Name EN_SEND_CM3

Definition This flag enables/disables sending of "Classmark 3" IE to the MSC.

Coding rules 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Mandatory rules EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 atthe same time.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1

External Comment The value of this parameter depends on whether the MSC supportsthe MS classmark 3 IE or not: if the MSC supports the MS classmark3 IE then the parameter shall be set to "1", otherwise the parametershall be set to "0".



428 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.221 (Free_Factor_1) - (Freefactor_1)

HMI Name Free_Factor_1Parameter Name

Logical Name Freefactor_1

Definition Correction factor used in the cell evaluation process to take intoaccount the number of free TCHs in the candidate cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 16 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 429 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Freefactor_1 <= Freefactor_2 <= Freefactor_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 16 0




430 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 16 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 431 / 1278






Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 16 0




432 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Freefactor_5 >= Freefactor_4


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 16 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 433 / 1278


5.2.226 (Free_Level_1) - (Freelevel_1)

HMI Name Free_Level_1Parameter Name

Logical Name Freelevel_1

Definition Boundary on free TCH number for determination of Freefactor ofthe cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Freelevel_1 < Freelevel_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 1



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

1 2 3 3 4 5 5 6 7 7 8 8

434 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2 > Freelevel_1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 3



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

2 3 5 6 7 9 10 12 13 14 16 17

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 435 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3 > Freelevel_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 5



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

4 7 10 12 14 17 20 23 26 28 31 34

436 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Freelevel_4 > Freelevel_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 10



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

6 9 12 15 21 26 30 34 38 42 47 51

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 437 / 1278


5.2.230 (Free_Level_DR) - (Freelevel_DR(n))

HMI Name Free_Level_DRParameter Name

Logical Name Freelevel_DR(n)

Definition Minimum number of free TCHs in neighbour cell n to allow forceddirected retry to cell n.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Freelevel_DR > N_TCH_HO

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 4


Single See TRXnb

Umbrella See TRXnb

Concentric See TRXnb

Concentric Umbrella See TRXnb

Microcell See TRXnb

Minicell See TRXnb

Extended inner cell 255 *

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell 255 *

Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

438 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.231 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE)

HMI Name FREQUENCY_RANGEParameter Name

Logical Name FREQUENCY_RANGE

Definition This parameter indicates the frequency range of the cell.

Coding rules 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4:PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: forfuture use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provisionfor future frequency bands support.

Mandatory rules - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" thenCELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" .- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric"cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is"PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does notapply to the external cells.- The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the sameas the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell,where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging tothe same frequency range.

The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting ofFREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDSparameters:- At cell creation- When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified.However, no check is performed when thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified.

Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGEparameter are allowed depending on the value of thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter:- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)"or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1800" if thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1800bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1900" if thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1900bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM(GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is setto "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands".


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 439 / 1278


Instance cell


None 0 6 0

External Comment When the frequency range is changed from EGSM (resp.EGSM-DCS) to PGSM (resp. PGSM-DCS) or from PGSM (resp.PGSM-DCS) to EGSM (resp. EGSM-DCS), then all TRXs of the cellhave the preserve call flag set to FALSE



440 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.232 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (MFS))


Logical Name FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (MFS)

Definition This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell(GAN cell excluded).

Coding rules 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4:PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7..255: forfuture use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as a provisionfor future frequency bands support.

Mandatory rules - If FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) = "GSM-DCS" thenCELL_PARTITION_TYPE(n) must be equal to "Concentric".- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric"cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) is"PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does notapply to the external cells.- The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the sameas the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell,where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging tothe same frequency range.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 6 0

External Comment Within the same PLMN, the FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter of agiven cell shall be selected among one of the following values:- PGSM (GSM900) or EGSM (GSM900) or DCS1800or PGSM-DCS1800 or EGSM-DCS1800 if thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 andDCS1800 bands",- GSM850 or DCS1800 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to"GSM850 and DCS1800 bands",- GSM850 or DCS1900 if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to"GSM850 and DCS1900 bands.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 441 / 1278


5.2.233 (FREQUENCY_RANGE) - (FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (OMC))


Logical Name FREQUENCY_RANGE(n) (OMC)

Definition This parameter indicates the frequency range of the adjacent cell(internal or external to the OMC).

Coding rules 0: PGSM (GSM 900), 1: DCS 1800, 2: EGSM, 3: DCS 1900, 4:PGSM-DCS1800, 5: EGSM-DCS1800, 6: GSM 850, 7: GAN,8..255: for future use. The parameter shall be coded over 8 bits as aprovision for future frequency bands support.

Mandatory rules - if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM-DCS" thenCELL_PARTITION_TYPE must be equal to "Concentric" .- if FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GAN" then CELL_RANGE must beequal to "GAN".- the value GAN is only allowed for the OMC external cells- The "micro concentric", "mini concentric" and "indoor concentric"cells must be multiband (the allowed FREQUENCY_RANGE is"PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800"). This restriction does notapply to the external cells.- The frequency range of an extended inner cell has to be the sameas the frequency range of the corresponding extended outer cell,where PGSM (0) and EGSM (2) are here considered as belonging tothe same frequency range.

The OMC-R checks the consistency between the setting ofFREQUENCY_RANGE and PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDSparameters:- At cell creation- When the value of FREQUENCY_RANGE parameter is modified.However, no check is performed when thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is modified.

Only the following values of the FREQUENCY_RANGEparameter are allowed depending on the value of thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS parameter:- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM (GSM900)"or "DCS1800" or "PGSM-DCS1800" or "EGSM-DCS1800" if thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM900 and DCS1800bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1800" if thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1800bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "GSM850" or "DCS1900" if thePLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is set to "GSM850 and DCS1900bands",- FREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM (GSM900)" or "EGSM(GSM900)" or "DCS1900" if the PLMN_FREQUENCY_BANDS is setto "GSM900 and DCS1900 bands".


Category Site (CAE)

442 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Type Enumerated

SubSystem OMC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 443 / 1278


5.2.234 (GSM_PHASE) - (GSM_PHASE)

HMI Name GSM_PHASEParameter Name

Logical Name GSM_PHASE

Definition This flag indicates the GSM Phase used by the BSC to formatmessages towards the MSC.

Coding rules 0: GSM Phase 1, 1: GSM Phase 2

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1

External Comment Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is forimplementation purposes.



444 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.235 (H_LOAD_OBJ) - (H_LOAD_OBJ)

HMI Name H_LOAD_OBJParameter Name

Logical Name H_LOAD_OBJ

Definition High threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to reduceMIN_DWELL_TIME variable.

Coding rules step size = 10%

Mandatory rules H_LOAD_OBJ >= L_LOAD_OBJ


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 80


Single N/A

Umbrella See TRXnb

Concentric N/A


Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent


Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 445 / 1278


5.2.236 (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (H_MIN_DWELL_TIME)

HMI Name H_MIN_DWELL_TIMEParameter Name

Logical Name H_MIN_DWELL_TIME

Definition Maximum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules H_MIN_DWELL_TIME >= L_MIN_DWELL_TIME


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 120 20




446 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.237 (High Priority Access Class Ordering P1) -(AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1))

HMI Name High Priority Access Class Ordering P1Parameter Name

Logical Name AC_PRIORITY_LIST(priority=1)

Definition List of access classes 11..15 and EC (=10) in their priority order.

Coding rules Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority, 10(EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (accessclass 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14(access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 10 15 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 447 / 1278






Coding rules Priority 1 is the highest priority, Priority 6 is the lowest priority10 (EC) is coded as 5, 11 (access class 11) is coded as 0, 12 (accessclass 12) is coded as 1, 13 (access class 13) is coded as 2, 14(access class 14) is coded as 3, 15 (access class 15) is coded as 4.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 10 15 15




448 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 10 15 14




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 449 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 10 15 13




450 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 10 15 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 451 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 10 15 11




452 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.243 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

HMI Name HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOADParameter Name

Logical Name HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD

Definition Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is high for circuitswitched calls.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD >= LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 80

External Comment Default value depends on the number of TRX in the cell (see TRXnbdefault value). The value indicated here is for implementationpurposes.


Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

70 70 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 453 / 1278


5.2.244 (Highest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13))

HMI Name Highest BA range ARFCNsParameter Name

Logical Name RANGEi_HIGHER (1<=i<=13)

Definition Highest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" InformationElement.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None -1 1023 -1

External Comment RANGEi_HIGHER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BARange" IE.Moreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as notsignificant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicatorof end of BA Range)



454 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.245 (HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCE) - (T_FILTER)

HMI Name HO_ALARM_PERSISTENCEParameter Name

Logical Name T_FILTER

Definition Maximum time a handover alarm is maintained while no more alarmcondition is detected.

Coding rules step size = 2 x SACCH frames = 0.96s. Coded over 5 bits:0: 0s,1: 0.96s, ..., 31: 29.76s

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


2 x Samfr 0 31 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 455 / 1278


5.2.246 (HO_MARGIN) - (HOmargin (0,n))

HMI Name HO_MARGINParameter Name

Logical Name HOmargin (0,n)

Definition Difference in power budget (PBGT) between cell(0) and cell(n) whichis required for a power budget HO.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


dB -127 127 5


Single 5 dB

Umbrella 5 dB

Concentric 5 dB

Concentric Umbrella 5 dB

Microcell 4 dB

Minicell 5 dB

Extended inner cell 5 dB

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell 5 dB


456 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.247 (HO_MARGIN_DIST) - (HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n))

HMI Name HO_MARGIN_DISTParameter Name

Logical Name HO_MARGIN_DIST(0,n)

Definition Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on distance handovercauses.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


dB -127 127 2


Single 2 dB

Umbrella 2 dB

Concentric 2 dB


Microcell 5 dB

Minicell 2 dB

Extended inner cell -29 dB

Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 457 / 1278


5.2.248 (HO_MARGIN_LEV) - (HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n))

HMI Name HO_MARGIN_LEVParameter Name

Logical Name HO_MARGIN_LEV(0,n)

Definition Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on level handovercauses.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


dB -127 127 2


Single 2 dB

Umbrella 2 dB

Concentric 0 dB


Microcell 5 dB

Minicell 0 dB


Cell Type Dependent



458 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.249 (HO_MARGIN_QUAL) - (HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n))

HMI Name HO_MARGIN_QUALParameter Name

Logical Name HO_MARGIN_QUAL(0,n)

Definition Criterion for candidate neighbour cell filtering on quality handovercauses

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


dB -127 127 1


Single 1 dB

Umbrella 1 dB

Concentric 1 dB


Microcell 5 dB

Minicell 1 dB


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 459 / 1278


5.2.250 (HR_ENABLED) - (HR_ENABLED)

HMI Name HR_ENABLEDParameter Name

Logical Name HR_ENABLED

Definition This flag controls if Half Rate TCH is enabled.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




460 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.251 (IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILURE) - (IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL)

HMI Name IGNORE_2Mbit_FAILUREParameter Name

Logical Name IGNORE_2MBIT_FAIL

Definition This flag indicates whether or not a transmission alarm triggers thetelecom defence activities (call release, blocking messages towardsMSC). Note that the O&M activities are not dependent on this flag.

Coding rules 0: transmission alarms are not ignored and the telecom defenceactivities (call release, blocking messages towards MSC) aretriggered;1: transmission alarms are ignored and telecom defence activities(call release, blocking messages towards MSC) are not triggered;

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If BSS_TRANSPORT_MODE = IP, should be set to FALSE. Due toTDM switching on TC side, there is no more interaction betweenAtermux and ATR failures.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 461 / 1278


5.2.252 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (BSC))

HMI Name IMSI Attach/DetachParameter Name

Logical Name ATT (BSC)

Definition This flag indicates to the MS if IMSI Attach/detach procedure isallowed in the cell.

Coding rules 0: not allowed, 1: allowed

Mandatory rules Equal to ATT (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




462 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.253 (IMSI Attach/Detach) - (ATT (MFS))

HMI Name IMSI Attach/DetachParameter Name

Logical Name ATT (MFS)

Definition This flag indicates to the MS whether IMSI Attach/detach procedureis allowed in the cell.

Coding rules 0: not allowed, 1: allowed

Mandatory rules Equal to ATT (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 463 / 1278


5.2.254 (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

HMI Name IND_TRAFFIC_LOADParameter Name

Logical Name IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD

Definition Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is indefinite forcircuit switched calls.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD = 0 OR LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <=IND_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 0



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

45 45 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60 60

464 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.255 (INTAVE) - (INTAVE)

HMI Name INTAVEParameter Name

Logical Name INTAVE

Definition Averaging period for interference measurements on idle TCHtimeslots.

Coding rules step size=1 Samfr

Mandatory rules INTAVE < T_INTRF_L3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 31 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 465 / 1278


5.2.256 (INTERCELL_HO) - (HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED)

HMI Name INTERCELL_HOParameter Name

Logical Name HO_INTERCELL_ALLOWED

Definition This flag enables/disables the execution of all outgoing intercellhandovers.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1

External Comment Valid for both TCH and SDCCH. This parameter has no influenceon Directed Retry



466 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.257 (Interference bands 1-2 limit) - (INTFBD1)

HMI Name Interference bands 1-2 limitParameter Name

Logical Name INTFBD1

Definition Limit between interference band 1 and interference band 2.

Coding rules Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm

Mandatory rules INTFBD1 < INTFBD2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -100




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 467 / 1278







Mandatory rules INTFBD3 > INTFBD2 > INTFBD1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -95




468 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -90




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 469 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -85




470 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.261 (INTRACELL_HO) - (HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED)

HMI Name INTRACELL_HOParameter Name

Logical Name HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED

Definition This flag enables/disables the execution of intracell handovers.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1

External Comment Valid for both TCH and SDCCH.The flags specific to the TFO feature, I.e. EN_TFO,EN_TFO_MATCH, EN_TFO_OPT,EN_IPE_PREF_CODEC_TYPE, are set independently of the flagHO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED.Additionally, the flag related to handover cause 30,EN_RETURN_CS_ZONE_HO is setindependently of the flag HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED.The handovers for TFO reasons (cause 29) and RAE4 reasons(cause 30) can thereforebe performed even if HO_INTRACELL_ALLOWED = disabled.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 471 / 1278


5.2.262 (Keep codec on handover) - (KEEP_CODEC_HO)

HMI Name Keep codec on handoverParameter Name

Logical Name KEEP_CODEC_HO

Definition Indicates if the BSC tries to keep the same codec for internalincoming handovers.

Coding rules 0:free choice of the codec ; 1:try to maintain codec for TFO callsonly; 2: try to maintain codec for all calls

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 2 0




472 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.263 (L_LOAD_OBJ) - (L_LOAD_OBJ)

HMI Name L_LOAD_OBJParameter Name

Logical Name L_LOAD_OBJ

Definition Low threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage to increaseMIN_DWELL_TIME variable.


Mandatory rules L_LOAD_OBJ <= H_LOAD_OBJ


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 60


Single N/A

Umbrella See TRXnb

Concentric N/A


Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent


Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

0 10 20 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 473 / 1278


5.2.264 (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME) - (L_MIN_DWELL_TIME)

HMI Name L_MIN_DWELL_TIMEParameter Name

Logical Name L_MIN_DWELL_TIME

Definition Minimum allowed value for MIN_DWELL_TIME variable.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules L_MIN_DWELL_TIME <= H_MIN_DWELL_TIME


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 120 8




474 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.265 (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO) - (L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n))

HMI Name L_RXLEV_CPT_HOParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXLEV_CPT_HO(0,n)

Definition Minimum received downlink level from cell n for umbrella to neighbourlower layer cell n handover or from classical band to preferred bandcell n handover.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


dBm -110 -47 -85




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 475 / 1278


5.2.266 (L_RXLEV_DL_H) - (L_RXLEV_DL_H)

HMI Name L_RXLEV_DL_HParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXLEV_DL_H

Definition Downlink level threshold for handover.


Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_DL_H < U_RXLEV_DL_P.L_RXLEV_DL_H < RXLEV_DL_IH

Recommended rules L_RXLEV_D_H < L_RXLEV_DL_PIf CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" ANDFREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or"EGSM" or "DCS 1900":RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies toconcentric and monoband cell.)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -96


Single -91 dBm (19)

Umbrella -91 dBm (19)

Concentric -91 dBm (19)

Concentric Umbrella -91 dBm (19)

Microcell -96 dBm (14)

Minicell -91 dBm (19)

Extended inner cell -96 dBm (14)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell -98 dBm (12)


476 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.267 (L_RXLEV_DL_P) - (L_RXLEV_DL_P)

HMI Name L_RXLEV_DL_PParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXLEV_DL_P

Definition Lower downlink level threshold for power control.


Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_DL_P < U_RXLEV_DL_P


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -85




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 477 / 1278


5.2.268 (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR) - (L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n))

HMI Name L_RXLEV_NCELL_DRParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXLEV_NCELL_DR(n)

Definition Minimum level received from neighbour cell n to allow forced directedretry to cell n.

Coding rules Coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -110


Single -85 dBm (25)







Cell Type Dependent



478 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.269 (L_RXLEV_UL_H) - (L_RXLEV_UL_H)

HMI Name L_RXLEV_UL_HParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXLEV_UL_H

Definition Uplink level threshold for handover.


Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_UL_H < U_RXLEV_UL_PL_RXLEV_UL_H < RXLEV_UL_IH

Recommended rules L_RXLEV_UL_H < L_RXLEV_UL_PIf CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" ANDFREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or"EGSM" or "DCS 1900":RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies toconcentric and monoband cell.)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -100


Single -100 dBm (10)







Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 479 / 1278


5.2.270 (L_RXLEV_UL_P) - (L_RXLEV_UL_P)

HMI Name L_RXLEV_UL_PParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXLEV_UL_P

Definition Lower uplink level threshold for power control.


Mandatory rules L_RXLEV_UL_P < U_RXLEV_UL_P


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -90


Single -95 dBm (15)







Cell Type Dependent



480 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.271 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_HParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H

Definition Downlink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls (neitherAMR-NB nor AMR-WB).

Coding rules step size = 0.1, (1==0.1 ... 70==7)

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules L_RXQUAL_DL_H >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4

External Comment Higher value is the worst quality



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 481 / 1278


5.2.272 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMRParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR

Definition Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-NBcalls.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4.5




482 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.273 (L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) -(L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSKParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK

Definition Downlink quality threshold for handovers (cause 16) on AMR-WBGMSK calls.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 483 / 1278


5.2.274 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_DL_P)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_PParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_P

Definition Lower downlink quality threshold for power control of any calls,except the AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls, where Repeated DLFACCH and Repeated SACCH are activated.

Coding rules step size = 0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)

Mandatory rules L_RXQUAL_DL_P > U_RXQUAL_DL_P


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 3

External Comment Highest value is the worst quality.There is a dedicated parameter, L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH,for AMR-NB or AMR-WB calls and activated repeated DL FACCHand SACCH.



484 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.275 (L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH) -(L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCHParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH

Definition Lower downlink quality threshold for power control of AMR-NB orAMR-WB GMSK calls where Repeated DL FACCH (for LAPDmcommand and response frames) and Repeated SACCH areactivated.

Coding rules step size = 0.1(1==0.1 ... 70==7)

Mandatory rules L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH > U_RXQUAL_DL_P

Recommended rules To take benefit from the feature repeated ACCH, Alcatel recommends:L_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH >= L_RXQUAL_DL_P

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 3

External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only.- Highest value is the worst quality.- If the customer has customized the parameter L_RXQUAL_DL_Pin the previous release, then the new parameterL_RXQUAL_DL_P_AMR_RXACCH must be updated in theCDE table with THAT customized value.-Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 485 / 1278


5.2.276 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_HParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H

Definition Uplink quality threshold for handover for non AMR calls (netherAMR-NB nor AMR-WB).


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules L_RXQUAL_UL_H >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4

External Comment Higher value is the worst quality



486 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.277 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMRParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR

Definition Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-NB calls.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 487 / 1278


5.2.278 (L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK) -(L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSKParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_H_AMR_WB_GMSK

Definition Uplink quality threshold for handovers (cause 15) on AMR-WBGMSK calls.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4.5




488 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.279 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (L_RXQUAL_UL_P)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_PParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_P

Definition Lower uplink quality threshold for power control of any calls, exceptthe AMR-NB or AMR-WB GMSK calls, where Repeated DL FACCHand Repeated SACCH are activated.


Mandatory rules L_RXQUAL_UL_P > U_RXQUAL_UL_P


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 3

External Comment Highest value is the worst quality.There is a dedicated parameter, L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH,for AMR-NB or AMR-WB calls and activated repeated DL FACCHand SACCH.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 489 / 1278


5.2.280 (L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH) -(L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH)

HMI Name L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCHParameter Name

Logical Name L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH

Definition Lower uplink quality threshold for power control of AMR-NB orAMR-WB GMSK calls where Repeated DL FACCH (for LAPDmcommand and response frames) and Repeated SACCH areactivated.

Coding rules step size = 0.1(1==0.1 ... 70==7)

Mandatory rules L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH > U_RXQUAL_UL_P

Recommended rules To take benefit from the feature repeated ACCH, Alcatel recommends:L_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH >= L_RXQUAL_UL_P

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 3

External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only.- Highest value is the worst quality.- If the customer has customized the parameter L_RXQUAL_UL_Pin the previous release, then the new parameterL_RXQUAL_UL_P_AMR_RXACCH must be updated in theCDE table with THAT customized value.- Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



490 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.281 (LAC) - (LAC (BSC))

HMI Name LACParameter Name

Logical Name LAC (BSC)

Definition Location Area Code.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to LAC (MFS)A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)shall have the same LAC.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 65535 65535




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 491 / 1278


5.2.282 (LAC) - (LAC(n) (BSC))


Logical Name LAC(n) (BSC)

Definition Location Area Code of adjacent cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time.Equal to LAC(n)(MFS).A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)shall have the same.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 65535 65535




492 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.283 (Link_factor) - (Linkfactor (0,n))

HMI Name Link_factorParameter Name

Logical Name Linkfactor (0,n)

Definition Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to handicap orfavour cell n.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


dB -24 24 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 493 / 1278


5.2.284 (Load computation in outer zone) - (EN_LOAD_OUTER)

HMI Name Load computation in outer zoneParameter Name

Logical Name EN_LOAD_OUTER

Definition Flag to enable/disable the load computation on the outer zone of aConcentric/multiband cell instead of the load computation on thewhole cell.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules When enabled, the values of the parameters FREElevel_1 toFREElevel_4 need to be updated to number of TRX considered inthe load computation.EN_LOAD_BALANCE & EN_LOAD_OUTER should not be both"Enabled".

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment significant only for concentric and multiband cells.



494 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.285 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD)

HMI Name LOAD_EV_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name LOAD_EV_PERIOD

Definition Number of load samples (received every TCH_INFO_PERIOD) forload averaging.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 30 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 495 / 1278


5.2.286 (Load_Factor_1) - (Loadfactor_1)

HMI Name Load_Factor_1Parameter Name

Logical Name Loadfactor_1

Definition Correction factor used in cell evaluation process to take into accountthe TCH load in the candidate cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 0 0




496 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Loadfactor_1 >= Loadfactor_2 >= Loadfactor_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 0 0


Single -2

Umbrella -2

Concentric -2

Concentric Umbrella -2

Microcell -2

Minicell -2


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 497 / 1278






Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 0 0


Single -5

Umbrella -5

Concentric -5


Microcell -4

Minicell -5


Cell Type Dependent



498 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 0 0


Single -7

Umbrella -7

Concentric -7


Microcell -6

Minicell -7


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 499 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Loadfactor_5 <= Loadfactor_4


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -16 0 0


Single -10

Umbrella -10

Concentric -10


Microcell -8

Minicell -10


Cell Type Dependent



500 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.291 (Load_Level_1) - (Loadlevel_1)

HMI Name Load_Level_1Parameter Name

Logical Name Loadlevel_1

Definition Boundary on cell load for determination of Loadfactor of the cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 501 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Loadlevel_1 < Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 60




502 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Loadlevel_2 < Loadlevel_3 < Loadlevel_4


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 80




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 503 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Loadlevel_4 > Loadlevel_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 90




504 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.295 (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

HMI Name LOW_TRAFFIC_LOADParameter Name

Logical Name LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD

Definition Load threshold used to determine when traffic load is low for circuitswitched calls.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD <= HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 0

External Comment If LOW_TRAFFIC_LOAD is set to 0 in a given cell n, then noHandover Cause 23 (i.e. Traffic Handovers) can be triggered towardsthat cell n.


Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

20 20 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 505 / 1278


5.2.296 (LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (L_TIME_ADVANCE)

HMI Name LOWER_TIMING_ADVANCEParameter Name

Logical Name L_TIME_ADVANCE

Definition Low threshold to trigger handover cause "too short distance" in outercell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


bper 0 63 0


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A


Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



506 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.297 (Lowest BA range ARFCNs) - (RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13))

HMI Name Lowest BA range ARFCNsParameter Name

Logical Name RANGEi_LOWER (1<=i<=13)

Definition Lowest ARFCN of range i indicated in "BA Range" InformationElement.

Coding rules Coded on 16 bits.

Mandatory rules RANGEi_HIGHER >= RANGEi_LOWER


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None -1 1023 -1

External Comment RANGEi_LOWER = -1 means that it shall not be included in "BARange" IEMoreover, all BA RANGE following this one will be considered as notsignificant by the OMC and not send to the BSC. (i.e. -1 = indicatorof end of BA Range)



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 507 / 1278


5.2.298 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (BSC))

HMI Name LSA_ID_IParameter Name

Logical Name LSA_ID_array (BSC)

Definition List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5).

Coding rules coded on 3 bytes max

Mandatory rules Equal to LSA_ID_array (MFS)

Recommended rules The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of oddnumber) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number),as defined in GSM 03.03.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 16777215 16777215

External Comment The default value depends on the configuration. The value givenhere is for implementation purposes only.



508 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.299 (LSA_ID_I) - (LSA_ID_array (MFS))

HMI Name LSA_ID_IParameter Name

Logical Name LSA_ID_array (MFS)

Definition List of authorised LSAs on a cell (up to 5).


Mandatory rules Equal to LSA_ID_array (BSC)

Recommended rules The LSA_ID may either be a Universal LSA identity (in case of oddnumber) or a PLMN significant LSA identity (in case of even number),as defined in GSM 03.03.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 16777215 16777215

External Comment The default value depends on the configuration. The value givenhere is for implementation purposes only.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 509 / 1278


5.2.300 (LSA_ID_I(n)) - (LSA_ID_array (n))

HMI Name LSA_ID_I(n)Parameter Name

Logical Name LSA_ID_array (n)

Definition List of authorised LSAs on a neighbour cell (up to 5).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 16777215 16777215

External Comment This parameter is for every cell. The operator needs only to configurethe value of that parameter for OMC external cells ; the parameteris autonomously filled by the OMC in case the adjacent cell is anOMC internal cell.



510 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.301 (LSA_OFFSET) - (LSA_OFFSET)

HMI Name LSA_OFFSETParameter Name

Logical Name LSA_OFFSET

Definition Offset to be used for LSA cell reselection between cells with thesame LSA priorities.

Coding rules coded from 0 to 7, where 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 4 dB, 2 = 8 dB, 3 = 16 dB,4 = 24 dB, 5 = 32 dB, 6 = 48 dB, 7 = 64 dB.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 64 0

External Comment The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 511 / 1278


5.2.302 (LSA_PRIO_THR) - (PRIO_THR)

HMI Name LSA_PRIO_THRParameter Name

Logical Name PRIO_THR

Definition Signal threshold for applying LSA cell reselection.

Coding rules coded from 0 to 7; step size = 6 dB (i.e. 0 = 0 dB, 1 = 6 dB, 2 = 12dB, 3 = 18 dB, 4 = 24 dB, 5 = 30 dB, 6 = 36 dB, 7 = infinite = 42 dB).

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 42 42

External Comment The default value corresponds to an unused parameter for the MS.The maximum and default values correspond to an infinite threshold.



512 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.303 (MATE_CI) - (MATE_CI (BSC))

HMI Name MATE_CIParameter Name

Logical Name MATE_CI (BSC)

Definition Cell Identity of the Mate cell

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules MATE_CI (BSC) = MATE_CI (MFS)If one mate cell is configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0) then theother mate cell shall also be configured with GPRS (MAX_PDCH > 0)For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to65535 at the same time


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 65535 65535

External Comment Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here isfor implementation purposes.(MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 513 / 1278


5.2.304 (MATE_LAC) - (MATE_LAC)

HMI Name MATE_LACParameter Name

Logical Name MATE_LAC

Definition Location Area Code of the Mate cell.


Mandatory rules For an extended cell, MATE_LAC and MATE_CI can not be equal to65535 at the same timeA couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)shall have the same LAC


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 65535 65535

External Comment Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here isfor implementation purposes.(MATE_LAC + MATE_CI) is relevant for extended cells only



514 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.305 (MAX_POW_INC) - (MAX_POW_INC)

HMI Name MAX_POW_INCParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_POW_INC

Definition Maximum Power increase in one power command.

Coding rules step size = 2dB

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 2 16 8




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 515 / 1278


5.2.306 (MAX_POW_RED) - (MAX_POW_RED)

HMI Name MAX_POW_REDParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_POW_RED

Definition Maximum Power reduction in one power command.

Coding rules step size = 2dB

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 2 16 8




516 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.307 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (BSC))

HMI Name MAX_RETRANSParameter Name

Logical Name Max_retrans (BSC)

Definition Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions by theMS on the RACH.

Coding rules Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01,10 and 11

Mandatory rules Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 7 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 517 / 1278


5.2.308 (MEAS_STAT_BFI_1) - (MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1])

HMI Name MEAS_STAT_BFI_1Parameter Name

Logical Name MEAS_STAT_BFI_i [1]

Definition Threshold on successive Bad Frame Indication to define bands usedfor Radio Measurements Statistics.


Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 1




518 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_BFI3 > MEAS_STAT_BFI2 > MEAS_STAT_BFI1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 519 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 4




520 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 521 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 8




522 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 523 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 14




524 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 18




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 525 / 1278







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_BFI9 > MEAS_STAT_BFI8


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 24 22




526 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.317 (MEAS_STAT_C_I_1) - (MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1])

HMI Name MEAS_STAT_C_I_1Parameter Name

Logical Name MEAS_STAT_C_I_i [1]

Definition Threshold on radio C/I (Carrier/Interference) measurements to definebands used for Radio Measurements Statistics.

Coding rules coded from 1 to +125, step size = 1dB ( 1= -62 db, ..., 125 = +62 dB)

Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 -12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 527 / 1278







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_CI1 < MEAS_STAT_CI2 < MEAS_STAT_CI3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 -9




528 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 -6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 529 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 -3




530 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 531 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 3




532 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 533 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 9




534 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_CI8 < MEAS_STAT_CI9


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -62 62 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 535 / 1278


5.2.326 (MEAS_STAT_LEV_1) - (MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1])

HMI Name MEAS_STAT_LEV_1Parameter Name

Logical Name MEAS_STAT_LEV_i [1]

Definition Threshold on radio level to define bands used for RadioMeasurements Statistics.

Coding rules coded 1 to 62, 1 = -109 dBm, . . . 62 = -48 dBm, step = 1dBm

Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -53




536 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_LEV_1 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_2 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -60




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 537 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -66




538 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -72




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 539 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -79




540 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -85




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 541 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -91




542 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -97




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 543 / 1278







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_LEV_8 > MEAS_STAT_LEV_9


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -109 -48 -104




544 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.335 (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1) - (MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1])

HMI Name MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_1Parameter Name

Logical Name MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL_i [1]

Definition Threshold on path balance to define bands used for RadioMeasurements Statistics.

Coding rules coded from 1 to +219, step size = 1dB (1 = -109 dB, ... 219 = +109dB)

Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1 < MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 -50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 545 / 1278







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL3 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL2 >MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 -30




546 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 -20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 547 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 -10




548 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 549 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 10




550 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 551 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 30




552 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL9 > MEAS_STAT_PATH_BAL8


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dB -109 109 50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 553 / 1278


5.2.344 (MEAS_STAT_S_1) - (MEAS_STAT_S_i [1])

HMI Name MEAS_STAT_S_1Parameter Name

Logical Name MEAS_STAT_S_i [1]

Definition Threshold on radio link counter to define bands used for RadioMeasurements Statistics.


Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_S1 < MEAS_STAT_S2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 1




554 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_S3 > MEAS_STAT_S2 > MEAS_STAT_S1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 555 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 8




556 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 557 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 14




558 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 16




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 559 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 18




560 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 561 / 1278







Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_S9 > MEAS_STAT_S8


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 1 127 22




562 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.353 (MEAS_STAT_TA_1) - (MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1])

HMI Name MEAS_STAT_TA_1Parameter Name

Logical Name MEAS_STAT_TA_i [1]

Definition Upper limit of the first TA band, lower limit of the second TA band(for the RMS TA measurements)

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules 0 < MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 7




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 563 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 2nd TA band, lower limit of the 3rd TA band (for theRMS TA measurements)

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_TA_1 < MEAS_STAT_TA_2 < MEAS_STAT_TA_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 13




564 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 3rd TA band, lower limit of the 4th TA band (for theRMS TA measurements)

Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 19




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 565 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 4th TA band, lower limit of the 5th TA band (for theRMS TA measurements)

Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 25




566 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 31




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 567 / 1278






Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 37




568 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 43




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 569 / 1278






Coding rules –



Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 49




570 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules MEAS_STAT_TA_8 < MEAS_STAT_TA_9 < 63


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


bper 1 62 55




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 571 / 1278


5.2.362 (MIN_CONNECT_TIME) - (MIN_CONNECT_TIME)

HMI Name MIN_CONNECT_TIMEParameter Name

Logical Name MIN_CONNECT_TIME

Definition Maximum connection time after a handover in an overlaid cell todeclare the MS "fast" when leaving the cell with a handover.

Coding rules step size=1sec

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 0 120 40


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A


Microcell 20 s

Minicell 40 s


Cell Type Dependent



572 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.363 (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL) - (MIN_RLF_TIME_DL)

HMI Name MIN_RLF_TIME_DLParameter Name

Logical Name MIN_RLF_TIME_DL

Definition Minimum time before detecting a radio link failure of a DL TBF,triggered by N3105 or NstagnatingWindowDL.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set a value close to the time of temporary verybad radio conditions that the operator would like to support during aDL TBF. Typically, a few seconds.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 0 25000 4000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 573 / 1278


5.2.364 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (BSC))

HMI Name Mobile Country Code (MCC)Parameter Name

Logical Name MCC (BSC)

Definition Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN.

Coding rules 3 digits BCD

Mandatory rules The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:- MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS).- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same(MCC,MNC) couple.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall beselected from the set of own PLMNs.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can beselected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 999 999

External Comment The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicatedhere is for implementation purposes.



574 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.365 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (BSC))

HMI Name Mobile Network Code (MNC)Parameter Name

Logical Name MNC (BSC)

Definition Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN.


Mandatory rules The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:- MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS).- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same(MCC,MNC) couple.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall beselected from the set of own PLMNs.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can beselected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 999 999

External Comment The value depends on configuration. The default value indicatedhere is for implementation purposes.The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (Fbinary coded 1111)MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 575 / 1278


5.2.366 (MS_P_CON_ACK) - (MS_P_CON_ACK)

HMI Name MS_P_CON_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name MS_P_CON_ACK

Definition Supervision of the MS Power Control procedure.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


2 x Samfr 0 31 3


Single 3 s

Umbrella 3 s

Concentric 3 s

Concentric Umbrella 3 s

Microcell 2 s

Minicell 3 s

Extended inner cell 3 s

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell 3 s


576 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.367 (MS_P_CON_INT) - (MS_P_CON_INT)

HMI Name MS_P_CON_INTParameter Name

Logical Name MS_P_CON_INT

Definition Minimum delay between two consecutive MS power commands.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


2 x Samfr 0 31 1


Single 1 s

Umbrella 1 s

Concentric 1 s

Concentric Umbrella 1 s

Microcell 0 s

Minicell 1 s

Extended inner cell 1 s

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell 1 s


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 577 / 1278


5.2.368 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX)

HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX

Definition MS maximum allowed transmission power.

Coding rules P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm,...., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ...,15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.

Mandatory rules MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm 5 43 43




578 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.369 (MS_TXPWR_MAX) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX(n))

HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX(n)

Definition MS maximum allowed transmission power.

Coding rules P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ...,15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.

Mandatory rules MS_TXPWR_MAX >= MS_TXPWR_MIN


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm 5 43 43

External Comment According to the 3GPP TS 05.05, if the BCCH frequency band isP-GSM/G1, depending on the version of MS (Phase 1 MS or Phase2/onwards MS), the coded value "0", "1" and "2" are interpreteddifferently:- Coded value "0": (interpreted as 43 dBm by the Phase 1 MS;interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);- Coded value "1": (interpreted as 41 dBm by the Phase 1 MS;interpreted as 39 dBm by the Phase 2/onwards MS);-Coded value "2": (interpreted as 39 dBm by both the Phase 1 MSand the Phase 2/onwards MS).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 579 / 1278


5.2.370 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC))


Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (BSC)

Definition Maximum transmission power an MS is allowed to use whenaccessing the cell until otherwise commanded.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm 5 43 43




580 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.371 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER)

HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNERParameter Name

Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER

Definition MS maximum allowed transmission power in the inner zone of aconcentric or multiband cell.


Mandatory rules MS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm 5 43 43


Meaninful only in cells where: CELL_PARTITION_TYPE =concentric.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 581 / 1278


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric #


Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



582 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.372 (MS_TXPWR_MIN) - (MS_TXPWR_MIN)

HMI Name MS_TXPWR_MINParameter Name

Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MIN

Definition MS minimum allowed transmission power.

Coding rules P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ...,13: 17 dBm,...,19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 13: 17 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 13: 4 dBm,...,15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ...,13: 4 dBm,..., 15: 0 dBm, 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm.

Mandatory rules MS_TXPWR_MIN <= MS_TXPWR_MAX andMS_TXPWR_MAX_INNER >= MS_TXPWR_MIN


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm 5 43 17

External Comment The default value depends on the BCCH frequency band:Default value for P-GSM/G1: 17 dBmDefault value for GSM850: 17 dBmDefault value for DCS1800: 4 dBmDefault value for DCS1900: 4 dBm



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 583 / 1278


5.2.373 (MSC Signalling Point Code) - (DPC)

HMI Name MSC Signalling Point CodeParameter Name

Logical Name DPC

Definition Signalling Point Code of the MSC.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 16383 12

External Comment - Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here isfor implementation purposes.- Significant only if EN_ASIG_OVER_IP is set to FALSE.



584 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.374 (MSCR) - (MSCR (BSC))

HMI Name MSCRParameter Name

Logical Name MSCR (BSC)

Definition Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendationsused to implement MSC software.

Coding rules 0 = MSC is release ’98 or older; 1 = MSC is release ’99 onwards

Mandatory rules MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 585 / 1278


5.2.375 (MSCR) - (MSCR (MFS))

HMI Name MSCRParameter Name

Logical Name MSCR (MFS)

Definition Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendationsused to implement MSC software.

Coding rules 0 = MSC is release ’98 or older; 1 = MSC is release ’99 onwards

Mandatory rules MSCR (BSC) = MSCR (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0




586 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.376 (MTP_Sequence_Number_Format) -(MTP_Sequence_Number_Format)

HMI Name MTP_Sequence_Number_FormatParameter Name

Logical Name MTP_Sequence_Number_Format

Definition Defines the format to be used for the sequence number of MTP2.

Coding rules 0: Normal1: Extended

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment Value "Extended" is refused by the BSC if EN_HSL=0



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 587 / 1278


5.2.377 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC))

HMI Name MULTIBAND_REPORTINGParameter Name

Logical Name MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC)

Definition Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to beincluded in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS.

Coding rules Coded over 2 bits:00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known andallowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used;01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowedNCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list,excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known andallowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BAlist, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known andallowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BAlist, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell.

Mandatory rules Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 3 0




588 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.378 (MULTIBAND_REPORTING) - (MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS))

HMI Name MULTIBAND_REPORTINGParameter Name

Logical Name MULTIBAND_REPORTING (MFS)

Definition Minimum number of cells of each supported frequency band to beincluded in MEASUREMENT REPORT by the MS.

Coding rules Coded over 2 bits:00: normal reporting of the six strongest cells, with known andallowed NCC part of BSIC, irrespective of the band used;01: the MS shall report the strongest cell, with known and allowedNCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BA list,excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;10: the MS shall report the two strongest cells, with known andallowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BAlist, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell;11: the MS shall report the three strongest cells, with known andallowed NCC part of BSIC, in each of the frequency bands in the BAlist, excluding the frequency band of the serving cell.

Mandatory rules Equal to MULTIBAND_REPORTING (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 3 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 589 / 1278


5.2.379 (MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION) -(MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION)

HMI Name MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITIONParameter Name

Logical Name MULTIBAND_TRAFFIC_CONDITION

Definition This parameter determines the condition on traffic load in the servingcell to trigger a multiband handover.

Coding rules 0: Any load, 1: Not low, 2: High

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 2 0




590 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.380 (N_BAD_SACCH) - (N_BAD_SACCH)

HMI Name N_BAD_SACCHParameter Name

Logical Name N_BAD_SACCH

Definition Number of consecutive bad SACCH frames to trigger a rescuehandover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules 1) N_BAD_SACCH = RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS - N_BSTXPWR_M+ 1

2) In micro cells, it is recommended to set N_BAD_SACCH so thatT_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP > N_BAD_SACCH * 480ms + 30seconds if T_AUTOCLEANING_MEAS_REP <> 0.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 0 128 4


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A


Microcell 4

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 591 / 1278


5.2.381 (N_TCH_HO) - (N_TCH_HO)

HMI Name N_TCH_HOParameter Name

Logical Name N_TCH_HO

Definition Number of less interfered Full Rate TCH reserved for handover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 3




592 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.382 (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD) - (N_TRAFFIC_LOAD)

HMI Name N_TRAFFIC_LOADParameter Name

Logical Name N_TRAFFIC_LOAD

Definition Number of consecutive load averages used in traffic load evaluationprocess.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 8 1



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

6 6 3 3 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 593 / 1278


5.2.383 (NB_CLR_REQ) - (N_CLR_REQ)

HMI Name NB_CLR_REQParameter Name

Logical Name N_CLR_REQ

Definition Maximum number of CLEAR REQUEST message transmission.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 8 4




594 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.384 (NB_PREF_CELLS) - (N_PREF_CELLS)

HMI Name NB_PREF_CELLSParameter Name

Logical Name N_PREF_CELLS

Definition Maximum number of candidate cells sent in one HANDOVERREQUIRED.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 16 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 595 / 1278


5.2.385 (Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one step) - (M2)

HMI Name Nbr AC 11-15 unbarred in one stepParameter Name

Logical Name M2

Definition Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are unbarred in onestep.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 5 2




596 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.386 (Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one step) - (N1)

HMI Name Nbr. AC 0-9 barred in one stepParameter Name

Logical Name N1

Definition Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are barred in one step.

Coding rules Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of low priority access classes.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 10 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 597 / 1278


5.2.387 (Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one step) - (N2)

HMI Name Nbr. AC 0-9 unbarred in one stepParameter Name

Logical Name N2

Definition Number of low priority access classes (0..9) are unbarred in one step.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 10 2




598 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.388 (Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one step) - (M1)

HMI Name Nbr. AC 11-15 barred in one stepParameter Name

Logical Name M1

Definition Number of high priority access classes (11..15) are barred in onestep.

Coding rules Value 0 inhibits the automatic barring of high priority access classes

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 5 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 599 / 1278


5.2.389 (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP) - (NBR_RESET_CIC_REP)

HMI Name NBR_RESET_CIC_REPParameter Name

Logical Name NBR_RESET_CIC_REP

Definition Maximum number of RESET CIRCUIT message repetitions whennot acknowledged by the MSC.

Coding rules 255: RESET CIRCUIT message is indefinitely repeated

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 255 6




600 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.390 (NBR_RESET_REP) - (NBR_RESET_REP)

HMI Name NBR_RESET_REPParameter Name

Logical Name NBR_RESET_REP

Definition Number of times the RESET message is sent without beingacknowledged by the MSC before an alarm is reported.

Coding rules If NBR_RESET_REP = 0, RESET message is not sent

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 127 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 601 / 1278


5.2.391 (NCC) - (NCC (BSC))

HMI Name NCCParameter Name

Logical Name NCC (BSC)

Definition Network Colour code of the cell.

Coding rules Coded over 3 bits.

Mandatory rules - Equal to NCC (MFS)- NCC (BSC) shall be included in NCC_permited


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




602 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.392 (NCC) - (NCC (MFS))


Logical Name NCC (MFS)

Definition Network Colour code of the cell.


Mandatory rules - Equal to NCC (BSC)- NCC (MFS) shall be included in NCC_permited


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 603 / 1278


5.2.393 (NCC) - (NCC(n))


Logical Name NCC(n)

Definition Network Colour code of the neighbour cell.


Mandatory rules NCC(n) shall be included in NCC_permited of the serving cell


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 7 0

External Comment Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here isfor implementation purposes.This parameter is for every cell (OMC external cells and OMCinternal cells). The operator needs to configure the value of thatparameter for every cell.



604 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.394 (NCC permitted) - (NCC_permitted)

HMI Name NCC permittedParameter Name

Logical Name NCC_permitted

Definition Indicates which NCC values the MS considers as belonging to thenetwork.

Coding rules Coded over 8 bits. each bit corresponds to a NCC value: MSBcorresponds to NCC = 7, LSB corresponds to NCC = 0. For eachbit:0= NCC not permitted, 1= NCC permitted

Mandatory rules NCC of the serving cell and of its neighbor cells shall be included inNCC_permited


Category Site (CAE)

Type Bitmap

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 0

External Comment The value depends on configuration. The default value indicatedhere is for implementation purposes.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 605 / 1278


5.2.395 (NCI) - (NCI)

HMI Name NCIParameter Name

Logical Name NCI

Definition This flag indicates to the MS if it reports a HANDOVER FAILURE incase of out of range timing advance.

Coding rules 0: Out of range timing advance is ignored, 1: Out of range timingadvance triggers a Handover Failure procedure

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




606 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.396 (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV) - (NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n))

HMI Name NEIGHBOUR_RXLEVParameter Name

Logical Name NEIGHBOUR_RXLEV(0,n)

Definition Threshold of maximum received level from the neighbour cells forcause 13.

Coding rules coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


dBm -110 -47 -47


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A



Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 607 / 1278


5.2.397 (NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HO) - (NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO)

HMI Name NUM_TCH_EMERGENCY_HOParameter Name

Logical Name NUM_TCH_EGNCY_HO

Definition Number of full rate TCH reserved for incoming emergency handovers(plus Cause 12 and Cause 27 handovers).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 0

External Comment The Pre-emption procedure (in case EN_TCH_PREEMPT =enabled) might use these reserved TCHs in order to avoid releasingan on-going call unnecessarily.



608 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.398 (NY_1) - (NY1)

HMI Name NY_1Parameter Name

Logical Name NY1

Definition Maximum number of repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATION.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR.

Recommended rules For rules, see T3105_D and T3105_F_FR, T3105_F_HR.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 3 35 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 609 / 1278


5.2.399 (OFFSET_CA_HIGH) - (OFFSET_CA_HIGH)

HMI Name OFFSET_CA_HIGHParameter Name

Logical Name OFFSET_CA_HIGH

Definition Offset for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation hysteresis underhigh load (Handover Cause 26).

Coding rules step size = 0.1 (0 coded as 0, 0.1 coded as 1 ... 7 coded as 70)

Mandatory rules OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4.5




610 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.400 (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL) - (OFFSET_CA_NORMAL)

HMI Name OFFSET_CA_NORMALParameter Name

Logical Name OFFSET_CA_NORMAL

Definition Offset for AMR-NB HR-to-FR channel adaptation hysteresis undernormal load (Handover Cause 26).


Mandatory rules OFFSET_CA_HIGH >= OFFSET_CA_NORMAL


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 4.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 611 / 1278


5.2.401 (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER) - (OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER)

HMI Name OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNERParameter Name

Logical Name OFFSET_HO_MARGIN_INNER

Definition Offset which allows to take into account the radio differencesbetween the inner and the outer zone (especially in multiband cells).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -127 127 0




612 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.402 (OFFSET_HOPPING_HO) - (Offset_Hopping_HO)

HMI Name OFFSET_HOPPING_HOParameter Name

Logical Name Offset_Hopping_HO

Definition Offset applied in the handover quality causes for radio hoppingchannels.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 613 / 1278


5.2.403 (OFFSET_HOPPING_PC) - (Offset_Hopping_PC)

HMI Name OFFSET_HOPPING_PCParameter Name

Logical Name Offset_Hopping_PC

Definition Offset applied in the power control quality causes for hopping radiochannels.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




614 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.404 (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV) - (OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n))

HMI Name OUTDOOR_UMB_LEVParameter Name

Logical Name OUTDOOR_UMB_LEV(0,n)

Definition Minimum received level from umbrella cell n to allow handover cause"level uplink micro-cell" or "level downlink micro-cell".


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance adj


dBm -110 -47 -80


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A





Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 615 / 1278


5.2.405 (Own SPC) - (OPC)

HMI Name Own SPCParameter Name

Logical Name OPC

Definition Signalling Point Code of the BSC.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 16383 12

External Comment - Must be equal to DPC and SSF used by the MSC and RNC andSMLC for adressing the BSC.- Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here isfor implementation purposes.- Parameter change: Before any modification of the OPC, theBSS-TEL is to be previously locked. This procedure leads the BSCto reject any new calls and wait for some minutes (Wait Traffic Clear)before shutting down the on going calls.After modification of the OPC, the operator shall trigger a BSCrestart. The locked objects must be unlocked again to reopen thetelecom service.



616 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.406 (PAGING) - (PAG_BAR)

HMI Name PAGINGParameter Name

Logical Name PAG_BAR

Definition This flag indicates if transmission of Pagings is allowed in the cell.

Coding rules 0: Pagings are not barred, 1: Pagings are barred

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment this flag can be used by an operator to temporarily prevent phonesfrom ringing in specific cells



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 617 / 1278


5.2.407 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(BSC))


Logical Name PENALTY_TIME(BSC)



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 20 620 20


Single inhibited (31)

Umbrella inhibited (31)

Concentric inhibited (31)

Concentric Umbrella inhibited (31)

Microcell 20 s (0)

Minicell 20 s (0)

Extended inner cell inhibited (31)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell inhibited (31)


618 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.408 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(MFS))


Logical Name PENALTY_TIME(MFS)


Coding rules step size = 20s. 0: 20s, 1: 40s, ..., 30: 620s, 31: TEMPORARYOFFSET ignored and cell_RESELECT_OFFSET has a negativevalue.

Mandatory rules PENALTY_TIME(MFS) = PENALTY_TIME(BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 20 620 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 619 / 1278


5.2.409 (PENALTY_TIME) - (PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS))


Logical Name PENALTY_TIME(n)(MFS)



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


sec 20 620 20




620 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.410 (PING_PONG_HANDICAP) - (PING_PONG_HCP)

HMI Name PING_PONG_HANDICAPParameter Name

Logical Name PING_PONG_HCP

Definition A transient handicap is applied to power budget of previous cell toavoid a "ping-pong" effect.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 127 15




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 621 / 1278


5.2.411 (POW_INC_FACTOR) - (POW_INC_FACTOR)

HMI Name POW_INC_FACTORParameter Name

Logical Name POW_INC_FACTOR

Definition Weighting factor for power increase.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules POW_INC_FACTOR >= POW_RED_FACTOR

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0.8




622 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.412 (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_INC_STEP_SIZE)

HMI Name POW_INC_STEP_SIZEParameter Name

Logical Name POW_INC_STEP_SIZE

Definition Power increase step size in case of power command triggered onquality criterion.

Coding rules step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB, ..., 7: 14 dB

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules POW_INC_STEP_SIZE > POW_RED_STEP_SIZE

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 2 14 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 623 / 1278


5.2.413 (POW_RED_FACTOR) - (POW_RED_FACTOR)

HMI Name POW_RED_FACTORParameter Name

Logical Name POW_RED_FACTOR

Definition Weighting factor for power reduction.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules POW_RED_FACTOR <= POW_INC_FACTOR

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0.5




624 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.414 (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE) - (POW_RED_STEP_SIZE)

HMI Name POW_RED_STEP_SIZEParameter Name

Logical Name POW_RED_STEP_SIZE

Definition Power reduction step size in case of power command triggered onquality criterion.

Coding rules step size = 2dB. 1: 2dB, 2: 4dB

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules POW_RED_STEP_SIZE < POW_INC_STEP_SIZE

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 2 4 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 625 / 1278


5.2.415 (Preference Mark) - (TRX_PREF_MARK)

HMI Name Preference MarkParameter Name

Logical Name TRX_PREF_MARK

Definition Preference mark assigned to a given TRX.

Coding rules 0: PS/CS TRX: This TRX can carry PS and CS traffic and has thelowest preference in the TCH sub-channel selection process used toserve a CS call.1: CS TRX with preference mark 1: This TRX can carry only CStraffic and has the preference mark 1 in the TCH sub-channelselection process used to serve a CS call....7: CS TRX with preference mark 7: This TRX can carry only CStraffic and has the highest preference in the TCH sub-channelselection process used to served a CS call. It means that this TRXhas the highest priority for CS traffic.

Mandatory rules 1) For a TRX in the inner zone of a monoband or multibandconcentric cell, the parameter TRX_PREF_MARK shall be set to anon-null value.

2) For a hopping G1 TRX, if EGSM_RR_ALLOC_STRATEGY= 0 and BCCH/CCCH are configured on PGSM TRX, thenTRX_PREF_MARK <> 0

3)The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order tocheck the upper limit of MAX_PDCH:i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1:CCCH combined"ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0:CCCH not combined"iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs withTRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRX.

4) In case of cell shared over 2 BTSs, the GPRS TRXs of the cell (ieTRX_PREF_MARK=0) can be either on the main sector or on thesecondary, but not on both.

5) the maximum number of PS capable TRX (ie TRX_PREF_MARK= 0) defined in one cell is 16.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance TRX

626 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09



None 0 7 1

External Comment If EGPRS is activated in the cell, TRX_PREF_MARK (BCCH TRX)= 0 and the BCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware and atransmission pool allowing the usage of 8-PSK, the operator shallensure that the difference in the mean output powers between GSMKand 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliant with3GPP TS 05.05 and 3GPP TS 05.08 requirements (or 4 dB if anSDCCH timeslot is defined in timeslot number 7 of the BCCH TRX).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 627 / 1278


5.2.416 (PREFERRED_BAND) - (PREFERRED_BAND)

HMI Name PREFERRED_BANDParameter Name

Logical Name PREFERRED_BAND

Definition Frequency band to which the multiband MS are preferentiallydirected.

Coding rules 0: none, 1: GSM, 2: DCS

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 2 0




628 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.417 (Preventive cyclic retransmission flag) - (EN_PCR)

HMI Name Preventive cyclic retransmission flagParameter Name

Logical Name EN_PCR

Definition This flag enables preventive cyclic retransmission.

Coding rules 0 : disabled, 1 : enabled

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment This parameter is set to 1 by the BSC in case the Ater links of a BSSare configured as satellite links.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 629 / 1278


5.2.418 (PWRC) - (PWRC (BSC))

HMI Name PWRCParameter Name

Logical Name PWRC (BSC)

Definition This flag indicates to the MS if it includes measurements made onBCCH frequency in case of frequency hopping channel.

Coding rules 0: measurements made on BCCH frequency are included, 1:measurements made on BCCH frequency are not included.

Mandatory rules Equal to PWRC (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




630 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.419 (PWRC) - (PWRC (MFS))

HMI Name PWRCParameter Name

Logical Name PWRC (MFS)

Definition This flag indicates to the MS whether or not it shall includemeasurements made on BCCH frequency in case of frequencyhopping channel.

Coding rules 0: measurements made on BCCH frequency shall be included, 1:measurements made on BCCH frequency shall not be included

Mandatory rules Equal to PWRC (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 631 / 1278


5.2.420 (Q703_N1) - (Q703_N1)

HMI Name Q703_N1Parameter Name

Logical Name Q703_N1

Definition Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 127 127

External Comment not used if EN_HSL = 1



632 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.421 (Q703_N1_HSL) - (Q703_N1_HSL)

HMI Name Q703_N1_HSLParameter Name

Logical Name Q703_N1_HSL

Definition Maximum number of MSU available for retransmission (if HSL isused).

Coding rules step size 1

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 4095 4095

External Comment used if EN_HSL = 1



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 633 / 1278


5.2.422 (Q703_N2) - (Q703_N2)

HMI Name Q703_N2Parameter Name

Logical Name Q703_N2

Definition Maximum number of MSU octets which are available forretransmission.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


bytes 1 8192 4096




634 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.423 (Q703_N2_HSL) - (Q703_N2_HSL)

HMI Name Q703_N2_HSLParameter Name

Logical Name Q703_N2_HSL

Definition Maximum number of MSU octets which are available forretransmission (if HSL is used).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


bytes 1 65535 32767




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 635 / 1278


5.2.424 (Q703_T1) - (Q703_T1)

HMI Name Q703_T1Parameter Name

Logical Name Q703_T1

Definition MTP2 timer "alignment ready".

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


1/10 sec 40 50 50




636 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.425 (Q703_T1_HSL) - (Q703_T1_HSL)

HMI Name Q703_T1_HSLParameter Name

Logical Name Q703_T1_HSL

Definition MTP2 timer "alignment ready" for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 25 350 300




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 637 / 1278


5.2.426 (Q703_T2) - (Q703_T2)



Definition MTP2 timer "not aligned".

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


1/10 sec 5 150 30




638 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.427 (Q703_T3) - (Q703_T3)



Definition MTP2 timer "aligned".


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 1 2 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 639 / 1278


5.2.428 (Q703_T4E) - (Q703_T4E)

HMI Name Q703_T4EParameter Name

Logical Name Q703_T4E

Definition MTP2 Emergency proving period.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.4 0.6 0.5

External Comment Applicable to LSL and HSL.



640 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.429 (Q703_T4N) - (Q703_T4N)

HMI Name Q703_T4NParameter Name

Logical Name Q703_T4N

Definition MTP2 Normal proving period.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 7.5 9.5 8.2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 641 / 1278


5.2.430 (Q703_T4N_HSL) - (Q703_T4N_HSL)

HMI Name Q703_T4N_HSLParameter Name

Logical Name Q703_T4N_HSL

Definition MTP2 Normal proving period for 2Mbit/s (if HSL is used).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 3 70 30




642 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.431 (Q703_T5) - (Q703_T5)



Definition MTP2 timer "sending SIB".

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


ms 80 120 100




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 643 / 1278


5.2.432 (Q703_T6) - (Q703_T6)



Definition MTP2 timer "remote congestion".


Mandatory rules Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 3 6 5.4




644 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.433 (Q703_T7) - (Q703_T7)



Definition MTP2 timer "excessive delay of acknowledgement".


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.5 2 1

External Comment In case of a Ater satellite connection, this parameter is set to 2seconds by the BSC.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 645 / 1278


5.2.434 (Q704_T2) - (Q704_T2)



Definition MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changeoveracknowledgement.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.7 2 2




646 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.435 (Q704_T4) - (Q704_T4)



Definition MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changebackacknowledgement (first attempt).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.5 1.2 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 647 / 1278


5.2.436 (Q704_T5) - (Q704_T5)



Definition MTP3 timer supervising the reception of changebackacknowledgement (second attempt).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.5 1.2 1




648 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.437 (Q707_T1) - (Q707_T1)



Definition MTP3 timer supervising the reception of signalling link testacknowledgement.


Mandatory rules Q707_T1 >= Q703_T6


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 4 12 6.4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 649 / 1278


5.2.438 (Q707_T2) - (Q707_T2)



Definition MTP3 delay between transmission of consecutive signalling linktest message.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 30 90 60




650 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.439 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC))

HMI Name RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTERParameter Name

Logical Name RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC)

Definition Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKETCHANNEL REQUEST filtering.

Coding rules 64: no filtering

Mandatory rules Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS).

Recommended rules Disable the filtering for extended cells.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


bper 0 64 64

External Comment One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNELREQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages withTiming Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER arediscarded.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 651 / 1278


5.2.440 (RACH_BUSY_THRES) - (RACH_BUSY_THRES)

HMI Name RACH_BUSY_THRESParameter Name

Logical Name RACH_BUSY_THRES

Definition Received level above which a RACH TS is deemed busy.

Coding rules This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows:1: -110 dBm5: -106 dBm9: -102 dBm13: -98 dBm17: -94 dBm21: -90 dBm25: -86 dBm29: -82 dBm33: -78 dBm37: -74 dBm41: -70 dBm45: -66 dBm49: -62 dBm53: -58 dBm57: -54 dBm61: -50 dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -50 -106




652 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.441 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS)

HMI Name RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRESParameter Name

Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS

Definition Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink path, fornon AMR calls, or for AMR calls (NB or WB) for which RepeatedSACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS > N_BSTXPWR_M

Recommended rules Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent(very far to the 3GPP values):It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message.For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, butnot received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HOCMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call durationis artificially increased.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 255 18




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 653 / 1278


5.2.442 (RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMR) -(RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR)

HMI Name RADIOLINK_FAILURE_THRES_AMRParameter Name

Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR

Definition Counter threshold to detect a radio link failure on the uplink pathfor calls using an AMR codec (NB or WB) and for which RepeatedSACCH and/or Repeated DL FACCH are not activated.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS_AMR > N_BSTXPWR_M

Recommended rules Values higher than 128 are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent(very far to the 3GPP values):It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message.For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, butnot received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HOCMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call durationis artificially increased.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 255 18




654 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.443 (RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRES) - (N_BSTXPWR_M)

HMI Name RADIOLINK_RECOVERY_THRESParameter Name

Logical Name N_BSTXPWR_M

Definition Counter threshold to trigger a radio link recovery.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules N_BSTXPWR_M < RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_BS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 0 127 13


Single 13

Umbrella 13

Concentric 13


Microcell 15

Minicell 13


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 655 / 1278


5.2.444 (RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH) - (RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH)

HMI Name RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCHParameter Name

Logical Name RADIOLINK_REP_DL_SACCH

Definition Repeated DL SACCH activation threshold for UL RLT (Radio LinkTimer) counter.Dynamic activation is triggered in the BTS when the UL RLT counteris inferior or equal to that threshold.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 0 127 10

External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only- The setting of this value is a trade-off between "triggeringREP_DL_SACCH soon enough to take benefit from it before drop"and "triggering REP_DL_SACCH not too soon to let time to therecovery mechanism to increase the output power of the BTS to itsmax level before".- Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



656 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.445 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC))

HMI Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUTParameter Name

Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC)

Definition Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision.This applies to non AMR calls or to AMR (NB or WB) calls for whichRepeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.

Coding rules step size = 4 Samfr, coded from 0 to 15 (0 == 4 Samfr, 1 == 8 Samfr... 15 == 64 Samfr

Mandatory rules Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 4 64 16




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 657 / 1278


5.2.446 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS))

HMI Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUTParameter Name

Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (MFS)

Definition Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision.This applies to non AMR calls or to AMR (NB or WB) calls for whichRepeated SACCH and Repeated DL FACCH are activated.


Mandatory rules Equal to RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


Samfr 4 64 16




658 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.447 (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR) - (RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR)

HMI Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMRParameter Name

Logical Name RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT_AMR

Definition Initial value of MS counter for radio link supervision, for a call usingan AMR codec (NB or WB) and for which Repeated SACCH and/orRepeated DL FACCH are not activated.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 4 64 16




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 659 / 1278


5.2.448 (REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT) -(REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT)

HMI Name REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORTParameter Name

Logical Name REP_DL_FACCH_LEGACY_SUPPORT

Definition Legacy support for repeated downlink FACCH for AMR-NB orAMR-WB GMSK calls.This parameter concerns only the LAPDm command frames.

Coding rules 0: repeated DL FACCH enabled only for the AMR mobile stationshaving indicated the support of the feature by repeated ACCHCapability bit = 11: repeated DL FACCH enabled for all AMR mobile stations

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment - This parameter is relevant only if repeated downlink FACCH(EN_REP_DL_FACCH) is enabled.- Function available on BSC Evolution only.- The value 1 is used to tackle early implementations, ie for MS withrepeated ACCH Capability bit=0 or MS without Repeated ACCHCapability bit (legacy MS).- Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



660 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.449 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR) -(REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR)

HMI Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FRParameter Name

Logical Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_FR

Definition Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-NB FR calls.Dynamic activation is done as long as the codec mode request (CMRvalue) is inferior or equal to that threshold.

Coding rules 0: off1: 4,75 kbit/s2: 5,15 kbit/s3: 5,90 kbit/s4: 6,70 kbit/s5: 7,40 kbit/s6: 7,95 kbit/s7: 10,2 kbit/s8: 12,2 kbit/s

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 8 3

External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only.- When setting the threshold to the max value, the repeated DLFACCH is always activated for AMR-NB FR codec (if allowed for thecall).-Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 661 / 1278


5.2.450 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR) -(REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR)

HMI Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HRParameter Name

Logical Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_HR

Definition Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-NB HR calls.Dynamic activation is done as long as the codec mode request (CMRvalue) is inferior or equal to that threshold.

Coding rules 0: off1: 4,75 kbit/s2: 5,15 kbit/s3: 5,90 kbit/s4: 6,70 kbit/s5: 7,40 kbit/s

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 5 3

External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only.- When setting the threshold to the max value, the repeated DLFACCH is always activated for AMR-NB HR codec (if allowed for thecall).- Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



662 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.451 (REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB) -(REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB)

HMI Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WBParameter Name

Logical Name REP_DL_FACCH_THRES_AMR_WB

Definition Repeated DL FACCH activation threshold for AMR-WB GMSK calls.Dynamic activation is done as long as the codec mode request (CMRvalue) is inferior or equal to that threshold.

Coding rules 0: off1: 6,60 kbit/s2: 8,85 kbit/s3: 12,65 kbit/s

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 3 1

External Comment - Function available on BSC Evolution only.- When setting the threshold to the max value, the repeated DLFACCH is always activated for AMR-WB GMSK codec (if allowed forthe call).- Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on new calls (after modification).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 663 / 1278


5.2.452 (Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCH) -(Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH)

HMI Name Reserved Slots Number for Basic CBCHParameter Name

Logical Name Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH

Definition This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for highpriority messages within the schedule period for basic CBCH.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules shall be set to "0" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 40 0




664 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.453 (Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCH) -(Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH)

HMI Name Reserved Slots Number for Extended CBCHParameter Name

Logical Name Nb_of_reserved_slots_for_extended_CBCH

Definition This parameter indicates the number of slots reserved for highpriority messages within the schedule period for extended CBCH.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 40 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 665 / 1278


5.2.454 (RESET_INDEFINITE) - (RESET_INDEFINITE)

HMI Name RESET_INDEFINITEParameter Name

Logical Name RESET_INDEFINITE

Definition This flag determines whether or not the RESET message shall besent indefinitely (as long as it is not acknowledged).

Coding rules 0: RESET message is sent a maximum of NBR_RESET_REP times,1: The Reset procedure is repeated until a RESET or RESET ACKmessage is received.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




666 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.455 (RESP_REQ) - (RESP_REQ)

HMI Name RESP_REQParameter Name

Logical Name RESP_REQ

Definition This flag controls "Response request" OIE inclusion in HANDOVERREQUIRED.

Coding rules 0: IE not included, 1: IE included

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules When the VGCS feature (EN_VGCS) is activated, it is recommendedto include the Response Request in the HANDOVER REQUIREDmessage (RESP_REQ).

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment Default value depends on MSC typeFor external directed retries, the serving BSC does not know whetheror not the external target cells (towards which the directed retryis triggered) are congested. Therefore, Alcatel recommend to setRESP_REQ to 1 if EN_EXT_DR is set to enabled in order to get aHandover Reject message from the MSC in case all target cells arecongested and thus to attempt other procedures.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 667 / 1278


5.2.456 (RF_RES_IND_PERIOD) - (T_INTRF_L3)

HMI Name RF_RES_IND_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name T_INTRF_L3

Definition Delay between two consecutive RF RESOURCE INDICATION.


Mandatory rules T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED) & T_INTRF_L3 >INTAVE


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 10 180 60




668 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.457 (RMS_TEMPLATE) - (RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX)

HMI Name RMS_TEMPLATEParameter Name

Logical Name RMS_TEMPLATE_INDEX

Definition Template of values of RMS parameters to be applied to theconcerned cell (concerns the parameters MEAS_STAT_C_Ix,MEAS_STAT_BFIx, MEAS_STAT_LEVx, MEAS_STAT_PATH_BALx,MEAS_STAT_Sx, EN_BALANCED_CI, VQ_AVERAGE,VQ_BAD_RXFER, VQ_FER_THRESHOLD, VQ_GOOD_RXFER,VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD, VQ_RXLEV, VQ_RXQUAL,VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER).

Coding rules coded from 1 to 16

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 16 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 669 / 1278


5.2.458 (ROT) - (ROT)

HMI Name ROTParameter Name

Logical Name ROT

Definition Indicates to the MS whether or not it shall include "Time Difference"IE in HANDOVER COMPLETE.

Coding rules 0: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is NOT included in HANDOVERCOMPLETE,1: "Mobile Time Difference" IE is included in HANDOVERCOMPLETE

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




670 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.459 (RSL_RATE (BSC)) - (RSL_RATE (BSC))

HMI Name RSL_RATE (BSC)Parameter Name

Logical Name RSL_RATE (BSC)

Definition Rate used on all RSL links towards a BTS.

Coding rules 0: 16 kbit/s, 1: 64 kbit/s

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BTS


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 671 / 1278


5.2.460 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC))


Logical Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)



Mandatory rules RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -100




672 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.461 (RXLEV_DL_IH) - (RXLEV_DL_IH)

HMI Name RXLEV_DL_IHParameter Name

Logical Name RXLEV_DL_IH

Definition Downlink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercellhandover in case of bad downlink quality.

Coding rules Coded over 6 bits: 0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm.

Mandatory rules RXLEV_DL_IH > L_RXLEV_DL_H


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -65


Single -65 dBm (45)







Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 673 / 1278


5.2.462 (RXLEV_DL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_DL_ZONE)

HMI Name RXLEV_DL_ZONEParameter Name

Logical Name RXLEV_DL_ZONE

Definition Downlink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" ANDFREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or"EGSM" or "DCS 1900":RXLEV_DL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_DL_H (This rule only applies toconcentric and monoband cell.)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -71


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A



Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



674 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.463 (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO) - (RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO)

HMI Name RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HOParameter Name

Logical Name RXLEV_LIMIT_PBGT_HO

Definition Threshold on the downlink received level above which it is notnecessary to trigger a handover on power budget (cause 12).

Coding rules Coded over 6 bits:0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -47


Single -65 dBm (45)







Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 675 / 1278


5.2.464 (RXLEV_MIN_n) - (RXLEVmin(n))

HMI Name RXLEV_MIN_nParameter Name

Logical Name RXLEVmin(n)

Definition Minimum level received from cell n to allow reception of handover.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -96


Single -100 dBm (10)







Cell Type Dependent



676 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.465 (RXLEV_UL_IH) - (RXLEV_UL_IH)

HMI Name RXLEV_UL_IHParameter Name

Logical Name RXLEV_UL_IH

Definition Uplink level threshold for decision between intracell and intercellhandover in case of bad uplink quality.


Mandatory rules RXLEV_UL_IH > L_RXLEV_UL_H


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -65


Single -75 dBm (35)







Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 677 / 1278


5.2.466 (RXLEV_UL_ZONE) - (RXLEV_UL_ZONE)

HMI Name RXLEV_UL_ZONEParameter Name

Logical Name RXLEV_UL_ZONE

Definition Uplink level threshold for inner to outer zone handover.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If CELL_PARTITION_TYPE = "Concentric" ANDFREQUENCY_RANGE = "PGSM" or "DCS1800" or"EGSM" or "DCS 1900":RXLEV_UL_ZONE >= L_RXLEV_UL_H (This rule only applies toconcentric and monoband cell.)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -78


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A



Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



678 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.467 (Schedule Period for Basic CBCH) -(Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH)

HMI Name Schedule Period for Basic CBCHParameter Name

Logical Name Schedule_period_for_basic_CBCH

Definition Length of the DRX schedule period for the basic CBCH.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


CBper 0 40 32




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 679 / 1278


5.2.468 (Schedule period for Extended CBCH) -(Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH)

HMI Name Schedule period for Extended CBCHParameter Name

Logical Name Schedule_period_for_extended_CBCH

Definition Length of the DRX schedule period for the extended CBCH.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


CBper 0 40 32




680 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.469 (SDCCH_COUNTER) - (SDCCH_COUNTER)

HMI Name SDCCH_COUNTERParameter Name

Logical Name SDCCH_COUNTER

Definition Time during which SDCCH handovers are forbidden after completionof the Immediate Assignment procedure.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules SDCCH_COUNTER <= T_SDCCH_PC

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


2 x Samfr 0 31 3

External Comment "0" means that SDCCH handover is immediately allowed aftercompletion of the Immediate Assignment procedure.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 681 / 1278


5.2.470 (SDCCH_HO) - (HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT)

HMI Name SDCCH_HOParameter Name

Logical Name HO_SDCCH_INHIBIT

Definition The flag inhibits/enables the execution of SDCCH handovers.

Coding rules 0: SDCCH HO enabled1: SDCCH HO disabled

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1

External Comment This parameter has no influence on Directed Retry

Single enable (0)

Umbrella enable (0)




Minicell enable (0)

Extended inner cell disabled (1) *

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell disabled (1) *


682 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.471 (Send_CM_Enquiry) - (BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY)

HMI Name Send_CM_EnquiryParameter Name

Logical Name BSS_SEND_CM_ENQUIRY

Definition Controls the trigger of Classmark Enquiry procedure at callestablishment time.

Coding rules 0: the classmark enquiry is never initiated by the BSC;1: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST message withES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will always initiate a classmark enquiry;2: on reception of a LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST messagewith ES IND flag set to 0, the BSC will initiate the classmark enquiry ifalgorithm A5/1 is not available (information available in MS classmark1 IE sent in the LOCATION UPDATING REQUEST).

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 2 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 683 / 1278


5.2.472 (Signalling Link Code) - (SLC)

HMI Name Signalling Link CodeParameter Name

Logical Name SLC

Definition Signalling Link Code.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance N7 ch


None 0 15 0




684 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.473 (SMSCB_Features_Set) - (SMSCB_Features_set)

HMI Name SMSCB_Features_SetParameter Name

Logical Name SMSCB_Features_set

Definition This parameter indicates which features are usable with the SMSCBproduct.

Coding rules 1: Features set 1, 2: Features set 2

Mandatory rules Can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE = "inactive".If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then CBC_Window shall be equalto "1"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then SMSCB_Recoveryshall be set to "No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, thenfor all the BSC cells Use_of_Extended_CBCH shall be set to"No"- If SMSCB_Features_set = FS1, then for all the BSC cellsNb_of_reserved_slots_for_basic_CBCH shall be set to "0"


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 2 1

External Comment When migrating from FS1 to FS2,USE_OF_EXTENDED_CBCH shall be set to "Yes",CBC_WINDOW shall be set to 4.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 685 / 1278


5.2.474 (SMSCB_Phase) - (SMSCB_Phase)

HMI Name SMSCB_PhaseParameter Name

Logical Name SMSCB_Phase

Definition This parameter indicates whether the feature operates in GSMPhase2 or Phase 2+ mode.

Coding rules 0: Phase 2, 1: Phase 2+

Mandatory rules If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS1", SMSCB_PHASE shall be set to"phase2"’If SMSCB_FEATURES_SET="FS2", SMSCB_PHASE shall be setto "phase2+"SMSCB_Phase can be changed only whenSMSCB_STATE="inactive"


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




686 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.475 (SMSCB_Recovery) - (SMSCB_Recovery)

HMI Name SMSCB_RecoveryParameter Name

Logical Name SMSCB_Recovery

Definition This parameter indicates if the CBC accepts the recovery-indicationin Restart-Indication message.

Coding rules 0: No, 1: Yes

Mandatory rules shall be set to "No" when SMSCB_FEATURE_SET="FS1"can be changed only when SMSCB_STATE="inactive"


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 687 / 1278


5.2.476 (SMSCB_State) - (SMSCB_State)

HMI Name SMSCB_StateParameter Name

Logical Name SMSCB_State

Definition This flag indicates if the feature is activated or deactivated.

Coding rules 0: activated, 1: deactivated

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1




688 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.477 (Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2) - (STRIP_O5_CM2)

HMI Name Strip_Octet_5_In_CM2Parameter Name

Logical Name STRIP_O5_CM2

Definition This flag controls the format of the "Classmark 2" IE sent to the MSC.

Coding rules 0: no modification on "Classmark2" IE, 1: octet 5 of "Classmark2" IEis stripped out

Mandatory rules EN_SEND_CM3 and STRIP_O5_CM2 shall not be both set to 1 atthe same time.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment Default value depends on MSC type.The value indicated here is forimplementation purposes.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 689 / 1278


5.2.478 (SYNCHRONISED_HO) - (EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO)

HMI Name SYNCHRONISED_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables synchronous handovers betweensynchronized cells.


Mandatory rules EN_SYNCHRONISED_HO shall be set to disabled whenCELL_TYPE is equal to "Extended inner" or "Extended outer".


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




690 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.479 (T(conn est)) - (T(conn est))

HMI Name T(conn est)Parameter Name

Logical Name T(conn est)

Definition SCCP timer supervising the reception of Connection Confirmmessage.


Mandatory rules T(conn est) < T9105


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 10 127.5 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 691 / 1278


5.2.480 (T(iar)) - (T(iar))

HMI Name T(iar)Parameter Name

Logical Name T(iar)

Definition SCCP timer supervising the activity on SCCP connection.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Must be greater than T(ias) used by the MSCIt is recommended to configure T(iar) > (2 x T(ias) used by the MSC)+ 1 min

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 402 1530 1260




692 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.481 (T(ias)) - (T(ias))

HMI Name T(ias)Parameter Name

Logical Name T(ias)

Definition SCCP timer supervising the sending of Inactivity Test message.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Must be less than T(iar) used by the MSCIt is recommended to configure T(ias) < (T(iar) used by the MSC- 1 min) / 2

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 96 450 300




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 693 / 1278


5.2.482 (T(rel)) - (T(rel))

HMI Name T(rel)Parameter Name

Logical Name T(rel)

Definition SCCP timer supervising the reception of Release Completemessage.

Coding rules step size = 0.5sec, coded from 16 to 255, 16 == 8 sec, 255 == 127.5sec

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 8 127.5 15




694 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.483 (T(sst)) - (T(sst))

HMI Name T(sst)Parameter Name

Logical Name T(sst)

Definition SCCP delay between sending of consecutive Subsystem Status Testmessages.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules For BSC Evolution, ALU highly recommends setting this timer to 6seconds to improve the BSC robustness.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 6 1200 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 695 / 1278


5.2.484 (T_BIND_CNF) - (T_BIND_CNF)

HMI Name T_BIND_CNFParameter Name

Logical Name T_BIND_CNF

Definition Maximum waiting time to get a response to a CBSE-BIND primitive.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 10 300 30




696 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.485 (T_BURST) - (T_BURST)

HMI Name T_BURSTParameter Name

Logical Name T_BURST

Definition Delay between consecutive bursts of BLOCK or UNBLOCKmessages.

Coding rules step size =0.1 sec

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM < T1_short

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.1 25.5 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 697 / 1278


5.2.486 (T_HCP) - (T_HCP)

HMI Name T_HCPParameter Name

Logical Name T_HCP

Definition Time during which PING_PONG_HCP is applied after handover.

Coding rules step size= 1sec

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 0 240 0




698 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.487 (T_HO_REQD_LOST) - (T_HO_REQD_LOST)

HMI Name T_HO_REQD_LOSTParameter Name

Logical Name T_HO_REQD_LOST

Definition Supervision of the MSC response after sending of HANDOVERREQUIRED.


Mandatory rules T_HO_REQD_LOST > T7

Recommended rules T_HO_REQD_LOST value shall be greater than the maximum timefor external handover execution

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 6 120 30

External Comment Depends on MSC type



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 699 / 1278


5.2.488 (T_IA) - (T_IA)

HMI Name T_IAParameter Name

Logical Name T_IA

Definition Indicates the maximum time a CS IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENTmessage remains in the AGCH queue.


Mandatory rules T_IA<T3101


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 0 5 2.5




700 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.489 (T_INHIBIT_CPT) - (T_INHIBIT_CPT)

HMI Name T_INHIBIT_CPTParameter Name

Logical Name T_INHIBIT_CPT

Definition Time during which the HO Causes 14, 21, and 24 are inhibited.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 0 240 0

External Comment T_INHIBIT_CPT = 0 inhibits the anti ping-pong function.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 701 / 1278


5.2.490 (T_MS_CELL_REJ) - (T_MS_CELL_REJ)

HMI Name T_MS_CELL_REJParameter Name

Logical Name T_MS_CELL_REJ

Definition Delay where the cells the MS failed to handover, cannot be selectedas targets in subsequent handover attempts.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 20 5




702 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.491 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (BSC))

HMI Name T_PAG_CSParameter Name

Logical Name T_PAG_CS (BSC)

Definition This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message canremain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay onA and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface.


Mandatory rules Equal to T_PAG_CS (MFS)

Recommended rules T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 0 25.5 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 703 / 1278


5.2.492 (T_PAG_CS) - (T_PAG_CS (MFS))

HMI Name T_PAG_CSParameter Name

Logical Name T_PAG_CS (MFS)

Definition This timer indicates the maximum time a CS PAGING message canremain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delay onA and A-bis or Gs/Gb and A-bis interface.


Mandatory rules Equal to T_PAG_CS (BSC)

Recommended rules T_PAG_CS<T3113 (MSC timer)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 0 25.5 3




704 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.493 (T_QHO) - (T_qho)

HMI Name T_QHOParameter Name

Logical Name T_qho

Definition Maximum queuing time for Handover Requests.


Mandatory rules T_INTRF_L3 > Max (T11, T_qho, T11_FORCED)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 20 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 705 / 1278


5.2.494 (T_SDCCH_PC) - (T_SDCCH_PC)

HMI Name T_SDCCH_PCParameter Name

Logical Name T_SDCCH_PC

Definition Time during which power control on SDCCH is inhibited aftercompletion of the Immediate Assignment procedure.

Coding rules step size = 1 (2 x Samfr)

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T_SDCCH_PC >= SDCCH_COUNTER

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


2 x Samfr 0 31 5




706 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.495 (T1) - (T1_short)


Logical Name T1_short

Definition Supervision of the Blocking/Unblocking procedure.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T1_short > (31 x T_BURST) / B_NUM

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 10 25.5 16




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 707 / 1278


5.2.496 (T11) - (T11)


Logical Name T11

Definition Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests.

Coding rules step size = 1 s



Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 19 6




708 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.497 (T11_FORCED) - (T11_FORCED)

HMI Name T11_FORCEDParameter Name

Logical Name T11_FORCED

Definition Maximum queuing time for Assignment Requests where queuing isnot allowed by the MSC.




Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 0 19 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 709 / 1278


5.2.498 (T13) - (T13)


Logical Name T13

Definition Delay for acknowledgement of RESET received from MSC.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 15




710 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.499 (T17) - (T17)


Logical Name T17

Definition Period of time where a new OVERLOAD that is received from theMSC, is not processed after reception of a processed OVERLOAD.

Coding rules step size: 0.1 sec

Mandatory rules T17 < T18_overload


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 711 / 1278


5.2.500 (T18) - (T18)


Logical Name T18

Definition Delay between consecutive debarring actions after a BSS outage.

Coding rules Step size: 0.1 sec

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 50




712 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.501 (T18_OVERLOAD) - (T18_Overload)

HMI Name T18_OVERLOADParameter Name

Logical Name T18_Overload

Definition Delay between the latest MSC OVERLOAD message or DTCinternal overload detection and debarring action. Also delay betweenconsecutive debarring actions for overload procedure and Telecomglobal reset procedure.

Coding rules step size: 0.1 sec

Mandatory rules T18_OVERLOAD > T17


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 6553.5 50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 713 / 1278


5.2.502 (T19) - (T19)


Logical Name T19

Definition Supervision of the Reset Circuit procedure.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.1 25.5 10




714 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.503 (T20) - (T20)


Logical Name T20

Definition Supervision of Circuit Group Blocking procedure.

Coding rules step size=0.1 sec

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 10 25.5 16




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 715 / 1278


5.2.504 (T200 (BSC)) - (T200 (BSC))

HMI Name T200 (BSC)Parameter Name

Logical Name T200 (BSC)

Definition Supervision of acknowledgements.

Coding rules step size: 100ms; (1: 100ms, 2: 200ms, 3: 300ms, 4: 400ms, .. ., 10: 1000ms

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The recommended value for Abis via satellite is 1000 ms.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance A-bis link


ms 300 1000 300

External Comment The value of T200 (BSC) is driven by the associated Abis connectiontype.It can be changed indirectly from the OMC (through the change ofAbis connection type)The default value 300 ms corresponds to Abis terrestrial link.



716 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.505 (T200_TF) - (T200_TF)

HMI Name T200_TFParameter Name

Logical Name T200_TF

Definition Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH FR associated)SAPI 0.

Coding rules Step size = 20 msec

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent(very far to the 3GPP values):It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message.For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, butnot received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HOCMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call durationis artificially increased.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 200 5100 200

External Comment Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS callsestablished after modification.

When Repeated DL FACCH is used, 40msec are automaticallyadded by the BTS.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 717 / 1278


5.2.506 (T200_TH) - (T200_TH)

HMI Name T200_THParameter Name

Logical Name T200_TH

Definition Supervision of acknowledgements for FACCH (TCH HR associated)SAPI 0.

Coding rules step size = 20 msec.

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Values higher than 1000ms are not recommended by Alcatel-Lucent(very far to the 3GPP values):It will significantly increase the delay for retransmission of a message.For instance, if a HANDOVER COMMAND is sent to a given MS, butnot received, the MS will have to wait longer to get the repeated HOCMD, which may lead to call drop in the meantime.Moreover, it can increase congestion in the BSS, as the call durationis artificially increased.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 180 5100 180

External Comment Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately on new CS callsestablished after modification.

When Repeated DL FACCH is used, 40msec are automaticallyadded by the BTS.



718 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.507 (T3101) - (T3101)


Logical Name T3101

Definition Supervision of the Immediate Assignment procedure.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T3101 > 2s

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 0 25.5 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 719 / 1278


5.2.508 (T3103) - (T3103)


Logical Name T3103

Definition Supervision of the Internal Handover procedure.


Mandatory rules T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_D.T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_FR.T3103 > Ny1 x T3105_F_HR.T3103 > T3106_D.T3103 > T3106_F


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 25.5 16.5




720 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.509 (T3105D) - (T3105_D)

HMI Name T3105DParameter Name

Logical Name T3105_D

Definition Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATIONon SDCCH.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules T3105_D x Ny1 < T3103T3105_D x Ny1 < T9113

Recommended rules T3105_D x Ny1 > T3124T3105_D << T3124 (T3124 = 675 ms on SDCCH)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 200 220 200




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 721 / 1278


5.2.510 (T3105D_STOP) - (T3105_D_STOP)

HMI Name T3105D_STOPParameter Name

Logical Name T3105_D_STOP

Definition Criterion to stop T3105_D timer.

Coding rules 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception ofany correct L2 signalling frame

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




722 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.511 (T3105F_FR) - (T3105_F_FR)

HMI Name T3105F_FRParameter Name

Logical Name T3105_F_FR

Definition Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATIONon FACCH for FR channels.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T3103T3105_F_FR x Ny1 < T9113

Recommended rules T3105_F_FR x Ny1 > T3124T3105_F_FR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 20 250 50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 723 / 1278


5.2.512 (T3105F_HR) - (T3105_F_HR)

HMI Name T3105F_HRParameter Name

Logical Name T3105_F_HR

Definition Delay between consecutive repetitions of PHYSICAL INFORMATIONon FACCH for HR channels.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T3103T3105_F_HR x Ny1 < T9113

Recommended rules T3105_F_HR x Ny1 > T3124T3105_F_HR << T3124 (T3124 = 320 ms on TCH)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 20 250 100




724 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.513 (T3105F_STOP) - (T3105_F_STOP)

HMI Name T3105F_STOPParameter Name

Logical Name T3105_F_STOP

Definition Criterion to stop T3105_F timer.

Coding rules 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception ofany correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 725 / 1278


5.2.514 (T3106D) - (T3106_D)

HMI Name T3106DParameter Name

Logical Name T3106_D

Definition Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the targetcell in case of SDCCH synchronous handover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules T3106_D < T3103T3106_D < T9113


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 1100 1500 1200




726 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.515 (T3106D_STOP) - (T3106_D_STOP)

HMI Name T3106D_STOPParameter Name

Logical Name T3106_D_STOP

Definition Criterion to stop T3106_D timer.

Coding rules 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception ofany correct L2 signalling frame

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 727 / 1278


5.2.516 (T3106F) - (T3106_F)

HMI Name T3106FParameter Name

Logical Name T3106_F

Definition Supervision of the reception of valid frame from the MS on the targetcell in case of TCH synchronous handover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules T3106_F < T3103T3106_F < T9113


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


ms 500 1000 1000




728 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.517 (T3106F_STOP) - (T3106_F_STOP)

HMI Name T3106F_STOPParameter Name

Logical Name T3106_F_STOP

Definition Criterion to stop T3106_F timer.

Coding rules 0: stopped on reception of SABM frame, 1: stopped on reception ofany correct L2 signalling frame or of a correct traffic frame

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 729 / 1278


5.2.518 (T3107) - (T3107)


Logical Name T3107

Definition Supervision of the Assignment procedure.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 25.5 14




730 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.519 (T3109) - (T3109)


Logical Name T3109

Definition Supervision of the Channel Release procedure.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T3109 > RADIOLINK_TIMEOUT + 1s

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 35 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 731 / 1278


5.2.520 (T3111) - (T3111)


Logical Name T3111

Definition Delay of the RF Channel Release procedure.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T3111 > 2 x T200_D. T3111 > 2 x T200_TH. T3111 = T3110 (MS)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 2 0.5




732 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.521 (T3212) - (T3212 (BSC))



Definition This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutivePeriodic Location Update procedures.

Coding rules 0: no periodic location update

Mandatory rules Equal to T3212 (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


6 mn 0 255 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 733 / 1278


5.2.522 (T4) - (T4)


Logical Name T4

Definition Supervision of RESET message sent to the MSC.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 2 6553.5 3

External Comment T4 shall be set greater than T2 (timer in MSC).



734 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.523 (T7) - (T7)


Logical Name T7

Definition Timer controlling the repetition of HANDOVER REQUIRED.


Mandatory rules T7 < T_HO_REQD_LOST


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 20 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 735 / 1278


5.2.524 (T8) - (T8)


Logical Name T8

Definition Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the serving BSC.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 25.5 14




736 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.525 (T9104) - (T9104)


Logical Name T9104

Definition Supervision of the call clearing procedure when triggered by the BSC.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 25.5 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 737 / 1278


5.2.526 (T9105) - (T9105)


Logical Name T9105

Definition Supervision of the SCCP Connection procedure.


Mandatory rules T9105 > T(conn est)

Recommended rules T9105 > max T3210. T9105 > max T3220. T9105 > max T3230

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 11 6553,5 31




738 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.527 (T9112) - (T9112)


Logical Name T9112

Definition Supervision of the channel modification in the MS.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T9112 >= 15s. T9112 <= T9114. T9112 is inferior to the MSC timersupervising the Modify procedure.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.1 6553.5 15




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 739 / 1278


5.2.528 (T9113) - (T9113)


Logical Name T9113

Definition Supervision of the External Handover procedure in the target BSC.


Mandatory rules T9113 > T3105_D x Ny1. T9113 > T3105_F x Ny1. T9113 >T3106_D. T9113 > T3106_F


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 25.5 20




740 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.529 (TA_STAT) - (TA_STAT)

HMI Name TA_STATParameter Name

Logical Name TA_STAT

Definition Threshold on timing advance to define the cell limit used for RadioMeasurements Statistics.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


bper 0 63 8

External Comment 1 bper corresponds to about 550m



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 741 / 1278


5.2.530 (TCH load threshold for Auto AC) - (N_threshold)

HMI Name TCH load threshold for Auto ACParameter Name

Logical Name N_threshold

Definition Threshold on busy TCH timeslots percentage for automatic barringof access classes.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 100




742 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.531 (TEMPORARY_OFFSET) - (TEMPORARY_OFFSET)

HMI Name TEMPORARY_OFFSETParameter Name

Logical Name TEMPORARY_OFFSET

Definition Offset applied to C2 criterion for the duration of PENALTY_TIME.

Coding rules step size = 10dB. 0: 0dB, 1:10dB, 6: 60dB, 7: infinity

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 infinity 0

External Comment If the VGCS is licensed, the parameter is modifiable only via theprovisioning context of the OMC.

Single 0 dB (0)

Umbrella 0 dB (0)

Concentric 0 dB (0)


Microcell infinity (7)

Minicell infinity (7)


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 743 / 1278


5.2.532 (TFO HR when loaded) - (FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED)

HMI Name TFO HR when loadedParameter Name

Logical Name FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED

Definition Flag to control the establishment of TFO in Half Rate, when the cellis loaded and the call is currently allocated with an Half Rate codectype (HR or AMR-NB HR) for load reason.

Coding rules 0 : "TFO with Half Rate codec not forced",if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec,the BSC will propose to establish TFO with all the supported codectypes, including the Full Rate ones (except the FR AMR-WB codec).1 : "TFO with Half Rate codec only",if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec, itwill stay in Half Rate even in case of TFO mismatch situation (if TFOis not possible in Half Rate on remote side, TFO is not established).2 : "TFO with Half Rate codec preferred",if for load reasons the call is established with an Half Rate codec,the BSC will propose in a first step to establish TFO providing onlythe supported Half Rate codecs only. If TFO is not possible in HalfRate on remote side, the BSC will try to establish TFO with all thesupported codec types, including the Full Rate ones (except the FRAMR-WB codec), provided that EN_TFO_MATCH=1.

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If FORCE_TFO_HR_WHEN_LOADED=2, EN_TFO_MATCH shouldbe set to 1

Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 2 0

External Comment When the call is currently allocated with AMR-NB HR for load reasonand when TFO is possible for that call (TFO on AMR-NB supportedby the TC and configured in the cell), then the BSC automaticallybehaviors as "TFO with Half Rate codec only", and set the list of thesupported codec types according to the ADD_HR_IN_TFO_LISTparameter.



744 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.533 (THR_CCCH_LOAD) - (THR_CCCH_LOAD)

HMI Name THR_CCCH_LOADParameter Name

Logical Name THR_CCCH_LOAD

Definition Threshold triggering the sending of CCCH LOAD INDICATIONmessage.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 100 3000 500




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 745 / 1278


5.2.534 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1)

HMI Name THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1Parameter Name

Logical Name THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1

Definition Lower load threshold for allocation policy with HR or AMR-NB HRcodec type in a dual rate cell.


Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 &THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3

Recommended rules When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 value, it isrecommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell isgreater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1) /100*total number ofTCH in the cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 100



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

0 20 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

746 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.535 (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3)

HMI Name THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3Parameter Name

Logical Name THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3

Definition Lower load threshold for allocation policy with AMR-NB HR codectype and for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover (Cause 26 andCause 27) in a dual rate cell.

Coding rules Step size = 10%

Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 <= THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 &THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1

Recommended rules When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 value, it isrecommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell isgreater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3) /100*total number ofTCH in the cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 100



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

0 20 30 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40 40

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 747 / 1278


5.2.536 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1)

HMI Name THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1Parameter Name

Logical Name THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1

Definition Higher load threshold for allocation policy with HR or AMR-NB HRcodec type in a dual rate cell.


Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV1 &THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1>=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3

Recommended rules When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1 value, it isrecommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell isgreater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1) /100*total number ofTCH in the cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 100



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

748 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.537 (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) - (THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3)

HMI Name THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3Parameter Name

Logical Name THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3

Definition Higher load threshold for allocation policy with AMR-NB HR codectype and for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover (Cause 26 andCause 27) in a dual rate cell.


Mandatory rules THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 >= THR_FR_LOAD_L_SV3 &THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3<=THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV1

Recommended rules When choosing the THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3 value, it isrecommended to check that the number of DR TCH in the cell isgreater than (100 - THR_FR_LOAD_U_SV3) /100*total number ofTCH in the cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 100



Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70 70

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 749 / 1278


5.2.538 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH)

HMI Name THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGHParameter Name

Logical Name THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH

Definition Threshold for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover under high load(Cause 26 and Cause 27).


Mandatory rules THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




750 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.539 (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL) - (THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL)

HMI Name THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMALParameter Name

Logical Name THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL

Definition Threshold for AMR-NB channel adaptation handover under normalload (Cause 26 and Cause 27).


Mandatory rules THR_RXQUAL_CA_HIGH >= THR_RXQUAL_CA_NORMAL


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 751 / 1278


5.2.540 (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD) - (TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD)

HMI Name TRAFFIC_EV_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name TRAFFIC_EV_PERIOD

Definition Periodicity of traffic load update in resource allocation algorithms =N_TRAFFIC_LOAD x A_TRAFFIC_LOAD x TCH_INFO_PERIOD.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem OMC

Instance cell


sec 2 3264 120

External Comment The given default value corresponds to the value calculated by theOMC, based on the values of N_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which dependson the nb of TRX in the cell, not reflected by DLS default value),A_TRAFFIC_LOAD (which depends on the nb of TRX in the cell, notreflected by DLS default value), TCH_INFO_PERIOD.



752 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.541 (TRX zone) - (ZONE_TYPE)

HMI Name TRX zoneParameter Name

Logical Name ZONE_TYPE

Definition Determines which TRX(s) belong to the inner zone and which TRX(s)belong to the outer zone of a concentric cell.

Coding rules Coded as a 16 bits bitmap. Each bit specifies the zone thecorresponding TRX (if declared) belongs to. 0: Outer zone, 1: Innerzone.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Bitmap

SubSystem BSC

Instance TRX


None 0 65535 0


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric #


Microcell N/A

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 753 / 1278


5.2.542 (TRX_CIPH_CAP) - (TRX_CIPH_CAP)

HMI Name TRX_CIPH_CAPParameter Name

Logical Name TRX_CIPH_CAP

Definition Indicates the ciphering algorithms supported by the TRX in TDMmode and in IP mode.

Coding rules The first byte indicates the ciphering capability in TDM mode.The second byte indicates the ciphering capability in IP mode.Each byte is coded as a 8 bits bitmap. Each bit indicates ifcorresponding encryption algorithm is permitted.

Bit x=’0’ : encryption algorithm not supportedBit x=’1’ : encryption algorithm supported

bit 0 : A5/0 (no ciphering)bit 1 : A5/1.bit 2 : A5/2bit 3 : A5/3bit 4 : A5/4...bit 7 : A5/7.

Mandatory rules The possible values for each byte are :- A5/0 + A5/1- A5/0 + A5/1 +A5/3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Bitmap

SubSystem BSC

Instance TRX


None 0 65535 771

External Comment A5/2 is not supported by the BSS.Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here(A5/0 + A5/1 for both mode) is for implementation purposes.



754 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.543 (TSC) - (TSC)

HMI Name TSCParameter Name

Logical Name TSC

Definition Training Sequence Code for any (packet) channel except for BCCH,CCCH and CBCH


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0

External Comment Default value depends on configuration. The value indicated here isfor implementation purposes.

Two training sequence codes are used in Alcatel BSS:*) TSC for BCCH, CCCH and CBCH: the BSS sets the TSC to theO&M parameter BCC. This behaviour is compliant to 3GPP TS 05.02which states that for BCCH and CCCH, the TSC must be equal tothe BCC. In Alcatel BSS, for CBCH, the TSC is also set to BCC.**) TSC for any other (packet) channel: the BSS sets the TSC tothe O&M parameter TSC.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 755 / 1278


5.2.544 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (BSC))

HMI Name TX_INTEGERParameter Name

Logical Name Tx_integer (BSC)

Definition Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNELREQUEST.

Coding rules Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32,50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111

Mandatory rules Equal to Tx_integer (MFS)

Recommended rules When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, itis recommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF= 0TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1.

When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it isrecommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH.

The number of slots belonging to the MS’s RACH between 2successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawnrandomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in theset (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on theCCCH configuration as shown below:

1) for non combined CCCH:- Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 –> S = 55 RACH frames (i.e. 253.8 ms)- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 –> S = 76 RACH frames (i.e. 349.6 ms)- Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 –> S = 109 RACH frames (i.e. 501.4 ms)- Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 –> S = 163 RACH frames (i.e. 749.8 ms)Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 –> S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms)

2) for combined CCCH:- Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 –> S = 41 RACH frames (i.e. 357.5 ms)- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 –> S = 52 RACH frames (i.e. 453.4 ms)- Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 –> S = 58 RACH frames (i.e. 505.7 ms)- Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 –> S = 86 RACH frames (i.e. 749.9 ms)- Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 –> S = 115 RACH frames (i.e. 1002.8 ms)

Note:- In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACHframes per 51-multiframe- In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH framesper 51-multiframe.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

756 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Instance cell


None 3 50 32

External Comment When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF= 0TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 757 / 1278


5.2.545 (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO)

HMI Name U_RXLEV_DL_MCHOParameter Name

Logical Name U_RXLEV_DL_MCHO

Definition Downlink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover.

Coding rules coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -47


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A



Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



758 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.546 (U_RXLEV_DL_P) - (U_RXLEV_DL_P)

HMI Name U_RXLEV_DL_PParameter Name

Logical Name U_RXLEV_DL_P

Definition Upper downlink level threshold for power control.


Mandatory rules U_RXLEV_DL_P > L_RXLEV_DL_P

Recommended rules U_RXLEV_DL_P >= L_RXLEV_DL_P + 10 dB

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -75




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 759 / 1278


5.2.547 (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO) - (U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO)

HMI Name U_RXLEV_UL_MCHOParameter Name

Logical Name U_RXLEV_UL_MCHO

Definition Uplink level threshold for Microcell to Macrocell handover.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -47


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A



Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



760 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.548 (U_RXLEV_UL_P) - (U_RXLEV_UL_P)

HMI Name U_RXLEV_UL_PParameter Name

Logical Name U_RXLEV_UL_P

Definition Upper uplink level threshold for power control.

Coding rules coded over 6 bits :0: -110 dBm, 1: -109 dBm...63: -47 dBm

Mandatory rules U_RXLEV_UL_P > L_RXLEV_UL_P

Recommended rules U_RXLEV_UL_P >= L_RXLEV_UL_P + 10 dB

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -75


Single -85 dBm (25)







Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 761 / 1278


5.2.549 (U_RXQUAL_DL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_DL_P)

HMI Name U_RXQUAL_DL_PParameter Name

Logical Name U_RXQUAL_DL_P

Definition Upper downlink quality threshold for power control.


Mandatory rules U_RXQUAL_DL_P < L_RXQUAL_DL_P


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 1

External Comment Highest value is the worst quality



762 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.550 (U_RXQUAL_UL_P) - (U_RXQUAL_UL_P)

HMI Name U_RXQUAL_UL_PParameter Name

Logical Name U_RXQUAL_UL_P

Definition Upper uplink quality threshold for power control.


Mandatory rules U_RXQUAL_UL_P < L_RXQUAL_UL_P


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 1

External Comment Highest value is the worst quality



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 763 / 1278


5.2.551 (UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCE) - (U_TIME_ADVANCE)

HMI Name UPPER_TIMING_ADVANCEParameter Name

Logical Name U_TIME_ADVANCE

Definition Timing Advance threshold for distance handover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


bper 0 63 63

External Comment One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m

Single 35 km (63)

Umbrella 35 km (63)

Concentric 35 km (63)

Concentric Umbrella 35 km (63)

Microcell 1 km (2)

Minicell 35 km (63)

Extended inner cell 34.5 km (62)

Cell Type Dependent

Extended outer cell 35 km (63)


764 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.552 (VQ_AVERAGE) - (VQ_AVERAGE)

HMI Name VQ_AVERAGEParameter Name

Logical Name VQ_AVERAGE

Definition Average window size on measurements to obtain samples for VoiceQuality statistics.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


Samfr 0 128 6

External Comment Up to 16 instances of this parameter with different values can bedefined. This allows to define "RMS tempates" (see parameterRMS_template).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 765 / 1278


5.2.553 (VQ_BAD_RXFER) - (VQ_BAD_RXFER)

HMI Name VQ_BAD_RXFERParameter Name

Logical Name VQ_BAD_RXFER

Definition Radio bad FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for VoiceQuality statistics.

Coding rules coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, ..., 200 = 20%)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 20 3




766 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.554 (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_FER_THRESHOLD)

HMI Name VQ_FER_THRESHOLDParameter Name

Logical Name VQ_FER_THRESHOLD

Definition Radio FER threshold to detect calls with bad speech quality for VoiceQuality statistics.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 767 / 1278


5.2.555 (VQ_GOOD_RXFER) - (VQ_GOOD_RXFER)

HMI Name VQ_GOOD_RXFERParameter Name

Logical Name VQ_GOOD_RXFER

Definition Radio good FER threshold to specify bad quality samples for VoiceQuality statistics.

Coding rules coded 0 to 200, step size=0.1% (0= 0%, 1 = 0.1 %, ..., 200 = 20%)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 20 1




768 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.556 (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD) - (VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD)

HMI Name VQ_INTF_THRESHOLDParameter Name

Logical Name VQ_INTF_THRESHOLD

Definition Radio interference threshold to detect noisy calls for Voice Qualitystatistics.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


% 0 100 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 769 / 1278


5.2.557 (VQ_RXLEV) - (VQ_RXLEV)

HMI Name VQ_RXLEVParameter Name

Logical Name VQ_RXLEV

Definition Radio level threshold to specify bad quality samples for Voice Qualitystatistics.

Coding rules 0 = -110 dBm, 1 = -109 dBm, 62 = -48 dBm, 63 = -47 dBm, step= 1dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


dBm -110 -47 -95




770 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.558 (VQ_RXQUAL) - (VQ_RXQUAL)

HMI Name VQ_RXQUALParameter Name

Logical Name VQ_RXQUAL

Definition Radio quality threshold to specify bad quality samples for VoiceQuality statistics.

Coding rules step size=0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 7 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 771 / 1278


5.2.559 (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER) - (VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER)

HMI Name VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFERParameter Name

Logical Name VQ_RXQUAL_VS_RXFER

Definition Radio quality threshold to specify correlation between qualitysamples for Voice Quality statistics.

Coding rules step size=0.1 (1==0.1 ... 70==7)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 7 4




772 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.560 (W_LEV_HO) - (W_LEV_HO)

HMI Name W_LEV_HOParameter Name

Logical Name W_LEV_HO

Definition Weight applicable to level samples for handover when no DTX isapplied.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_LEV_HO + W_LEV_HO < 32


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 3 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 773 / 1278


5.2.561 (W_LEV_MCHO) - (W_LEV_MCHO)

HMI Name W_LEV_MCHOParameter Name

Logical Name W_LEV_MCHO

Definition Weight applicable to level samples for microcell handover when noDTX is applied.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_LEV_MCHO + W_LEV_MCHO < 16


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 3 1


Single N/A

Umbrella N/A

Concentric N/A


Microcell 1

Minicell N/A


Cell Type Dependent



774 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.562 (W_LEV_PC) - (W_LEV_PC)

HMI Name W_LEV_PCParameter Name

Logical Name W_LEV_PC

Definition Weight applicable to level samples for power control when no DTXis applied.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_LEV_PC + W_LEV_PC < 32


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 3 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 775 / 1278


5.2.563 (W_PBGT_HO) - (W_PBGT_HO)

HMI Name W_PBGT_HOParameter Name

Logical Name W_PBGT_HO

Definition Weight applicable to level samples for power budget when no DTXis applied.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_PBGT_HO + W_PBGT_HO < 32


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 3 1




776 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.564 (W_QUAL_CA) - (W_QUAL_CA)

HMI Name W_QUAL_CAParameter Name

Logical Name W_QUAL_CA

Definition Averaging weight applicable for full quality (Channel adaptation).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 3 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 777 / 1278


5.2.565 (W_QUAL_HO) - (W_QUAL_HO)

HMI Name W_QUAL_HOParameter Name

Logical Name W_QUAL_HO

Definition Weight applicable to quality samples for handover when no DTXis applied.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_QUAL_HO + W_QUAL_HO < 32


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 3 1




778 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.566 (W_QUAL_PC) - (W_QUAL_PC)

HMI Name W_QUAL_PCParameter Name

Logical Name W_QUAL_PC

Definition Weight applicable to quality samples for power control when no DTXis applied.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules A_QUAL_PC + W_QUAL_PC < 32


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 3 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 779 / 1278


5.2.567 (WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKING) - (MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING)

HMI Name WHITE_BOOK_INTERWORKINGParameter Name

Logical Name MTP3_WB_INTERWORKING

Definition This flag indicates if the BSC sends a Q.704 TRA message upon firstreception of SLTA from the MSC.

Coding rules 0 : TRA not sent upon first SLTA reception, 1 : TRA sent upon firstSLTA reception

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 0

External Comment - This flag is set to 1 for interworking with a "White Book" MSC. It isset to 0 for interworking with a "Blue Book" MSC.- Parameter change: after modification, a BSC restart procedureis needed. On going calls are not disrupted (as long as no newsignalling exchange is needed) but the new traffic is not acceptedduring that procedure.



780 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.568 (WI_CR) - (WI_CR)

HMI Name WI_CRParameter Name

Logical Name WI_CR

Definition Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "CallRe-establishment".

Coding rules 0: 0s, 1: 1s, ..., 254: 254s, 255: no IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENTREJECT message is sent.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 781 / 1278


5.2.569 (WI_EC) - (WI_EC)

HMI Name WI_ECParameter Name

Logical Name WI_EC

Definition Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Emergency call".


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 2




782 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.570 (WI_OC) - (WI_OC)

HMI Name WI_OCParameter Name

Logical Name WI_OC

Definition Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Originating call".


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 783 / 1278


5.2.571 (WI_OP) - (WI_OP)

HMI Name WI_OPParameter Name

Logical Name WI_OP

Definition Value of Wait Indication for Establishment cause = "Locationupdating" or "Other procedures which can be completed with anSDCCH".


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 255 5




784 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.2.572 (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_DL)

HMI Name ZONE_HO_HYST_DLParameter Name

Logical Name ZONE_HO_HYST_DL

Definition Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_DL_ZONE for outer to inner zonehandover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -40 40 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 785 / 1278


5.2.573 (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL) - (ZONE_HO_HYST_UL)

HMI Name ZONE_HO_HYST_ULParameter Name

Logical Name ZONE_HO_HYST_UL

Definition Hysteresis applied to RXLEV_UL_ZONE for outer to inner zonehandover.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -40 40 6




786 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


5.3 System (CST)

5.3.1 (Interference band 5 upper limit) - (INTFBD5)

HMI Name Interference band 5 upper limitParameter Name


Definition Upper limit of interference band 5.


Mandatory rules –


Category System (CST)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -47




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 787 / 1278


5.3.2 (SMSCB_Mode) - (SMSCB_Mode)

HMI Name SMSCB_ModeParameter Name

Logical Name SMSCB_Mode

Definition This parameter enables to select the mode of operation, eitherOMC-R or CBC.

Coding rules 0: OMC-R, 1: CBC

Mandatory rules –


Category System (CST)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1




788 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

6 GPRS Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 789 / 1278


6.1 Network (CDE)

6.1.1 (BSSGP_T3) - (bssgp_T3)

HMI Name BSSGP_T3Parameter Name

Logical Name bssgp_T3

Definition Timer used by MFS to wait for Suspend acknowledgement fromSGSN.

Coding rules 1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ... ; 10: 1 ; ... ; 100: 10

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 0.1 10 0.6




790 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.2 (BSSGP_T4) - (bssgp_T4)

HMI Name BSSGP_T4Parameter Name


Definition Timer used by MFS to wait for Resume acknowledgement fromSGSN.

Coding rules 1:0,1 ; 2: 0,2 ; ... ; 10: 1 ; ... ; 100: 10

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules BSSGP_T4 < T_GPRS_Resume/ (Resume_retries+1))


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 0.1 10 0.6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 791 / 1278


6.1.3 (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING) -(EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)

HMI Name EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTINGParameter Name

Logical Name EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING

Definition This flag enables / disables autonomous rerouting of DL LLC PDUs.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended UL TBFfeature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU reroutingfeature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)


Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0 1 1




792 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.4 (EN_CBL) - (EN_CBL)

HMI Name EN_CBLParameter Name

Logical Name EN_CBL

Definition This flag enables / disables CBL feature (Leaky BucketSynchronisation)


Mandatory rules –



Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 793 / 1278


6.1.5 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC)

HMI Name FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVCParameter Name

Logical Name FLOW_DIM_Safety_BVC

Definition Safety factor to size BVC_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlink flowcontrol, on Gb interface.


Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 100 20




794 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.6 (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS) - (FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS)

HMI Name FLOW_DIM_Safety_MSParameter Name

Logical Name FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS

Definition Safety factor to size default MS_Bucket_Size parameter, for downlinkflow control, on Gb interface.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules FLOW_DIM_Safety_MS should be set to a value corresponding tothe maximum multi-slot class of the MS present on the network


Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 10 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 795 / 1278


6.1.7 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF) -(GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF)

HMI Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFFParameter Name

Logical Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF

Definition Threshold to enter the first level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a givenGP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signallingmessage storage).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2 >GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XOFF >GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON



Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


% 0 100 70




796 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.8 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON) -(GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON)

HMI Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XONParameter Name

Logical Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_1_XON

Definition Threshold to exit the first level of GP(U) buffer congestion in a givenGP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGP signallingmessage storage).

Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


% 0 100 50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 797 / 1278


6.1.9 (GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2) -(GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2)

HMI Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2Parameter Name

Logical Name GPU_BUFFER_CONGESTION_THR_2

Definition Threshold defining the second level of GP(U) buffer congestion in agiven GP(U) (buffers used for LLC PDU storage and the BSCGPsignalling message storage).

Coding rules –




Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


% 0 100 90




798 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.10 (K_GSL (BSC)) - (K_GSL (BSC))

HMI Name K_GSL (BSC)Parameter Name

Logical Name K_GSL (BSC)

Definition Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:- K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links inall BSC of the MFS.- K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite linksin at least one BSC of the MFS.


Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 1 16 7




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 799 / 1278


6.1.11 (K_GSL (MFS)) - (K_GSL (MFS))

HMI Name K_GSL (MFS)Parameter Name

Logical Name K_GSL (MFS)

Definition Maximum number of outstanding I frames on a GSL link.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:- K_GSL = 7 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater terrestrial links inall BSC of the MFS.- K_GSL = 16 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite linksin at least one BSC of the MFS.


Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 32 7




800 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.12 (MAX_BLER) - (MAX_BLER)

HMI Name MAX_BLERParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_BLER

Definition Maximum mean BLER value that a TBF can possibly reach

Coding rules step size = 0,05

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0 0.95 0.35

External Comment The MAX_BLER value is used by RRM to evaluate the minimumnumber of GCHs necessary to support RT traffic on a TRX.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 801 / 1278


6.1.13 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC) -(N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC)

HMI Name N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODICParameter Name

Logical Name N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC

Definition Number of bytes above which a transition from "short data" to "longdata" MS transfer shall be periodically reattempted (only useful in therare cases where such a transition previously failed).

Coding rules step size = 100 bytes

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <=N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC


Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


byte 100 100000 10000

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- A transition from "short data" to "long data" MS transfer can only failin the rare cases where there is a too high number of TBFs on theTRX / in some very specific reallocation failure scenarios.A low value of N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC shouldbe avoided because it will tend to increase the CPU load of theMFS for a defence case which should be rare (if TRX and Abis/Atertransmission resources are properly dimensioned).



802 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.14 (N391) - (N391)

HMI Name N391Parameter Name

Logical Name N391

Definition Number of polling cycles before Frame Relay " full status enquiry"(see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 255 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 803 / 1278


6.1.15 (N392) - (N392)


Logical Name N392

Definition Error threshold (Frame Relay, see Q.933, Annex A).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time


Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 10 3




804 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.16 (N393) - (N393)


Logical Name N393

Definition Monitored error counts (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933 Annex A, A.7).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 10 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 805 / 1278


6.1.17 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC) -(NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC)

HMI Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSCParameter Name

Logical Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC

Definition In a G2 BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGP messagesqueued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requests are nolonger allowed to be sent on this GSL link.The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer"overflow.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC <NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 5 105 20

External Comment Applicable only to TDM mode.



806 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.18 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC) -(NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC)

HMI Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSCParameter Name

Logical Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC

Definition In an Evolution BSC, Xoff threshold (in terms of number of BSCGPmessages queued in the "GSL output buffer") above which channel requestsare no longer allowed to be sent on this GSL link.The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer"overflow.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC <NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 5 105 84




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 807 / 1278


6.1.19 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC) -(NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC)

HMI Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSCParameter Name

Logical Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC

Definition In a G2 BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number of BSCGPmessages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channel requestscan again be sent on this GSL link.The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer"overflow.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_G2_BSC <NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_G2_BSC



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 5 105 10




808 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.20 (NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC) -(NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC)

HMI Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSCParameter Name

Logical Name NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC

Definition In an Evolution BSC, Xon hysteresis threshold (in terms of number ofBSCGP messages queued in the "GSL output buffer") below which channelrequests can again be sent on this GSL link.The interest of those Xon/Xoff thresholds is to avoid "GSL output buffer"overflow.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XON_MX_BSC <NB_MSG_GSL_OUTPUT_BUFFER_XOFF_MX_BSC



Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 5 105 52

External Comment Applicable only to TDM mode



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 809 / 1278


6.1.21 (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN) - (NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN)

HMI Name NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGINParameter Name

Logical Name NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN

Definition For a PDCH, percentage of channel capacity (in terms of radioblock scheduling) which is exclusively reserved to NRT TBFs. Thatcapacity is not allowed to be allocated to a streaming TBF (RT PFC).


Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


% 0 100 7

External Comment In each direction (DL or UL), the minimum number of NRTTBFs which are possible (in all cases) to be established ona PDCH is equal to ((NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN/100) *(T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING/20ms)) rounded down to theclosest integer value. This minimum number of NRT TBFs isguaranteed even in case of RT PFC allocation on the PDCH.

The higher the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higherthe risks of rejecting RT PFC creation requests.The lower the value of NRT_GUARANTEED_MARGIN, the higherthe risks of rejecting NRT TBF establishment requests (signallingor data traffic).



810 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.22 (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER) - (PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER)

HMI Name PDU_LIFETIME_ORDERParameter Name

Logical Name PDU_LIFETIME_ORDER

Definition Authorize or inhibit DL LLC PDU ordering according to the remainingPDU lifetime.

Coding rules 0: ordering disabled, 1 : ordering enabled

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Should be set to "ordering disabled", when the MFS interfaces withan Ericsson SGSN or any SGSN modifying the PDU Lifetime valueduring data flows addressed to the same MS on the same LLC SAPIin a non-acceptable manner, otherwise should be set to "orderingenabled".


Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 811 / 1278


6.1.23 (S_BECN) - (S_BECN)

HMI Name S_BECNParameter Name

Logical Name S_BECN

Definition Number of consecutive frames with BECN bit before congestion isstated.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 255 8




812 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.24 (SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR) -(SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR)

HMI Name SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTORParameter Name

Logical Name SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR

Definition When computing the best candidate timeslot allocation for an NRTTBF, this factor enables to give a higher weight (PDCH capacity)to the already-established NRT TBFs having a higher schedulingpriority (combination of THP and of Precedence) than the TBF to beestablished or reallocated.This factor will tend to avoid piling up several TBFs with differentscheduling priorities on the same PDCHs, which would degrade thethroughput of the low-priority TBFs.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 10 2

External Comment The higher the value of T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING is, thehigher the value of SCHEDULING_PRIORITY_FACTOR shall be,in order to avoid degrading the throughput of the low-priority TBFsin a significant manner (if it is possible according to the availablePDCHs in the cell).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 813 / 1278


6.1.25 (T_ACK_WAIT) - (T_ACK_WAIT)

HMI Name T_ACK_WAITParameter Name

Logical Name T_ACK_WAIT

Definition Timer defining the maximum time to wait for an MS answer (i.e.Packet Control Ack or beginning of an UL TBF) to a networksolicitation sent on PACCH/DL when the MS is in PTM, or on PPCHwhen the MS is in PIM and non-DRX mode, or on main DCCH whenthe MS is in dedicated mode.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- T_ack_wait = 1200 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis andAter terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS.- T_ack_wait = 1700 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abissatellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS andAbis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM).- T_ack_wait = 2300 ms if GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS iscarried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in at leastone cell of the MFS and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for allthe corresponding BTS.


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 0.5 5 1.2




814 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.26 (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH) - (T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH)

HMI Name T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCHParameter Name

Logical Name T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH

Definition Timer defining the maximum time to wait for a MS answer (i.e. PacketControl Ack) to a network sollicitation sent on PPCH when the MS isin PIM and DRX mode.

Coding rules step size = 0.1 sec ; 0 = 0; 1 = 0.1;... ;100 = 10

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 2.5 s if GPRS traffic is carriedthrough Abis and Ater terrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,- T_ACK_WAIT_DRX_PCCCH = 3 s if GPRS traffic is carried eitherthrough Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cellof the MFS.


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 0 10 2.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 815 / 1278


6.1.27 (T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC) -(T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC)

HMI Name T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOCParameter Name

Logical Name T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC

Definition Timer value controlling the time duration between successiveresource reallocation attempts for candidate MSs (triggers T3 andT4).In a given cell, at each expiry of the T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOCtimer :- up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4reallocation attempts are performed,- up to N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4 T4reallocations are performed,- up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3 T3reallocation attempts are performed,- up to 2 x N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 T3reallocations are performed.

Coding rules step size = 1 sec; value 1 means 1 sec; value 2 means 2 sec, andso on

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all thecells of the BSS.This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs arereleased and reestablished again some moments later. This way,the T3 and T4 reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which arecurrently unused, but still established.


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 20 1

External Comment This parameter, together with the parametersN_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T3,N_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_SUCCESS_T3 andN_MAX_PERIODIC_REALLOC_ATTEMPT_T4, allows to :- to control the reactivity of the BSS with regards to T3 and T4reallocations,- and to control the extra CPU load generated by T3and T4 reallocation attempts (the lowest the value ofT_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC, the highest the generated CPUload).

816 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 817 / 1278


6.1.28 (T_GCH_release) - (Trelease)

HMI Name T_GCH_releaseParameter Name

Logical Name Trelease

Definition Supervision of GCH link release for 16k channel.


Mandatory rules Trelease > TdslTreq_pending > Trelease

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- Trelease = 500 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Aterterrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,- Trelease = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abissatellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS.


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


ms 200 1200 500

External Comment HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCHchannels. Former HMI name Trelease.



818 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.29 (T_GPRS_Resume) - (T_GPRS_Resume)

HMI Name T_GPRS_ResumeParameter Name

Logical Name T_GPRS_Resume

Definition Timer used by BSC, to wait for Resume acknowledgement fromSGSN before releasing the CS channel.

Coding rules step size = 0.1 sec, coded from 2 to 50

Mandatory rules T_GPRS_Resume < T3240 (10s)

Recommended rules T_GPRS_Resume > (BSSGP_T4 * (Resume_retries+1))

It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:- T_GPRS_RESUME = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Aterterrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,- T_GPRS_RESUME = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Atersatellite links in at least one cell of the MFS.


Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0.2 5 1

External Comment T3240 is a MS timer see 3GPP TS 24.008



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 819 / 1278


6.1.30 (T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING) -(T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING)

HMI Name T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULINGParameter Name

Logical Name T_MAX_FOR_TBF_SCHEDULING

Definition Maximum time between two scheduling of a given NRT TBF (eitherbetween two DL block requests for a NRT DL TBF, or between twoUL blocks received for a given NRT UL TBF).


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 0.12 0.3 0.3




820 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.31 (T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE) -(T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE)

HMI Name T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCEParameter Name

Logical Name T_MS_CONTEXT_FLUSH_PERSISTENCE

Definition This timer controls the duration during which a MS context is keptafter receipt of a FLUSH-LL.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


ms 0 5000 1000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 821 / 1278


6.1.32 (T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD) -(T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD)

HMI Name T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARDParameter Name

Logical Name T_REROUTING_REQUEST_GUARD

Definition This timer controls the maximum time during which a GPU waits forthe response to a rerouting request.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


ms 50 2000 500




822 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.33 (T_ul_2_ph_access) - (T_One_Block)

HMI Name T_ul_2_ph_accessParameter Name

Logical Name T_One_Block

Definition Timer to postpone the release of the M-EGCH link of a TRX, whenthe TRX does not support any (E)GPRS traffic, but a one uplink blockhas been allocated to a MS for a 2 phase access TBF establishmenton one of the RTSs of the TRX


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- T_one_block = 4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Aterterrestrial links in all the cells of the MFS,- T_one_block = 5 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abissatellite links or Ater satellite links in at least one cell of the MFS(round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0(TDM).- T_one_block = 6 s if GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carriedthrough satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in at least onecell of the MFS and and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for allthe corresponding BTS.


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 3 10 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 823 / 1278


6.1.34 (T_ul_access_max) - (T_ul_access_max)

HMI Name T_ul_access_maxParameter Name

Logical Name T_ul_access_max

Definition Timer to limit the duration of an UL TBF establishment.

Coding rules step size = 50 ms, 0 = 0 ms, 1 = 50 ms,... , 100 = 5000 ms

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The two following rules are recommended:i) The Time T_ul_access_max shall be longer than the duration of aradio allocation requested towards the BSC.ii) A too long value of T_ul_access_max may lead to reserveunnecessarily radio resources. It is recommended to setT_ul_access_max = T_repeat + 240 ms Round_Trip_Delay, wherethe T_Repeat is the maximum time between two successive packetchannel requests, 240 ms is a given margin. The value of T_Repeatdepends on the parameters S, TX_INT, and TX_INTEGER.

It is recommended to set this parameter as follows depending onwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFSthrough satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms):- T_ul_access_max = 1400 ms if GPRS traffic is carried through Abisand Ater terrestrial links in at least one cell of the MFS (and this isirrespective of the BSS transport mode: Abis_transport_mode(MFS)= TDM or IP or mixed mode),- T_ul_access_max = 1000 ms if GPRS traffic is carried throughAbis or Ater satellite links in all the cells of the MFS (and this isirrespective of the BSS transport mode: Abis_transport_mode(MFS)= TDM or IP or mixed mode).


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


ms 0 5000 1400




824 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.35 (T_WAIT_FLUSH) - (T_WAIT_FLUSH)

HMI Name T_WAIT_FLUSHParameter Name

Logical Name T_WAIT_FLUSH

Definition Timer monitoring the receipt of a Flush message or a GPRS suspendmessage further to the release of the on-going TBF(s)

Coding rules Step size : 0.5 sec1 coded 1; 1,5 coded 2; 2 coded 3; 2,5 coded 4; ....15,5 coded 30 and 16 coded 31

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The timer T_WAIT_FLUSH shall be set to the maximum cellreselection duration plus the time for the MS to switch back to the oldcell and send a Packet Cell Change Failure message.


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 16 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 825 / 1278


6.1.36 (T1) - (bssgp_T1)



Definition Guards the (un)blocking procedures.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 30 3




826 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.37 (T2) - (bssgp_T2)



Definition Guards the reset procedure.


Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 120 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 827 / 1278


6.1.38 (T200_GSL (MFS)) - (T200_GSL (MFS))

HMI Name T200_GSL (MFS)Parameter Name

Logical Name T200_GSL (MFS)

Definition Supervision of acknowledgements on the GSL link.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T_GSL_Ack (MFS) > T200_GSL (MFS) * (1 + N200_GSL (MFS))It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellite links:- T200_GSL(MFS) = 1 if GPRS traffic is carried through Aterterrestrial links in all BSC of the MFS.- T200_GSL(MFS) = 2 if GPRS traffic is carried through Ater satellitelinks in at least one BSC of the MFS.


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 2 1




828 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.39 (T391) - (T391)


Logical Name T391

Definition Link integrity verification polling timer (Frame Relay, see ITU Q.933,Annex A, A.7).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules N392*T391 is the value of the link failure detection time


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 5 30 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 829 / 1278


6.1.40 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL)

HMI Name TBF_GCH_RATIO_DLParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL

Definition Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum numberof DL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given numberof GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX).


Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0.1 5 1

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network(delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBFtraffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFsestablished on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) maybe too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. TheTBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allowto increase this limit, so to be more flexible.Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL andTBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and ULTBF numbers may be different.The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parametersare used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL(RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by loadtests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support theinduced extra CPU load).



830 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.41 (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL) - (TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL)

HMI Name TBF_GCH_RATIO_ULParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL

Definition Multiplication factor used in the computation of the maximum numberof UL TBFs allowed to be established on a TRX for a given numberof GCHs on this TRX (i.e. in the M-EGCH link of this TRX).


Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0.1 5 1

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- If there is a great amount of "short data" TBFs in the network(delayed DL or extended UL phases are longer than actual TBFtraffic phases), the existing TBF limitations (in number of TBFsestablished on a TRX for a given number of GCHs on this TRX) maybe too restrictive and lead to some TBF establishment failures. TheTBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters allowto increase this limit, so to be more flexible.Another justification for the TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL andTBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parameters is that the limits for DL and ULTBF numbers may be different.The TBF_GCH_RATIO_DL and TBF_GCH_RATIO_UL parametersare used in the formulae to compute Min_Nb_GCH_Best_Effort_XL(RRM-PRH). An increase of their value should be validated by loadtests (in order to check, among others, that the DSP can support theinduced extra CPU load).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 831 / 1278


6.1.42 (TnsBlock) - (Tns_block)

HMI Name TnsBlockParameter Name

Logical Name Tns_block

Definition Time-out to trigger the block/unblock procedure.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 120 3




832 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.43 (TnsReset) - (Tns_reset)

HMI Name TnsResetParameter Name

Logical Name Tns_reset

Definition Time-out for reset procedure.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 120 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 833 / 1278


6.1.44 (TnsTest) - (Tns_test)

HMI Name TnsTestParameter Name

Logical Name Tns_test

Definition Overall time-out to test an NS-VC.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


sec 1 60 15




834 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.1.45 (Treq_pending) - (Treq_pending)

HMI Name Treq_pendingParameter Name

Logical Name Treq_pending

Definition Maximum time during which a GCH establishment or release requestfrom PMU can be delayed in MEGCH layer.


Mandatory rules Treq_pending > Trelease+Tcorr

Recommended rules Treq_pending > Testab+Tcorr


Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


ms 1000 5200 2000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 835 / 1278


6.2 Site (CAE)

6.2.1 (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE) - (ACCESS_BURST_TYPE)

HMI Name ACCESS_BURST_TYPEParameter Name

Logical Name ACCESS_BURST_TYPE

Definition Format of the access burst used by (E)GPRS MSs whensending a PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST, a PACKET CONTROLACKNOWLEDGEMENT or a PTCCH/U message.

Coding rules 0 : 8 bits access bursts, 1 : 11 bits access bursts

Mandatory rules A couple of mate cells (Extended inner + extended outer) shall havethe same ACCESS_BURST_TYPE when they are PS capable.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




836 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.2 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD(BSC))

HMI Name Allowed priority classesParameter Name

Logical Name PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC)

Definition This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priorityclass is allowed to do Packet access.

Coding rules Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access not allowed in the cell;011:packet access allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet accessallowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access allowed for prioritylevel 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4

Mandatory rules Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 6 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 837 / 1278


6.2.3 (Allowed priority classes) - (PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD(MFS))

HMI Name Allowed priority classesParameter Name

Logical Name PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (MFS)

Definition This parameter indicates whether or not a MS of a certain priorityclass is allowed to do a Packet access.

Coding rules Coded over 3 bits . 000: packet access is not allowed in the cell;011:packet access is allowed for priority level 1; 100: packet accessis allowed for priority level 1 to 2; 101: packet access is allowed forpriority level 1 to 3; 110: packet access allowed for priority level 1 to 4

Mandatory rules Equal to PRIORITY_ACCESS_THRESHOLD (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 6 6

External Comment Persistence level parameter for priority (i) is meaningless if the RadioPriority (i) is not allowed



838 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.4 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (BSC))

HMI Name ALPHAParameter Name

Logical Name ALPHA (BSC)

Definition Alpha power control parameter.

Coding rules Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binarycoded : 0000, 0001, 0010 ... 1010

Mandatory rules Equal to ALPHA (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 839 / 1278


6.2.5 (ALPHA) - (ALPHA (MFS))

HMI Name ALPHAParameter Name

Logical Name ALPHA (MFS)

Definition Alpha power control parameter.

Coding rules Possible values are : 0.0 to 1.0 with step of 0.1respectively binarycoded : 0000, 0001, 0010 ... 1010

Mandatory rules Equal to ALPHA (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




840 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.6 (Ater_Usage_Threshold) - (Ater_Usage_Threshold)

HMI Name Ater_Usage_ThresholdParameter Name

Logical Name Ater_Usage_Threshold

Definition Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above whichthe Ater usage is said "high".

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherentwith a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching thesaturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the samemoment in the GPU).Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usagecan be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it willlimit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU).For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for theBSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data<= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons,"short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to highAter usage optimizations.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


% 1 100 70

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- When the Ater usage is "high", theGCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage is applied,whereas when the Ater usage is "normal" (i.e. percentage of usedAter nibbles is below the threshold), no GCH reduction factor isapplied.

Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBFare not disrupted. Change applied only on new TBF establishedafter modification.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 841 / 1278


6.2.7 (Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data) -(Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data)

HMI Name Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_DataParameter Name

Logical Name Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data

Definition Threshold (percentage of used Ater nibbles, in a GPU) above whichthe Ater usage is optimized for "short data" MS transfers.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100% (100%meaning that there is no Ater usage optimization for "short data"MS transfers), then it is recommended to set it to 30%, except if thedrawbacks of another value (as explained in the external comments)are deemed acceptable.

For all the Ater_Usage_Threshold values being defined for theBSSs handled by the MFS, Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data<= Ater_Usage_Threshold 30%. Indeed, for consistency reasons,"short data" MS transfer optimizations should come prior to high Aterusage optimizations.

If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in theGPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100%is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY andT_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


% 0 100 100

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- Setting Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data to 100% means thatthere is no Ater usage optimization for "short data" MS transfers.If Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data is not set to 100%:- the higher the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the fewerping time degradations and data transfer delays will be experienced,- the lower the Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data value, the moreaccurate the Ater consumption in the GPU will be (i.e. potentialwastes of Ater resources will be minimized in the GPU).

Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on going TBFare not disrupted. Change applied only on new TBF establishedafter modification.

842 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 843 / 1278


6.2.8 (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY) - (BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY)

HMI Name BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name BEST_EFFORT_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined Best EffortPacket Flow Context, and for all MS traffic without PFC

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 12

External Comment Default value corresponds to the priority for interactive THP3.The minimum value (the highest priority) corresponds to one prioritylevel below the streaming class.



844 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.9 (BS_AG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS))

HMI Name BS_AG_BLKS_RESParameter Name

Logical Name BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS)

Definition Number of CCCH blocks reserved for the access grant channel(AGCH), broadcast on the PBCCH for CS service establishment.

Coding rules coded on 3 bits (000 : 0, ...111 : 7)

Mandatory rules -BS_AG_BLKS_RES (MFS) = BS_AG_BLKS_RES (BSC) for a givencell-when CCCH_CONF=0 and CBCH is configured in the cell,BS_AG_BLKS_RES>0- when CCCH_CONF=2, max value of BS_AG_BLKS_RES is 7 andBS_AG_BLKS_RES must be > 0 if CBCH is configured in the cell.-When EN_VGCS is disabled :. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >= 1-When EN_VGCS is enabled :. if BCCH_EXT = false, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >=NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS. if BCCH_EXT = true, then BS_AG_BLKS_RES >NUMBER_NCH_BLOCKS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 7 4

External Comment - Maximum and Default values given for CCCH_CONF=0- For CCCH_CONF=1, max=2, def=1- Parameter change:no impact on the telecom service, on going traffic is not disrupted.But any modification impacts Paging (paging queues are reset andpaging is suspended until the reconfiguration is completed).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 845 / 1278


6.2.10 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (BSC))

HMI Name BS_CV_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name BS_CV_MAX (BSC)

Definition Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) bythe MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered.One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCHbefore the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed.

Coding rules Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111).

Mandatory rules Equal to BS_CV_MAX (MFS)

Recommended rules BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" roundtrip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledgedblocks and minimise window-stalled situations.If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplinkretransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed.It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Aterterrestrial links in the serving cell,- BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abissatellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 1 15 9

External Comment Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release ofUL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for agiven RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releasesand reestablishments.



846 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.11 (BS_CV_MAX) - (BS_CV_MAX (MFS))

HMI Name BS_CV_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name BS_CV_MAX (MFS)

Definition Number of remaining RLC data blocks sent (per assigned PDCH) bythe MS, below which the Count Down procedure is entered.One third of the number of RLC data blocks per assigned PDCHbefore the MS checks if the resolution contention has failed.

Coding rules Coded on 4 bits (1==0001, 2 == 0010 .. 15 == 1111).

Mandatory rules Equal to BS_CV_MAX (BSC)

Recommended rules BS_CV_MAX should be set to a value equal to the "minimum" roundtrip delay to optimise the uplink re-transmission of non-acknowledgedblocks and minimise window-stalled situations.If BS_CV_MAX is set greater than round-trip-delay, uplinkretransmissions of unacknowledged blocks may be delayed.It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- BS_CV_MAX = 9 if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Aterterrestrial links in the serving cell,- BS_CV_MAX = 15 if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abissatellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 15 9

External Comment Used by the MS to start the countdown value process (release ofUL TBF) or to consider acknowledgement messages as valid for agiven RLC data block. Lower values avoid too many TBF releasesand reestablishments.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 847 / 1278


6.2.12 (BS_PA_MFRMS) - (BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS))

HMI Name BS_PA_MFRMSParameter Name

Logical Name BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS)

Definition Number of 51 frame multiframes between consecutive occurrencesof a Paging Group, broadcast on the PBCCH for the CS serviceestablishment.

Coding rules coded on 3 bits (000 : 2, ... 111: 9)

Mandatory rules BS_PA_MFRMS (BSC) = BS_PA_MFRMS (MFS) for a given cell


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 2 9 5




848 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.13 (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES) - (BS_PAG_BLKS_RES)

HMI Name BS_PAG_BLKS_RESParameter Name

Logical Name BS_PAG_BLKS_RES

Definition Number of blocks allocated to the PAGCH or PDTCH or PACCH per52 multiframe.

Coding rules coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, ..., 1010: 10)The codepoints 0000: 0, 1011: 11 and 1100: 12 are not supportedby the ALCATEL BSS.

Mandatory rules BS_PAG_BLKS_RES < 12 BS_PBCCH_BLKS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 10 2

External Comment According to 3GPP TS 05.02, the number of paging blocks "available"on one PCCCH =(12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES - BS_PBCCH_BLKS) * 64. In order forthe network to be able to page GPRS-attached Mobile Stations whenPCCCH is present in the cell, there shall be at least one radio blockwhere paging can occur. This requires (12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES -BS_PBCCH_BLKS) to be strictly greater than 0.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 849 / 1278


6.2.14 (BS_PBCCH_BLKS) - (BS_PBCCH_BLKS)

HMI Name BS_PBCCH_BLKSParameter Name

Logical Name BS_PBCCH_BLKS

Definition Number of blocks allocated to the PBCCH per 52 multiframe.

Coding rules coded on 2 bits : 00=Block B0 used for PBCCH, 01=Block B0, B6used for PBCCH, 10=Block B0, B6, B3 used for PBCCH, 11=BlockB0, B6, B3, B9 used for PBCCH

Mandatory rules BS_PBCCH_BLKS < 12 - BS_PAG_BLKS_RES


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 4 4




850 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.15 (BS_PRACH_BLKS_MIN) - (BS_PRACH_BLKS)

HMI Name BS_PRACH_BLKS_MINParameter Name

Logical Name BS_PRACH_BLKS

Definition Number of blocks statically allocated to the PRACH per 52 multiframeon each MPDCH.

Coding rules coded on 4 bits (0001: 1, .., 1000: 8)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 8 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 851 / 1278


6.2.16 (BS_TXPWR_MAX) - (BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS))


HMI Name BS_TXPWR_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name BS_TXPWR_MAX (MFS)

Definition This parameter defines the power reduction relative to the attenuatedmaximum GMSK output power of the BTS.It is always set to 0 by the OMC.A finer power attenuation, BS_TXPWR_ATTENUATION defined instep of 0.1dB, is managed instead.

Coding rules step size = 2dB0 0 0 0 = 0 dB,0 0 0 1 = -2 dB,0 0 1 0 = -4 dB,..., 1 1 1 1 = -30 dB

Mandatory rules Equal to BS_TXPWR_MAX (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dB -30 0 0




852 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.17 (BVCI) - (PTP_BVCI)

HMI Name BVCIParameter Name

Logical Name PTP_BVCI

Definition PTP BVCI value.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 2 65535 #




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 853 / 1278


6.2.18 (C31_HYST) - (C31_HYST)

HMI Name C31_HYSTParameter Name

Logical Name C31_HYST

Definition Determines whether an additional cell hysteresis shallbe applied to the C31 criterion. The hysteresis isGPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS (for NC0 mode).

Coding rules 0 : no, 1 : yes

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




854 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.19 (C32_QUAL) - (C32_QUAL)

HMI Name C32_QUALParameter Name

Logical Name C32_QUAL

Definition Flag indicating an exception rule for GPRS_RESELECT_OFFSETin NC0 mode.

Coding rules 0=NO, 1=YES

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 855 / 1278


6.2.20 (Capacity) - (ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC))

HMI Name CapacityParameter Name

Logical Name ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC)

Definition Physical access rate of the Frame Relay bearer channel.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC (OMC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem OMC

Instance BC


kbit/s 64 1984 64




856 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.21 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) - (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS))


Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS)



Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (MFS) = CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dB 0 126 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 857 / 1278


6.2.22 (CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET) -(CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS))


Logical Name CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS)



Mandatory rules CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET(n)(MFS) =CELL_RESELECT_OFFSET (n)(BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dB 0 126 0




858 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.23 (CI) - (CI (MFS))


Logical Name CI (MFS)

Definition Cell Identity.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to CI (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 65535 65535




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 859 / 1278


6.2.24 (CI) - (CI(n) (MFS))


Logical Name CI(n) (MFS)

Definition Cell Identity of adjacent cell.

Coding rules Values 0..65535 correspond to the standard CI-value.

Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time.Equal to CI(n)(BSC).


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 65535 65535




860 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.25 (Commited Burst Size) - (CBS)

HMI Name Commited Burst SizeParameter Name

Logical Name CBS

Definition Commited Burst Size.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


kbyte 0 248 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 861 / 1278


6.2.26 (Committed Information Rate) - (CIR)

HMI Name Committed Information RateParameter Name

Logical Name CIR

Definition Committed Information Rate.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules CIR=0 when "direct access" is used, CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


kbit/s 0 1984 0




862 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.27 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT)

HMI Name CS_AVG_PERIOD_LTParameter Name

Logical Name CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT

Definition "Forgetting time" in the long term averaging of channel qualitymeasurements in the GPRS link Adaptation: measurements whichare older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_LT are negligible in the average ofchannel quality measurements.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.02 5 2

External Comment Parameter change: any modification impacts the telecom PS service.The on-going PS traffic of the BSS is broken and no new traffic isaccepted until the related GP/GPU(s) restarted.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 863 / 1278


6.2.28 (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST) - (CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST)

HMI Name CS_AVG_PERIOD_STParameter Name

Logical Name CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST

Definition "Forgetting time" in the short term averaging of channel qualitymeasurements in the GPRS link adaptation: measurements whichare older than CS_AVG_PERIOD_ST are negligible in the average ofchannel quality measurements.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.02 5 0.32




864 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.29 (CS_BLER_DL_3_4) - (CS_BLER_DL_3_4)

HMI Name CS_BLER_DL_3_4Parameter Name

Logical Name CS_BLER_DL_3_4

Definition CS3 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the downlink direction whenthe SIR measurements are not reported by the MS


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


% 0 100 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 865 / 1278


6.2.30 (CS_BLER_DL_4_3) - (CS_BLER_DL_4_3)

HMI Name CS_BLER_DL_4_3Parameter Name

Logical Name CS_BLER_DL_4_3

Definition CS4 BLER threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS4 to CS3 in the downlink direction whenthe SIR measurements are not reported by the MS.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


% 0 100 15




866 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.31 (CS_HST_DL_LT) - (CS_HST_DL_LT)

HMI Name CS_HST_DL_LTParameter Name

Logical Name CS_HST_DL_LT

Definition Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the downlinkradio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 6 0.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 867 / 1278


6.2.32 (CS_HST_DL_ST) - (CS_HST_DL_ST)

HMI Name CS_HST_DL_STParameter Name

Logical Name CS_HST_DL_ST

Definition Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in thedownlink radio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 6 1.5




868 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.33 (CS_HST_UL_LT) - (CS_HST_UL_LT)

HMI Name CS_HST_UL_LTParameter Name

Logical Name CS_HST_UL_LT

Definition Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_LT thresholds used in the uplinkradio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 6 0.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 869 / 1278


6.2.34 (CS_HST_UL_ST) - (CS_HST_UL_ST)

HMI Name CS_HST_UL_STParameter Name

Logical Name CS_HST_UL_ST

Definition Hysteresis value for AV_RXQUAL_ST thresholds used in the uplinkradio link supervision to change the TBF coding scheme.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 6 1.5




870 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.35 (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)

HMI Name CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD

Definition Maximum transfer inactivity time to reuse the previous (Modulationand) Coding Scheme. This applies in case of transfer resumptionduring inactive TBF phase (delayed downlink TBF mode / extendeduplink TBF mode) and in case of uplink TBF establishment onPACCH while extended uplink TBF mode is not used (with someadditional restrictions).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 0 5000 680

External Comment This parameter applies to both GPRS and EGPRS TBFs.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 871 / 1278


6.2.36 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK)

HMI Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_ACK

Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction whenthe RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on ahopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 6




872 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.37 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK)

HMI Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_FH_NACK

Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction whenthe RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on ahopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 873 / 1278


6.2.38 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK)

HMI Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_ACK

Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction whenthe RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on anon-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 5




874 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.39 (CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK) -(CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK)

HMI Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_QUAL_DL_1_2_NFH_NACK

Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the downlink direction whenthe RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on anon-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 875 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 4




876 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 877 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 3.5




878 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 879 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0.5




880 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 881 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0.5




882 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 883 / 1278


6.2.48 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK)

HMI Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_ACK

Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction whenthe RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on ahopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 6




884 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.49 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK)

HMI Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_FH_NACK

Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction whenthe RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on ahopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 885 / 1278


6.2.50 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK) - (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK)

HMI Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_ACK

Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction whenthe RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on anon-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 5




886 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.51 (CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK) -(CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK)

HMI Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_QUAL_UL_1_2_NFH_NACK

Definition RXQUAL threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to changethe Coding Scheme from CS1 to CS2 in the uplink direction whenthe RLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on anon-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 887 / 1278





Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change theCoding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when theRLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hoppingTRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 4




888 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change theCoding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when theRLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on ahopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 889 / 1278





Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change theCoding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction whenthe RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on anon-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 3.5




890 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change theCoding Scheme from CS2 to CS3 in the uplink direction when theRLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on anon-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 891 / 1278





Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change theCoding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when theRLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on a hoppingTRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0.5




892 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change theCoding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when theRLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on ahopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 893 / 1278





Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change theCoding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction whenthe RLC mode is acknowledged and the TBF is established on anon-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0.5




894 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Threshold used in the link adaptation algorithms to change theCoding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in the uplink direction when theRLC mode is unacknowledged and the TBF is established on anon-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 895 / 1278


6.2.60 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK)

HMI Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_ACK

Definition Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptationalgorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in thedownlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and theTBF is established on a hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 15 14




896 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.61 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK)

HMI Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_FH_NACK

Definition Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptationalgorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in thedownlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and theTBF is established on a hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 15 15




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 897 / 1278


6.2.62 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK)

HMI Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_ACK

Definition Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptationalgorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in thedownlink direction when the RLC mode is acknowledged and theTBF is established on a non-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 15 13




898 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.63 (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK) - (CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK)

HMI Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACKParameter Name

Logical Name CS_SIR_DL_3_4_NFH_NACK

Definition Signal to Interference Ratio threshold used in the link adaptationalgorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS3 to CS4 in thedownlink direction when the RLC mode is unacknowledged and theTBF is established on a non-hopping TRX.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 15 15




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 899 / 1278


6.2.64 (CS_SIR_HST_DL) - (CS_SIR_HST_DL)

HMI Name CS_SIR_HST_DLParameter Name

Logical Name CS_SIR_HST_DL

Definition Signal to Interference Ratio hysteresis used in the link adaptationalgorithms to change the Coding Scheme from CS4 to CS3 in thedownlink direction.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 15 1




900 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.65 (Data Link Connection Identifier) - (DLCI)

HMI Name Data Link Connection IdentifierParameter Name

Logical Name DLCI

Definition Data Link Connection Identifier, corresponds to a PVC identifier, seeQ.922 Annex A, Table 1.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


None 16 991 None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 901 / 1278


6.2.66 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC))

HMI Name DRX_TIMER_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC)

Definition Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX modeafter packet transfer mode.

Coding rules Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectivelybinary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATELBSS.

Mandatory rules Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 0 4 2




902 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.67 (DRX_TIMER_MAX) - (DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS))

HMI Name DRX_TIMER_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name DRX_TIMER_MAX (MFS)

Definition Maximum value allowed for the MS to request for non-DRX modeafter packet transfer mode.

Coding rules Radio coding :Possible values : 0, 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64 respectivelybinary coded as 000, 001, ..., 111ONLY THE VALUES 0, 1, 2 AND 4 ARE POSSIBLE in ALCATELBSS.

Mandatory rules Equal to DRX_TIMER_MAX (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0 4 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 903 / 1278


6.2.68 (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION) -(EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC))

HMI Name EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC)

Definition Enables/disables the CS paging coordination managed in the BSSfor MS in Packet Transfer Mode.


Mandatory rules - EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC) =EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS)- can be enabled only if (network_operation_mode <> NMO I) and(round_trip_delay < 500 msec for all the cells of the BSS)

Recommended rules - if EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION is set to enabled, it is highlyrecommended to set EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE to enabled.- if EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highlyrecommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS,either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMOI) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled"(network_operation_mode <> NMO I).- if a BSC is connected to a MFS but GPRS is disabled (EN_GPRS= false) for any cells of the BSS, it is recommended to setEN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to disabled for that BSS.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment The support of paging coordination in the BSS is not compatible withthe "GPRS through satellite connection on Abis or Ater interface"feature.



904 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.69 (EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION) -(EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS))

HMI Name EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS)

Definition Enables/disables the CS paging coordination managed in the BSSfor MS in Packet Transfer Mode.


Mandatory rules - EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (MFS) =EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION (BSC)- can be enabled only if (network_operation_mode <> NMO I) and(round_trip_delay < 500 msec for all the cells of the BSS)

Recommended rules - if EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION is set to enabled, it is highlyrecommended to set EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE to enabled.- if EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highlyrecommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS,either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMOI) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled"(network_operation_mode <> NMO I).- if a BSC is connected to a MFS but GPRS is disabled (EN_GPRS= false) for any cells of the BSS, it is recommended to setEN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to disabled for that BSS.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment The support of paging coordination in the BSS is not compatible withthe "GPRS through satellite connection on Abis or Ater interface"feature.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 905 / 1278


6.2.70 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK)

HMI Name EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACKParameter Name

Logical Name EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK

Definition Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC acknowledged mode.

Coding rules 0: Disable; 1: Enable

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If EN_STREAMING = 1 then it is recommended to setEN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK to "TRUE" in order to activate the linkadaptation mechanism so that the (M)CS can reach a suitable levelregarding the level of the configured Rmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise,the streaming PFCs can be downgraded to the Default Best EffortABQP because the negotiated GBR cannot be reached on the radiointerface.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




906 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.71 (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK) - (EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK)

HMI Name EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACKParameter Name

Logical Name EN_CS_ADAPTATION_NACK

Definition Enables / disables the link adaptation in RLC unacknowledged

Coding rules 0: Disable; 1: Enable

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 907 / 1278


6.2.72 (EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING) -(EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING)

HMI Name EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTINGParameter Name

Logical Name EN_DL_LLC_PDU_REROUTING

Definition This flag enables / disables rerouting of DL LLC PDUs.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment This parameter locks only the rerouting part of the feature. It has noeffect on the securisation part.This parameter applies to both, intra-NSE and inter-NSE cell change.



908 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.73 (EN_EGPRS) - (EN_EGPRS)

HMI Name EN_EGPRSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_EGPRS

Definition Enables/Disables EGPRS traffic in the cell.

Coding rules 0: Disable, 1: Enable

Mandatory rules EN_EGPRS = enable only if MAX_PDCH > 0.

Recommended rules If EN_EGPRS is set to ’enable’, Alcatel recommend to set theparameter PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX to ’0’.In case of extended cell, Alcatel recommend to set the same value inboth, inner and outer, cells.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment From system point of view, when EN_EGPRS = ’Enable’, the highestMCS allowed on the TRX is defined by the current size of theM-EGCH link of the TRX and by the MAX_EGPRS_MCS value.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 909 / 1278


6.2.74 (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) - (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF)

HMI Name EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBFParameter Name

Logical Name EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF

Definition Flag to disable/enable the extended TBF mode feature on the uplink(without or with allowing the MS not to answer to a USF receivedwhile in Extended UL TBF mode).

Coding rules 0: Extended UL TBF mode (EUTM) is not used1: EUTM is used2: I-EUTM is used (improved EUTM mode)

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules -It is recommended not to activate simultaneously extended ULTBF feature (EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF) and the DL PDU reroutingfeature (EN_AUTONOMOUS_REROUTING)- if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled and if RA capability updateis supported by SGSN, then the parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATEmust be enabled.The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only ifthe parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 2 0

External Comment I-EUTM (improved EUTM) allow MS in EUTM mode to not answer toa USF.In I-EUTM mode, N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT andIEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD parameters can be used totune the radio link monitoring.



910 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.75 (EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS) -(EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS)

HMI Name EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS

Definition This flag indicates whether or not one Slave PDCH is available for(E)GPRS traffic in the cell (fast initial PS access feature).In an Evolium BTS, that corresponds to a PDCH being able tosupport incoming (E)GPRS traffic, that PDCH being located on anestablished TRX (i.e. the TRX owns an M-EGCH link)

Coding rules 0: disabled,1: enabled

Mandatory rules - MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH ifEN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;- MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH ifEN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.- If GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFSthrough satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), andAbis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BTS, thenEN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS must be equal to enabled.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment Better performances for service access time will be obtained whenthis parameter is set to enabled, but one PDCH will always beestablished in the cell. A compromise has to be made by the operatorbetween performance gain and the cost of radio and terrestrialresources. This compromise becomes of higher importance incase of a cell connected through a satellite link due to the higherGPRS access time with satellite links, but also the higher cost oftransmission links.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 911 / 1278


6.2.76 (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) -(EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)

HMI Name EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDEDParameter Name

Logical Name EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED

Definition Flag to disable/enable the normal fast scheduling mode for the uplinkTBFs in extended mode


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 1

External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF isenabled.



912 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.77 (EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED) -(EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED)

HMI Name EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDEDParameter Name

Logical Name EN_FULL_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDED

Definition Flag to enable/disable the full fast scheduling mode for uplink TBFsin EUTM.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 1

External Comment - The full fast USF scheduling can be enabled /disabled independentlyon the normal fast USF scheduling (EN_FAST_USF_UL_EXTENDEDparameter)- The parameter is relevant only if EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF isenabled



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 913 / 1278


6.2.78 (EN_FULL_IR_DL) - (EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell)

HMI Name EN_FULL_IR_DLParameter Name

Logical Name EN_FULL_IR_DL_per_cell

Definition Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the downlink TBF in the cell.

Coding rules 0: Disable the "full" IR, so : Incremental Redundancy withresegmentation allowed in DL,1: Enable the "full" IR, so, Incremental Redundancy withoutresegmentation in DL

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules To allow the best throughput in DL, it is strongly recommended to setthis parameter to 0 i.e. to not forbid the resegmentation.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




914 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.79 (EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33) -(EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33)

HMI Name EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33Parameter Name

Logical Name EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33

Definition Enables the support of (E)GPRS multislot class 30-33.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment Support of DTM (E)GPRS multislot classes 31 to 33 is possible onlyif EN_DTM = 1 and EN_MULTISLOT_CLASS_30_33 = 1. Supportof configurations requiring EDA is possible only if EN_EDA = 1 (andALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION = 1 in case of DTM).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 915 / 1278


6.2.80 (EN_NACC) - (EN_NACC)

HMI Name EN_NACCParameter Name

Logical Name EN_NACC

Definition Enables the Network Assisted Cell Change feature.

Coding rules 0: disabled; 1:enabled

Mandatory rules Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msecWhen cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", thenEN_NACC = 0


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




916 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.81 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR) - (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR)

HMI Name EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIRParameter Name

Logical Name EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR

Definition Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections aresystematically triggered from the serving cell.

Coding rules 0: Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered1: Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematicallytriggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it is upto the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection causeis always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet MeasurementReport message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 canbe always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to ’-47 dBm(Always)’.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which istriggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the servingcell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirectionsis to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carryPS traffic (for instance a macro cell).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 917 / 1278


6.2.82 (EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)) -(EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n))

HMI Name EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)Parameter Name

Logical Name EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR(n)

Definition Indicates whether or not outgoing GPRS redirections aresystematically triggered from the serving cell.

Coding rules 0: Disable Outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggered1: Enable Outgoing GPRS redirections are systematically triggered

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematicallytriggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it is upto the operator to ensure that at least one NC cell reselection causeis always triggered upon receipt of the first Packet MeasurementReport message. For instance, NC cell reselection Cause PT1 canbe always activated by setting NC_DL_RXLEV_THR to ’-47 dBm(Always)’.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 1 0

External Comment An outgoing GPRS redirection is a NC cell reselection which istriggered when the MS enters the packet transfer mode in the servingcell even if the radio link is good. The intention of GPRS redirectionsis to redirect the MS towards a target cell more appropriate to carryPS traffic (for instance a macro cell).



918 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.83 (EN_PFC_FEATURE) - (EN_PFC_FEATURE)

HMI Name EN_PFC_FEATUREParameter Name

Logical Name EN_PFC_FEATURE

Definition Enables/disables the support of the PFC negotiation feature.

Coding rules 1 => PFC feature is supported,0 => PFC feature is not supported

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to resetautonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 919 / 1278


6.2.84 (EN_PSI_STATUS) - (EN_PSI_STATUS)

HMI Name EN_PSI_STATUSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_PSI_STATUS

Definition Enables the Packet SI Status feature in cells w/o PBCCH or thePacket PSI Status feature in cells with a PBCCH.

Coding rules 0: disabled; 1:enabled

Mandatory rules Can be enabled only if round_trip_delay < 500 msecWhen cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", thenEN_PSI_STATUS = 0


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




920 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.85 (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE) - (EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE)

HMI Name EN_RA_CAP_UPDATEParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE

Definition Flag to enable/disable the Radio Acces Capability update on Gb


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules This parameter must be enabled if RA capability update issupported by SGSN and if it exists, at least, one cell whereEN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is enabled.The Extended UL TBF mode feature is completely effective only ifthe parameter EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE is set to enabled.

If EN_STREAMING is set to 1 then EN_RA_CAP_UPDATE mustalso be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwise the BSS will not be able tohandle streaming flow. If this rule is not respected then all PFCcreation requests related to a streaming flow will be downgraded tothe default best effort flow by the BSS.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 921 / 1278


6.2.86 (EN_RIM_NACC) - (EN_RIM_NACC)

HMI Name EN_RIM_NACCParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RIM_NACC

Definition Flag to disable/enable the Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC features(inter-RAT = inter-3G or inter-LTE).It covers both controlling and serving aspects : for controllingMFS, this is the ability to request and receive System Informationmessages from the Gb interface and to broadcast them to MSthrough the PACCH.For serving MFS, this is the ability to provide System Informationmessages when requested by another BSS/RNC.

Coding rules 0: Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC are disabled1: Inter-BSS NACC only is enabled2 Inter-3G NACC only is enabled3 Inter-BSS and Inter-3G NACC are enabled4 Inter-LTE NACC only is enabled5 Inter-BSS and Inter-LTE NACC are enabled6 Inter-3G and Inter-LTE NACC are enabled7 Inter-BSS and Inter-RAT NACC are enabled

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 7 0

External Comment - For a BSS working as a controlling BSS, the Inter-BSS NACCfeature can be effective for a serving cell, if EN_NACC feature isenabled in that cell. For a BSS working as a serving BSS, there is nointeraction with the EN_NACC feature.- Parameter change:When enabling (setting from 0 to <>0), a reset of all the BVC SIG isautomatically performed (leading the MFS to stop and restart PStraffic in the BSS).In case of disabling (setting from <>0 to 0), the reset is automaticallydone only on the NSEs of the BSS, connected to a SGSN supportingthe RIM feature (leading the MFS to stop and restart PS traffic onthese SGSN(s)).In any other case of modification, there is no impact on the PS traffic;on going TBFs are not disrupted.

922 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 923 / 1278


6.2.87 (EN_STREAMING) - (EN_STREAMING)

HMI Name EN_STREAMINGParameter Name

Logical Name EN_STREAMING

Definition Enables/disables the support of the STREAMING flows.

Coding rules 1 => the cell supports the streaming flows in addition to the non realtime flows (best effort, interactive, background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE= 1 and if the PFC feature negotiation with the SGSN is successful0 => the cell supports the non real time flows (best effort, interactive,background) if EN_PFC_FEATURE = 1 and if the PFC featurenegotiation with the SGSN is successful

Mandatory rules - If EN_STREAMING = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 0- When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", thenEN_STREAMING = 0

Recommended rules 1) If this parameter is set to 1 then the parameterEN_RA_CAP_UPDATE must also be set to 1 (enabled). Otherwisethe BSS will not be able to handle streaming flow. If this rule is notrespected then all PFC creation requests related to a streaming flowwill be downgraded to the default best effort flow by the BSS.2) the parameter EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK must also set to"TRUE" in order to activate the link adaptation mechanism so that the(M)CS can reach a suitable level regarding the level of the configuredRmin_(E)GPRS. Otherwise, the streaming PFCs can be downgradedto the Default Best Effort ABQP because the negotiated GBR cannotbe reached on the radio interface.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




924 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.88 (Excess Burst Size) - (EBS)

HMI Name Excess Burst SizeParameter Name

Logical Name EBS

Definition Excess Burst Size.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules CIR=0 <=> CBS=0 => EBS > 0CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC

Recommended rules EBS=FR_CAPACITY(expressed in kbit/s) / 8, if CIR=0

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


kbyte 0 248 None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 925 / 1278


6.2.89 (GAMMA_TNx) - (GAMMA_TNx)

HMI Name GAMMA_TNxParameter Name

Logical Name GAMMA_TNx

Definition Binary representation of the "gamma ch" for MS output power control.

Coding rules Coded on 5 bits, step size=2dB, with 00000 == 0 dB, 00001 == 2dB, ... 11111 == 62 dB.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dB 0 62 30

External Comment In the context of a concentric cell, the parameter applies to the outerzone.



926 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.90 (Gb_Transport_Mode) - (Gb_Transport_Mode)

HMI Name Gb_Transport_ModeParameter Name

Logical Name Gb_Transport_Mode

Definition Mode of the transport for Gb interface: FR or IP.

Coding rules 0: FR mode1: IP mode

Mandatory rules - EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if Gb_Transport_Mode is IP.- If Gb_Transport_Mode is FR then EN_GB_FLEX must be disabled.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment - When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, theGb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport modeof the NSE.When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode ofthe BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (theGb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport modedefined in the NSE instance).

- Parameter change: before to set to transport mode to FR, theoperator has to delete all the excessive NSEs (no more than one NSEper GPU, ie no more than one SGSN connected to the BSS). Anymodification of the parameter leads the MFS to reset autonomouslyall the GP/GPUs connected to this BSS.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 927 / 1278


6.2.91 (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE) - (Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE)

HMI Name Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSEParameter Name

Logical Name Gb_Transport_Mode_per_NSE

Definition Mode of the transport for Gb interface (per NSE): FR or IP.

Coding rules 0: FR mode1: IP mode

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance NSE


None 0 1 0

External Comment - When the NSE is not associated to a BSS, theGb_Transport_Mode_perNSE defines the transport modeof the NSE.When the NSE is associated to a BSS, the transport mode ofthe BSS defines the transport mode of all NSEs of the BSS (theGb_Transport_Mode - of the BSS - overrides the transport modedefined in the NSE instance).

- Parameter change: Any modification of the parameter leads theMFS to reset autonomously the associated GP/GPU.



928 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.92 (GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAter) -(GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage)

HMI Name GCH_RED_FACTOR_HiAterParameter Name

Logical Name GCH_RED_FACTOR_High_Ater_Usage

Definition Reduction factor of the number of GCHs targeted per PDCH, whenthe Ater usage is "high".


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules A low value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usage can be coherentwith a high value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it will avoid reaching thesaturation point of 100% of the Ater resources used at the samemoment in the GPU).Reciprocally, a high value of GCH_RED_Factor_High_Ater_Usagecan be coherent with a low value of Ater_Usage_Threshold (it willlimit the risks of wasting, i.e. of not using, Ater resources in the GPU).

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0.1 1 0.75

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- The GCH reduction factor applies to the new PDCHs which areused when the Ater usage is "high" (see the Ater_Usage_Thresholdparameter). This parameter can be reduced in order to avoid Atershortage situations.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 929 / 1278


6.2.93 (GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) -(GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

HMI Name GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESISParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS

Definition Additional hysteresis which applies in Ready state for cells in sameRA.

Coding rules step size = 2dB; coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001= 2 dB, 111=14 dB

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dB 0 14 4




930 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.94 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH)

HMI Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCHParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH

Definition Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing thesystem.

Coding rules Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band:P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm,..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm,0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm 5 43 43




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 931 / 1278


6.2.95 (GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) -(GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n))

HMI Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCHParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)

Definition Maximum TX power level an MS may use when accessing thesystem.

Coding rules Coded on 5 bits from 0 to 31The coding depends on the BCCH frequency band:P-GSM/G1 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 43 dBm, ..., 19: 5 dBm.GSM 850 coding: step size = 2 dBm; 0: 39 dBm, 1: 39 dBm, 2: 39dBm, 3: 37 dBm, 4: 35 dBm..., 19: 5 dBm.DCS 1800 coding:step size = 2 dBm; 0: 30 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.DCS 1900 coding: range 0 to 15, 30, 31; 30: 33 dBm, 31: 32 dBm,0: 30 dBm, 1: 28 dBm, ..., 15: 0 dBm.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dBm 5 43 43




932 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.96 (GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE) -(GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE)

HMI Name GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUEParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE

Definition Default value of the (E)GPRS multislot class assumed at TBFestablishment when the actual MS (E)GPRS multislot class isunknown.The default MS class is used as an input of the best candidate TBFallocation computation process when the MS class is not knownon UL TBF establishment.

Coding rules Only the following GPRS multislot class defined in 3GPP TS 05.02annex B are allowed:1: GPRS multislot class 1 (1+1 MS);2: GPRS multislot class 2 (2+1 MS);4: GPRS multislot class 4 (3+1 MS);8: GPRS multislot class 8 (4+1 MS);30: GPRS multislot class 30 (5+1 MS).

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The recommendations to set this parameter are the following:1) In case the PS traffic is mainly signalling (e.g. there is a greatproportion of RA Updates among the UL TBF establishmentrequests), GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE shall be set to1 (optimization of the number of T2 TBF reallocations and of PPC /DSP CPU).2) In case the PS traffic is mainly data (high proportionof UL TBF establishment requests for data traffic),GPRS_MULTISLOT_CLASS_DEF_VALUE should be set to themost common multislot class which can be found among themobile stations within the BSS (in order to limit the number ofT2 TBF reallocations and of PPC / DSP CPU, triggered with theestablishment of the concurrent DL TBF). In case of multislot class30, this additionally requires that the multislot class 30-33 featureis widely activated in the BSS.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 30 8

External Comment The entered value is assumed by default at uplink TBF establishmentwhen the actual MS multislot class is unknown (e.g. RACH onephase access on CCCH) . Otherwise, the multislot class received inthe request for uplink TBF establishment is taken into account.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 933 / 1278




934 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.97 (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME) - (GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n))

HMI Name GPRS_PENALTY_TIMEParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_PENALTY_TIME(n)

Definition Time during which GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET is active inneighbour cells.

Coding rules step size = 10 sec, coded on 5 bits (00000 = 10 sec, 11111 = 320 sec)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


sec 10 320 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 935 / 1278


6.2.98 (GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET) -(GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n))

HMI Name GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSETParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_RESELECTION_OFFSET(n)

Definition Permanent offset for GPRS cell reselection in neighbour cells.

Coding rules coded on 5 bits (00000 = -52 dB, 11111 = 48 dB)00000= -52; 00001= -48; 00010= -44; 00011= -40; 00100= -36;00101= -32; 00110= -28; 00111= -24; 01000= -20; 01001= -16;01010= -12; 01011= -10; 01100= - 8; 01101= - 6; 01110= - 4; 01111=- 2; 10000= 0; 10001= 2; 10010= 4; 10011= 6; 10100= 8; 10101=10;10110= 12; 10111= 16; 11000= 20; 11001= 24; 11010= 28; 11011=32; 11100= 36; 11101= 40; 11110= 44; 11111= 48

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dB -52 48 0




936 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.99 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN)

HMI Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MINParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN

Definition Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the system.

Coding rules step size = 1 dBm, coded on 6 bits (000000 = -110 dBm, 111111= -47 dBm)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -100




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 937 / 1278


6.2.100 (GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) -(GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n))

HMI Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MINParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)

Definition Minimum received level at the MS required for access to the systemin neighbour cells.

Coding rules coded on 6 bits, 0=-110 dBm, 63=-47 dBm, step size=1dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dBm -110 -47 -100




938 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.101 (GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET) -(GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n))

HMI Name GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSETParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_TEMPORARY_OFFSET(n)

Definition Negative offset used for MS cell reselection process in neighbourcells.

Coding rules Possible values : 0, 10, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, infinity respectively binarycoded as 000, 001, ..., 111

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dB 0 infinity 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 939 / 1278


6.2.102 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR)

HMI Name HCS_THRParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_HCS_THR

Definition HCS signal strength.

Coding rules Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm -110 -48 -84




940 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.103 (HCS_THR) - (GPRS_HCS_THR(n))

HMI Name HCS_THRParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_HCS_THR(n)

Definition HCS signal strength.

Coding rules Coded on 5 bits. 00000=-110 dBm, 00001=-108 dBm, 11111=-48dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dBm -110 -48 -84




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 941 / 1278


6.2.104 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) -(HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

HMI Name HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name HIGH_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet FlowContext, with precedence parameter set to ’high’

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 15




942 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.105 (HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) -(HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

HMI Name HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name HIGH_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet FlowContext, with precedence parameter set to ’high’

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 943 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 9




944 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 945 / 1278


6.2.108 (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS) - (HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)

HMI Name HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRSParameter Name

Logical Name HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS

Definition Load threshold used to determine a certain margin of radio timeslotsreserved for CS traffic between two sending of the BSCGP RRAllocation Indication messages. The threshold is expressed inpercentage of the radio timeslots available in the cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 90

External Comment The margin of radio timeslots reserved for CS traffic can be computedas follows:

(100 - HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD_GPRS)/100*NB_TS

where NB_TS is the number of radio timeslots available in the cell.


Nb of TRX Dependent

t01 t02 t03 t04 t05 t06 t07 t08 t09 t010 t011 t012

70 70 70 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80 80

946 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.109 (IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD) - (IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD)

HMI Name IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name IEUTM_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD

Definition Maximum duration of UL TBF inactivity before MS is polled in EUTMmode when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2 (IEUTM enabled).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 100 1000 300

External Comment Change of parameter value is taken into account also for on-goingUL TBFs



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 947 / 1278


6.2.110 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS) -(INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS)

HMI Name INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRSParameter Name

Logical Name INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_GPRS

Definition Number of PDCHs on which MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DLand MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted whenestablishing GCHs for a GPRS TBF associated to a "short data"MS transfer.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 8 2

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on goingTBF are not disrupted. Change applied on current TBF and newTBF established after modification.



948 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.111 (LAC) - (LAC (MFS))


Logical Name LAC (MFS)


Coding rules –

Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same timeEqual to LAC (BSC)A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)shall have the same LAC


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 65535 65535




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 949 / 1278


6.2.112 (LAC) - (LAC(n) (MFS))


Logical Name LAC(n) (MFS)


Coding rules –

Mandatory rules LAC and CI can not be equal to 65535 at the same time.Equal to LAC(n)(BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 1 65535 65535




950 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.113 (Level 1 down) - (PVC_Level1_down)

HMI Name Level 1 downParameter Name

Logical Name PVC_Level1_down

Definition This parameter gives the low level of threshold for congestion.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


% 0 100 40




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 951 / 1278


6.2.114 (Level 1 Factor) - (PVC_Level1_Factor)

HMI Name Level 1 FactorParameter Name

Logical Name PVC_Level1_Factor

Definition This parameter is used to calculate the amount of data used forbuffering.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules amount of memory needed : PVC_Level1_factor * 10 * (CBS+EBS)for a PVC

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


None 0.05 12.75 1




952 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.115 (Level 1 up) - (PVC_Level1_up)

HMI Name Level 1 upParameter Name

Logical Name PVC_Level1_up

Definition This parameter gives the high level of threshold for congestion.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


% 0 100 70




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 953 / 1278


6.2.116 (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS) - (LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS)

HMI Name LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRSParameter Name

Logical Name LOAD_EV_PERIOD_GPRS

Definition Number of load samples (calculated every TCH_INFO_PERIODseconds) used to compute the maximum number of slave PDCHsthat the BSC can allocate to the MFS.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 3 30 3




954 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.117 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) -(LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

HMI Name LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name LOW_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet FlowContext, with precedence parameter set to ’low’

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 15




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 955 / 1278


6.2.118 (LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) -(LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

HMI Name LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name LOW_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet FlowContext, with precedence parameter set to ’low’

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 6




956 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 9




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 957 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 12




958 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.121 (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH)

HMI Name MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCHParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH

Definition Indicative value of the maximum number of DownLink (E)GPRSTBFs per Slave PDCH.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 10 8

External Comment When allocating a DL GPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is themaximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on eachSlave PDCH.When allocating a DL EGPRS TBF: MAX_DL_TBF_SPDCH is themaximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in DL on each SlavePDCH (regardless of the current number of DL GPRS TBFs).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 959 / 1278


6.2.122 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS) - (MAX_EGPRS_MCS)

HMI Name MAX_EGPRS_MCSParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS

Definition Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for EGPRS trafficin the cell.

Coding rules 0: MCS-1;1: MCS-2;2: MCS-3;3: MCS-4;4: MCS-5;5: MCS-6;6: MCS-7;7: MCS-8;8: MCS-9;

Mandatory rules MAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_DL_INIT_MCSMAX_EGPRS_MCS >= TBF_UL_INIT_MCSWhen cell_type = "extended outer", then MAX_EGPRS_MCS <=MCS-4

Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher thanthe useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. ifMAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not behigher than 59,2kbps).R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than theuseful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the aboverecommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can beaccepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle theirassociated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to BestEffort.It is advised to set MAX_EGPRS_MCS to a value different fromMCS-2 to cope with MEGCH control message granularity in anoptimal way.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 9 9

External Comment Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impact onthe telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in case ofvalue decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferring withthe previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupted dueto the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.

960 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 961 / 1278


6.2.123 (MAX_GPRS_CS) - (MAX_GPRS_CS)

HMI Name MAX_GPRS_CSParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_GPRS_CS

Definition Maximum coding scheme used for GPRS traffic in the cell.

Coding rules 1 : CS-2;2 : CS-3;3 : CS-4

Mandatory rules MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_DL_INIT_CS

MAX_GPRS_CS >= TBF_UL_INIT_CS

If Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2.The aim of this last rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly thealgorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead timeand outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRSis not allowed)

Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher thanthe useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. ifMAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higherthan 12kbps)R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the usefulbitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommendedrule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSSwhereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. Thismay result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 2 4 2

External Comment - This parameter can be set to CS-3 or CS-4 only if the relatedfeature has been bought and controlled per quantity.- Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impacton the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in caseof value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferringwith the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupteddue to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing



962 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.124 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL) -(MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL)

HMI Name MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DLParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL

Definition Maximum coding scheme used for the DL GPRS TBFs associated toa "short data" MS transfer.

Coding rules 1: CS-1 coded as 02: CS-2 coded as 13: CS-3 coded as 24: CS-4 coded as 3

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs duringthe "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommendedthat MAX [MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL,MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN [TBF_DL_INIT_CS,TBF_UL_INIT_CS].This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blockingrate in the cell (by recommending low values forMAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplifythe cell configuration.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 4 1

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- Setting this parameter to CS-2 might introduce some problems(because a CS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and mighttherefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to besent in the M-EGCH link in DL).- If MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_DL is strictly higher thanMAX_GPRS_CS, then MAX_GPRS_CS is used instead.- Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impacton the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in caseof value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferringwith the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupteddue to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 963 / 1278


6.2.125 (MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL) -(MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL)

HMI Name MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_ULParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL

Definition Maximum coding scheme used for the UL GPRS TBFs associated toa "short data" MS transfer.

Coding rules 1: CS-1 coded as 02: CS-2 coded as 13: CS-3 coded as 24: CS-4 coded as 3

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 4 2

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- If MAX_GPRS_CS_SHORT_DATA_UL is strictly higher thanMAX_GPRS_CS, then MAX_GPRS_CS is used instead.- Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impacton the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in caseof value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferringwith the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupteddue to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.



964 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.126 (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE) - (MAX_PAGING_QUEUE)

HMI Name MAX_PAGING_QUEUEParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_PAGING_QUEUE

Definition Maximum number of CS+PS paging messages stored in GPU.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Paging Rate = 100 paging/s AND Queueing Time = 5s

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 50 1000 500




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 965 / 1278


6.2.127 (MAX_PDCH) - (MAX_PDCH (MFS))Management of

Enable_GPRS Flag (Cell

Parameter)

This flag exists in the BSC and is managed by the OMC-R but it is not visibleto the operator. It is derived by the OMC-R from the value of Max_PDCH.When the Enable_GPRS flag is set to true, it means that the BSC can acceptMFS requests for a certain cell. In some circumstances, there can be someinconsistencies, but these might not have any impact:

Creation of a BSC When the BSS is discovered by the OMC-R, the MFS parameters are set totheir default value by the OMC-R. Max_PDCH is set to 0. (There may beinconsistency at system level, but no impact.) Later, if the operator installsGPRS, he has to download the radio configuration to the MFS. Through thisoperation, the flag ’Enable_GPRS’ is recomputed for the cells concerned bythe PRC, and therefore downloaded to the BSC. All data is then in line forthe cells concerned by the PRC. It can occur that some cells remain with’Enable_GPRS’ set to true and Max_PDCH set to 0 but this does no harm at all(no impact on the traffic, and not visible by the operator).

DLS Restore When the

Flag is Not In Lline With

Max_PDCH

Any DLS restore must be followed by the following procedure to line-up theEN_GPRS of the cells handled by this BSC with the Max_PDCH of thesecells currently stored in the OMC-R:

1. Copy the SC into the PRC

2. Activate this PRC

Until the synchronization is achieved, the cell cannot be set into service forGPRS by the telecom application (there is no impact if the cell is alreadystarted for GPRS).

HMI Name MAX_PDCHParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_PDCH (MFS)

Definition Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocatedto the MFS in the cell.

Coding rules –

966 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Mandatory rules Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH (MX BSC)Max_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD;If MAX_PDCH > 0 then EN_GPRS = TRUE ;If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_GPRS = FALSE;If MAX_PDCH = 0 then EN_EGPRS = FALSE;

If EN_VGCS= enabled, then "(MAX_VGCS_TS + MAX_PDCH) <Total number of TCHs of the cell"

If Max_PDCH = 0 then MAX_GPRS_CS = CS-2.The aim of this rule is to prevent the BSC to trigger uselessly thealgorithms of adjust ranking and transmission pool set up (lead timeand outage) for CS3 and CS4, in case Max_PDCH = 0 (i.e. GPRS isnot allowed)

MAX_PDCH shall be set so that at least one slave PDCH can beallocated to the MFS to serve DL or UL TBFs. This means thatMAX_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_GPRS = TRUE.

When Max_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extendedouter", then MAX_PDCH shall be an even number.

The following conditions are verified by the OMC-R in order to checkthe upper limit of MAX_PDCH:i) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 1if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "1:CCCH combined"ii) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK = 0) - 2if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = "0:CCCH not combined"iii) MAX_PDCH <= NB_TS_MPDCH + 8*(nb of TRXs withTRX_PREF_MARK = 0) if TRX_PREF_MARK <> 0 on BCCH TRXiv) MAX_PDCH <= 8*(nb of TRXs with TRX_PREF_MARK=0) - 3 ifTRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on BCCH TRX and CCCH_CONF = 2

Recommended rules In a micro cell, the operator may be interested to force theMS to reselect a macro cell by a correct setting of the cellreselection parameters broadcast on PBCCH (without using NC cellreselections, i.e. when EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR is set to 0and NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to ’NC0’ in the microcell). In this case, the following configuration is recommended:NB_TS_MPDCH = 1, MAX_PDCH = 2, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD =1, MIN_PDCH = 1.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 127 0

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 967 / 1278



To support LCS in a cell, it is mandatory to have Max_PDCH > 0



968 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.128 (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD) - (MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS))

HMI Name MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOADParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MFS)

Definition Maximum number of slave and master PDCHs that can be allocatedto the MFS when the CS traffic is high.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Shall be equal to MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD (MX BSC)- MAX_PDCH >= MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD- MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH- If EN_DTM = 1 then MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 127 0

External Comment 127 is a theoretical value: 16 TRX * 8 PDCH - BCCH.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 969 / 1278


6.2.129 (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF) - (MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF)

HMI Name MAX_PDCH_PER_TBFParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_PDCH_PER_TBF

Definition Maximum number of PDCHs allocated to a single (E)GPRSconnection.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 5 5




970 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.130 (MAX_RETRANS) - (Max_retrans (MFS))

HMI Name MAX_RETRANSParameter Name

Logical Name Max_retrans (MFS)

Definition Maximum number of CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissions bythe MS on the RACH, broadcast on the PBCCH for CS serviceestablishment.

Coding rules Possible values are:1, 2 ,4 and 7 respectively binary coded:00, 01,10 and 11

Mandatory rules Max_retrans (BSC) = Max_retrans (MFS) for a given cell


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 7 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 971 / 1278


6.2.131 (MAX_RETRANS_1) - (MAX_RETRANS_1)

HMI Name MAX_RETRANS_1Parameter Name

Logical Name MAX_RETRANS_1

Definition Maximum number of PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST retransmissionsby the MS on the PRACH with priority level 1.

Coding rules Possible values are : 1, 2, 4, 7 respectively binary coded : 00, 01,10, 11

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 7 2




972 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 7 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 973 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 7 2




974 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 7 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 975 / 1278


6.2.135 (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH) - (MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH)

HMI Name MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCHParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH

Definition Indicative value of maximum number of UpLink (E)GPRS TBFs perslave PDCH.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 6 5

External Comment When allocating an UL GPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is themaximum number of GPRS + EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on eachSlave PDCH.When allocating an UL EGPRS TBF: MAX_UL_TBF_SPDCH is themaximum number of EGPRS TBFs allowed in UL on each SlavePDCH (regardless of the current number of UL GPRS TBFs).



976 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.136 (MIN_PDCH) - (MIN_PDCH (MFS))

HMI Name MIN_PDCHParameter Name

Logical Name MIN_PDCH (MFS)

Definition Minimum number of master and slave PDCHs that are alwaysallocated to the MFS.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules - Shall be equal to MIN_PDCH (MX BSC)-MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD >= MIN_PDCH;-MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH ifEN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;-MIN_PDCH >= NB_TS_MPDCH ifEN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.-When MIN_PDCH > 0 and cell_type = "extended inner" or "extendedouter", then MIN_PDCH shall be an even number

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter to a value smaller than themaximum number of PDCHs that may be allocated in the cell, inorder to avoid congestion on the MFS-BSC interface.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 127 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 977 / 1278


6.2.137 (Mobile Country Code (MCC)) - (MCC (MFS))

HMI Name Mobile Country Code (MCC)Parameter Name

Logical Name MCC (MFS)

Definition Mobile Country Code of the own PLMN.


Mandatory rules The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:- MCC (BSC) = MCC (MFS).- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same(MCC,MNC) couple.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall beselected from the set of own PLMNs.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can beselected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 999 999

External Comment The value depends on the configuration. The default value indicatedhere is for implementation purposes.



978 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.138 (Mobile Network Code (MNC)) - (MNC (MFS))

HMI Name Mobile Network Code (MNC)Parameter Name

Logical Name MNC (MFS)

Definition Mobile Network Code of the own PLMN.


Mandatory rules The OMC-R shall ensure that the following rules are always fulfilled:- MNC (BSC) = MNC (MFS).- The cells belonging to the same BSC shall have the same(MCC,MNC) couple.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells internal to the OMC-R shall beselected from the set of own PLMNs.- The (MCC,MNC) couple of cells external to the OMC-R can beselected from the set of own or foreign PLMNs.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 999 999

External Comment The value depends on configuration. The default value indicatedhere is for implementation purposes.The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC.MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (Fbinary coded 1111)MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 979 / 1278


6.2.139 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS))


Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH (MFS)



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm 5 43 43




980 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.140 (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH) - (MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS))


Logical Name MS_TXPWR_MAX_CCH(n)(MFS)



Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dBm 5 43 43




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 981 / 1278


6.2.141 (N_AVG_I (BSC)) - (N_AVG_I (BSC))

HMI Name N_AVG_I (BSC)Parameter Name

Logical Name N_AVG_I (BSC)

Definition N_AVG_I (BSC) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the SI13.The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interference signal levelmeasurements that it shall perform during the packet transfer mode.These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MS for output powercontrol, but also reported to the network and used for performingdownlink link adaptation.

Coding rules coded on 4 bits

Mandatory rules Equal to N_AVG_I (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 15 6




982 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.142 (N_AVG_I (MFS)) - (N_AVG_I (MFS))

HMI Name N_AVG_I (MFS)Parameter Name

Logical Name N_AVG_I (MFS)

Definition N_AVG_I (MFS) value is broadcast to the (E)GPRS MS in the PSI13 and PSI1. The (E)GPRS MS uses it for filtering the interferencesignal level measurements that it shall perform during the packettransfer mode. These measurements are used by the (E)GPRS MSfor output power control, but also reported to the network and usedfor performing downlink link adaptation.

Coding rules coded on 4 bits

Mandatory rules Equal to N_AVG_I (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 15 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 983 / 1278


6.2.143 (N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS) -(N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS)

HMI Name N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANSParameter Name

Logical Name N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS

Definition Number of bytes below which an MS transfer is considered to be"short data".

Coding rules step size = 1 byte

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS <=N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS_PERIODIC

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


byte 20 10000 150

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- An MS transfer is considered to be "short data" as long as lessthan N_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred inboth directions (since the TBF establishment(s)). Else, if more thanN_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS bytes have been transferred in atleast one direction, the MS transfer is considered to be "long data".Note: in DL, the bytes of the DL LLC PDUs currently queued for theMS (but not yet sent to the MS) are also counted.Decreasing (respectively increasing) the value ofN_DATA_BYTES_MAX_TRANS will tend:- to make the Ater resource optimization worse (respectivelybetter) when the Ater usage of the GPU is aboveAter_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data,- to reduce (respectively make higher) the PS throughputdegradations at the beginning of MS traffics when the Ater usage ofthe GPU is above Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data,- to make the MFS and BSC CPU loads higher (respectively lower).

- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on goingTBF are not disrupted. Change applied immediately on current TBFand on new TBF, established after modification.



984 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.144 (N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT) - (N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT)

HMI Name N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMITParameter Name

Logical Name N_POLLING_EUTM_LIMIT

Definition Maximum number of consecutive polling requests that can be sentto a MS in EUTM state (when EN_EXTENDED_UL_TBF is set ot 2(IEUTM enabled)) without receiving a polling response in a PCA.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules The value of the parameter should be set to a value high enough toavoid any spurious abnormal UL TBF releases.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 5 20 10

External Comment A change of parameter value is taken into account also for on-goingUL TBFs.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 985 / 1278


6.2.145 (N_RIM_RETRIES) - (N_RIM_RETRIES)

HMI Name N_RIM_RETRIESParameter Name

Logical Name N_RIM_RETRIES

Definition Number of times a RAN procedure is retried (after first attempt)before giving up (in case of no answer is received)

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 255 2




986 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.146 (N3101_LIMIT) - (N3101_LIMIT)

HMI Name N3101_LIMITParameter Name

Logical Name N3101_LIMIT

Definition In an UL TBF tranfer procedure, maximum of consecutive times(before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network receivesno valid UL RLC data block or nothing from the MS on its allocatedPDCH.To note that the counter N3101 can be incremented more than onetime per block period.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 10 64 64




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 987 / 1278


6.2.147 (N3103_LIMIT) - (N3103_LIMIT)



Definition In an UL TBF releasing procedure, maximum of consecutive times(before releasing abnormally the UL TBF) when the network does notreceive a Packet Control Acknowledgement from the MS in responseof its Packet UL ACK/NACK which specifies the end of the TBF.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules N3103_Limit: maximum number of retransmissions to release an ULTBFMax_Retrans_DL: maximum number of retransmissions to establisha DL TBFIn case of simultaneous UL TBF Release and DL TBF establishmentwith loss of the Packet Control Ack which acknowledges the finalPacket UL Ack/Nack, the UL TBF has to be released, at leastbefore the last attempt to establish the DL TBF, in order to avoid theemission of a Radio Status.Consequently the following rule has to be followed:(N3103_Limit + 1) x (RTD + 60) < Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60)N3103_Limit + 1: total number of attempts to send the final PacketUL Ack/NackRTD: Round Trip Delay60 (msec): for the Packet UL Ack/Nack acknowledgement: RRBP +3 is usedMax_Retrans_DL: total number of attempts minus one to send thePacket DL Assignment60 (msec): for the Packet DL Assignment acknowledgement: RRBP+ 3 is usedN3103_Limit < (Max_Retrans_DL x (RTD + 60) / (RTD + 60)) - 1N3103_Limit < [Max_Retrans_DL] - 1Example:With Max_Retrans_DL = 3: N3103_Limit < 2 that is N3103_Limit = 1

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 16 1


988 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 989 / 1278


6.2.148 (N3105_LIMIT) - (N3105_LIMIT)



Definition For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abisterrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines themaximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or PacketControl Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radiointerface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. Thisparameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delayto decide if the DL TBF shall be released.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 64 20

External Comment If N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL then the loss of consecutive packetDL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release.N3105_Limit has to be set in order not to release a DL TBF in caseof transient bad radio conditions. The polling frequency depends onGPRS_DL_Ack_Period, T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislotclass and on the number of TBFs per PDCH.



990 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.149 (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) - (N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)

HMI Name N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITEParameter Name

Logical Name N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE

Definition For a DL GPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abissatellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximumnumber of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet ControlAcknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radiointerface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. Thisparameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delayto decide if the DL TBF shall be released.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 64 24

External Comment If N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL then the loss ofconsecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptationbut TBF release. N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE has to be set in ordernot to release a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.The polling frequency depends on GPRS_DL_Ack_Period_Satellite,T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the numberof TBFs per PDCH.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 991 / 1278


6.2.150 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC))

HMI Name NB_TS_MPDCHParameter Name

Logical Name NB_TS_MPDCH (BSC)

Definition Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondarymaster PDCHs defined in the cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules 0) NB_TS_MPDCH = 0

1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH ifEN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled; MIN_PDCH >=NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.

2) if the ’network_operation_mode (BSC)’ parameter is set to 2(NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0


4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", thenNB_TS_MPDCH = 0


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 4 0

992 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


External Comment - Only the value 0 is supported- The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis andAter) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater throughsatellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the followingcriteria:* higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link;* limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite toabout 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledgedprotocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CSsignalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additionalsignalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH isestablished.Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is:* for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with nonnegligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended;* for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is notrecommended.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 993 / 1278


6.2.151 (NB_TS_MPDCH) - (NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS))

HMI Name NB_TS_MPDCHParameter Name

Logical Name NB_TS_MPDCH (MFS)

Definition Number of radio timeslots reserved for the primary and secondarymaster PDCHs defined in the cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules 0) NB_TS_MPDCH = 0

1) MIN_PDCH > NB_TS_MPDCH ifEN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = enabled;MIN_PDCH >=NB_TS_MPDCH if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = disabled.

2) if the ’network_operation_mode (MFS)’ parameter is set to 2(NMO II) then all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0.


4) When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", thenNB_TS_MPDCH = 0


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 4 0

994 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


External Comment - Only the value 0 is supported- The Master PDCH requires the establishment of a GCH (Abis andAter) which does not carry traffic. In case of Abis or Ater throughsatellite link, the usage of the MPDCH must consider the followingcriteria:* higher cost of transmission resources through the satellite link;* limited throughput of the RSL in case of Abis through satellite toabout 6 kbit/s (because of round trip delay effect on acknowledgedprotocol with limited LAP-D window size). In case of important CSsignalling load, the RSL may not be able to transport the additionalsignalling load due toTBF establishments when no MPDCH isestablished.Hence the recommendation in the GPRS through satellite case is:* for a cell connected with Abis through satellite and with nonnegligible signalling load (CS+PS), MPDCH is recommended;* for a cell connected with Ater through satellite, MPDCH is notrecommended.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 995 / 1278


6.2.152 (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR)

HMI Name NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THRParameter Name

Logical Name NC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR

Definition Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT2 can betriggered due to the detection of a better neighbour cell.

Coding rules 0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm (Always)"(step size = 1 dB)

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematicallytriggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it isrecommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT2 (i.e. setNC_DL_RXLEV_LIMIT_THR to ’-110 dBm (Never)’. The aim ofthis recommended rule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRSredirection.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -47

External Comment 1) The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cellreselections Cause PT2.2) The specific value of "-47 dBm (Always)" systematically allows thetriggering of NC cell reselections Cause PT2



996 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.153 (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR) - (NC_DL_RXLEV_THR)

HMI Name NC_DL_RXLEV_THRParameter Name

Logical Name NC_DL_RXLEV_THR

Definition Threshold below which a NC cell reselection Cause PT1 is triggereddue to a too bad RXLEV in the downlink direction (while the MS isin packet transfer mode).

Coding rules 0: "-110 dBm (Never)", 1:" -109 dBm", ...,63: "-47 dBm" (step size= 1 dB)

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematicallytriggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it isrecommended to activate NC cell reselection Cause PT1 (i.e. setNC_DL_RXLEV_THR to ’-47 dBm (Always)’.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -96

External Comment The specific value of "-110 dBm (Never)" deactivates the NC cellreselection Cause PT1.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 997 / 1278


6.2.154 (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR)

HMI Name NC_DL_RXQUAL_THRParameter Name

Logical Name NC_DL_RXQUAL_THR

Definition Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT3 is triggereddue to a too bad RXQUAL in downlink direction (while the MS isin packet transfer mode).

Coding rules step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed:"0", "0.1", "0.2", ..., "6.9", "7 (Never)".

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematicallytriggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it isrecommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT3 (i.e. setNC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to ’7 (Never)’. The aim of this recommendedrule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 7 7

External Comment The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselectionCause PT3.



998 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.155 (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET) - (NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET)

HMI Name NC_PING_PONG_OFFSETParameter Name

Logical Name NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET

Definition NC ping-pong offset which is applied to the C2 or C32 criterion todisfavour the neighbour cells during T_NC_PING_PONG_OFFSET.

Coding rules step size = 1 dB

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dB 0 63 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 999 / 1278


6.2.156 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T) - (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T)

HMI Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_TParameter Name

Logical Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T

Definition Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS whilein packet transfer mode.

Coding rules coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0:30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) .

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 0.48 61.44 0.96




1000 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.157 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)) -(NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n))

HMI Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)Parameter Name

Logical Name NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T(n)

Definition Reporting period of NC measurements reported by the MS whilein packet transfer mode.

Coding rules coded from 0 to 7 (0 0 0 : 0.48 sec , 0 0 1: 0.96 sec , 0 1 0 : 1.92sec , 0 1 1: 3.84 sec, 1 0 0 : 7.68 sec , 1 0 1 : 15.36 sec , 1 1 0:30.72 sec , 1 1 1: 61.44 sec) .

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


sec 0.48 61.44 0.96




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1001 / 1278


6.2.158 (NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) -(NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n))

HMI Name NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESISParameter Name

Logical Name NC_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS(0,n)

Definition NC cell reselection offset used for triggering power budget causes.

Coding rules 0: -127 dB (Always), 1: -126 dB, ..., 254: 127 dB, 255: 128 dB(Never)(step size = 1 dB)

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dB -127 128 128

External Comment 1) The specific value of "128 dB (Never)" deactivates the NC cellreselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n.2) The specific value of "-127 dB" (Always)" systematically triggersthe NC cell reselection Cause PT2 towards the target cell n.



1002 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.159 (NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR) -(NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR)

HMI Name NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTORParameter Name

Logical Name NC_RXLEV_FORGETTING_FACTOR

Definition Forgetting factor of the filter used to average the NC measurementsreported in the Packet Measurement Report messages.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0.13

External Comment This parameter applies to the serving cell and the neighbour cells.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1003 / 1278


6.2.160 (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD) - (NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD)

HMI Name NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name NC_RXQUAL_AVG_PERIOD

Definition Period after which a weight of 0.9 s is applied to the current UL orDL RXQUAL samples in the averaging filter.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 20 10000 4000

External Comment This parameter applies to the serving cell.



1004 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.161 (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR) - (NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR)

HMI Name NC_UL_RXQUAL_THRParameter Name

Logical Name NC_UL_RXQUAL_THR

Definition Threshold above which a NC cell reselection Cause PT4 is triggereddue to a too bad RXQUAL in uplink direction (while the MS is inpacket transfer mode).

Coding rules step size = 0.1. At the OMC-R, the following values are displayed:"0", "0.1", "0.2", ..., "6.9", "7 (Never)"

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are systematicallytriggered (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Enable’), it isrecommended to deactivate NC cell reselection Cause PT4 (i.e. setNC_UL_RXQUAL_THR to ’7 (Never)’. The aim of this recommendedrule is to limit the conditions triggering a GPRS redirection.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 7 7

External Comment The specific value of "7 (Never)" deactivates the NC cell reselectionCause PT4.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1005 / 1278


6.2.162 (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE) - (NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE)

HMI Name NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODEParameter Name

Logical Name NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE

Definition NC2 deactivation mode. This parameter defines whether or not thePacket Measurement Order message with a Reset Command is sentat the end of a packet transfer.

Coding rules 0: "NC2 deactivation at the end of the packet transfer". A PacketMeasurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2 mode atthe end of the packet transfer.1: "NC2 deactivation at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer". NoPacket Measurement Order message is sent to deactivate the NC2mode.

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In cells where outgoing GPRS redirections are not triggeredsystematically (i.e. EN_OUTGOING_GPRS_REDIR = ’Disable’), thepresence of the PBCCH is not mandatory. However, the followingrecommendations apply, depending on the presence of the PBCCH:

- If PBCCH is present, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE can be setto any value (at the end of the packet transfer mode or at the expiry ofthe GMM Ready timer) if the setting of the C32 parameters ensuresthat GPRS mobile stations do not camp in cells where outgoingGPRS redirections are systematically triggered.

- If PBCCH is not present or PBCCH is present but C32 parametersare not correctly set, the NC2_DEACTIVATION_MODE shouldbe set to "at the expiry of the GMM Ready timer" to prevent theGPRS mobile stations from reselecting a cell where outgoing GPRSredirections are triggered systematically (at least while the MS is inpacket idle mode and the GMM Ready timer is running).

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




1006 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.163 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) -(NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER)

HMI Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDERParameter Name

Logical Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER

Definition This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cellreselections.

Coding rules 0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cellreselections and no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.1: NC1 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cellreselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.(Not supported)2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls thecell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer modeor of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on theselected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activatedfor the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to theBSS.3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cellreselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS whenin GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivationmode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, theMS reports packet measurements to the BSS.4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSScontrols the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packettransfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state(depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packetmeasurements to the BSS.

Mandatory rules - The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator.- When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", thenNETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 4 0

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1007 / 1278


External Comment If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode ofoperation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for allMS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", then the 3Gsearch is systematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode(activation performed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2]message).If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3Gsearch activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even ifNetwork_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated evenwhen activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order[NC2] message will not be sent).



1008 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.164 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER) -(NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n))

HMI Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDERParameter Name

Logical Name NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER(n)

Definition This parameter defines whether the MS or the BSS controls the cellreselections.

Coding rules 0: NC0 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cellreselections an no MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.1: NC1 mode of operation for all MS. All MS controls their cellreselections but all the MS reports packet measurements to the BSS.(Not supported)2: NC2 mode of operation for R99 onwards MS. The BSS controls thecell reselections of R99 onwards MS when in packet transfer modeor of R99 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state (depending on theselected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2 mode is activatedfor the concerned MS, the MS reports packet measurements to theBSS.3: NC2 mode of operation for all MS. The BSS controls the cellreselections of all MS when in packet transfer mode or of all MS whenin GMM Ready state (depending on the selected NC2 deactivationmode). While the NC2 mode is activated for the concerned MS, theMS reports packet measurements to the BSS.4: NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS. The BSScontrols the cell reselections of Rel.4 onwards MS when in packettransfer mode or of Rel.4 onwards MS when in GMM Ready state(depending on the selected NC2 deactivation mode). While the NC2mode is activated for the concerned MS, the MS reports packetmeasurements to the BSS.

Mandatory rules - The OMC-R only shows the values 0, 2, 3 and 4 to the operator.- When cell_type = "extended inner" or "extended outer", thenNETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER = NC0 mode of operation for all MS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 4 0

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1009 / 1278


External Comment If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode ofoperation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS"or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel.4 onwards MS", the 3G search issystematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode (activationperformed through the Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message).This 3G search deactivation is then performed independently of thevalue of the EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.



1010 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.165 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode(BSC))

HMI Name Network_mode_of_operationParameter Name

Logical Name network_operation_mode (BSC)

Definition This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging.

Coding rules 3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 ==Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III.

Mandatory rules If the ’network_operation_mode (BSC)’ parameter is set to NMO IIthen all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0

Equal to network_operation_mode (MFS).

Recommended rules If EN_DTM is Enabled for at least one cell within the BSS it is highlyrecommended to activate CS Paging Coordination for the BSS,either through the Gs Interface (network_operation_mode = NMOI) or by setting EN_BSS_PAGING_COORDINATION to "Enabled"(network_operation_mode <> NMO I).

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 1 3 2

External Comment Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of(E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS.NMO I requires a Gs interface.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1011 / 1278


6.2.166 (Network_mode_of_operation) - (network_operation_mode(MFS))

HMI Name Network_mode_of_operationParameter Name

Logical Name network_operation_mode (MFS)

Definition This parameter defines the CS-PS co-ordination for paging.

Coding rules 3 possible values : 1, 2, 3; 1 == Network operation mode I ; 2 ==Network operation mode II ; 3 == Network operation mode III

Mandatory rules If the ’network_operation_mode (MFS)’ parameter is set to NMO IIthen all cells of the BSS must have NB_TS_MPDCH = 0.

Equal to network_operation_mode (BSC).


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 3 2

External Comment Any change will trigger a data reset of the GPUs. Stop and restart of(E)GPRS traffic in all the cells of the BSS.NMO I requires a Gs interface.



1012 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.167 (Normal Information Rate) - (NIR)

HMI Name Normal Information RateParameter Name

Logical Name NIR

Definition Normal Information Rate.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules CIR <= NIR <= CIR x (1 + EBS/CBS) <= ACCESS_RATE_BC

Recommended rules NIR=0 when direct access is used

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


kbit/s 0 1984 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1013 / 1278


6.2.168 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY) -(NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY)

HMI Name NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_BACKGROUND_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for Background Packet Flow Context, withprecedence parameter set to ’normal’

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 15




1014 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.169 (NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY) -(NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY)

HMI Name NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name NORMAL_PRECEDENCE_THP1_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for Interactive THP1 Packet FlowContext, with precedence parameter set to ’normal’

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1015 / 1278






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 9




1016 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09






Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1017 / 1278


6.2.172 (NS Priority) - (NS_Priority)

HMI Name NS PriorityParameter Name

Logical Name NS_Priority

Definition Priority of the NSVC, is used by the load sharing (used for Gb overFrame Relay interface).

Coding rules 1: lowest priority, 255:highest priority

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance NSVC


None 1 255 10




1018 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.173 (NSEI) - (NSEI)

HMI Name NSEIParameter Name

Logical Name NSEI

Definition NSE Identifier.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules The NSEI shall be unique per MFS.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance NSE


None 1 65535 None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1019 / 1278


6.2.174 (NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMIT) -(N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT)

HMI Name NstagnatingWindowDL_LIMITParameter Name

Logical Name N_stagnating_Window_DL_LIMIT

Definition This parameter defines the maximum number of consecutive PacketDownlink ACK/NACK or EGPRS Packet Downlink ACK/NACKmessages reporting the failure of progress of the RLC window duringthe active phase of a downlink TBF, before triggering an abnormalrelease of the DL TBF. This parameter is used in conjunction with theMIN_RLF_TIME_DL delay to decide if the DL TBF shall be released.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 256 32




1020 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.175 (NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMIT) -(N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT)

HMI Name NstagnatingWindowUL_LIMITParameter Name

Logical Name N_stagnating_Window_UL_LIMIT

Definition NstagnatingWindow limit above which a mono-slot uplink TBF aloneon its PDCH shall be released: the counter is incremented each timea Packet UL Ack/Nack fails in making the RLC window progress.For a multi-slot TBF or a TBF which shares its PDCH, the limit isproportional to the allocated bandwidth at the TBF establishment.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 256 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1021 / 1278


6.2.176 (NSVC Identifier) - (NSVCI)

HMI Name NSVC IdentifierParameter Name

Logical Name NSVCI

Definition NSVC identifier (used for Gb over Frame Relay interface).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance NSVC


None 1 65535 None




1022 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.177 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (BSC))

HMI Name PAN_DECParameter Name

Logical Name PAN_DEC (BSC)

Definition Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET ULACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182.

Coding rules Binary coded on 3 bits

Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_DEC (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1023 / 1278


6.2.178 (PAN_DEC) - (PAN_DEC (MFS))

HMI Name PAN_DECParameter Name

Logical Name PAN_DEC (MFS)

Definition Value decremented from MS N3102 counter when PACKET ULACK/NACK is not received before MS timer T3182.


Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_DEC (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




1024 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.179 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (BSC))

HMI Name PAN_INCParameter Name

Logical Name PAN_INC (BSC)

Definition Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET ULACK/NACK is received by MS.


Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_INC (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1025 / 1278


6.2.180 (PAN_INC) - (PAN_INC (MFS))

HMI Name PAN_INCParameter Name

Logical Name PAN_INC (MFS)

Definition Value incremented to MS N3102 counter when PACKET ULACK/NACK is received by MS.


Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_INC (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




1026 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.181 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (BSC))

HMI Name PAN_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name PAN_MAX (BSC)

Definition Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MSwhen N3102 <= 0.

Coding rules Possible values : 4, 8, 12...., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001,..., 111

Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_MAX (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 4 32 32




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1027 / 1278


6.2.182 (PAN_MAX) - (PAN_MAX (MFS))

HMI Name PAN_MAXParameter Name

Logical Name PAN_MAX (MFS)

Definition Maximum value for counter N3102. cell reselection is done by MSwhen N3102 <= 0.

Coding rules Possible values : 4, 8, 12,.., 32 respectively binary coded 000, 001,.., 111

Mandatory rules Equal to PAN_MAX (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 4 32 32




1028 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.183 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC))

HMI Name PC_MEAS_CHANParameter Name

Logical Name PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC)

Definition This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measurethe received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplinkpower control.

Coding rules 0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made on BCCH

Mandatory rules Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS).

Recommended rules PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1029 / 1278


6.2.184 (PC_MEAS_CHAN) - (PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS))

HMI Name PC_MEAS_CHANParameter Name

Logical Name PC_MEAS_CHAN (MFS)

Definition This parameter determines on which channel the MS shall measurethe received power level on the downlink for the purpose of the uplinkpower control.

Coding rules 0 : downlink measurements for power control shall be made onBCCH, 1 : downlink measurements for power control shall be madeon PDCH

Mandatory rules Equal to PC_MEAS_CHAN (BSC).

Recommended rules PC_MEAS_CHAN should be forced to PDCH in multiband cells

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 1




1030 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.185 (PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) -(PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)

HMI Name PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1

Definition Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for DL PDCHunit allocation distribution

Coding rules step size = 0.1 PDCH

Mandatory rules PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1<PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 0.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1031 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL PDCHunit allocation distribution


Mandatory rules PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 <PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2<PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 1




1032 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL PDCHunit allocation distribution


Mandatory rules PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2< PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 <PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 1.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1033 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL PDCHunit allocation distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 2




1034 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 2.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1035 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 3




1036 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 3.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1037 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 4




1038 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 <PD_DL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_9


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 4.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1039 / 1278


6.2.194 (PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) -(PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)

HMI Name PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1

Definition Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for DLTBF duration distribution.


Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 <PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 0.5




1040 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for DL TBFduration distribution


Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 <PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 <PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1041 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for DL TBFduration distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 2




1042 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for DL TBFduration distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1043 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 5




1044 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1045 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 20




1046 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1047 / 1278







Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_8 <PD_DL_TBF_DURATION_THR_9


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 100




1048 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.203 (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)

HMI Name PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1

Definition Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLCvolume carried by an DL TBF distribution


Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 500




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1049 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLCvolume carried by an DL TBF distribution


Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 <PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 1000




1050 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volumecarried by an DL TBF distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 2000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1051 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for LLC volumecarried by an DL TBF distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 3000




1052 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 5000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1053 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 10000




1054 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 20000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1055 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 50000




1056 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLCvolume carried by an DL TBF distribution


Mandatory rules PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_DL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 100000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1057 / 1278


6.2.212 (PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1) -(PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1)

HMI Name PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1

Definition Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for UL PDCHunit allocation distribution


Mandatory rules PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1<PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 0.5




1058 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL PDCHunit allocation distribution


Mandatory rules PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_1 <PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2<PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1059 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL PDCHunit allocation distribution


Mandatory rules PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_2< PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_3 <PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_4


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 1.5




1060 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL PDCHunit allocation distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1061 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 2.5




1062 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1063 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 3.5




1064 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1065 / 1278







Mandatory rules PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_8 <PD_UL_PDCH_UNIT_ALLOC_THR_9


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0.1 4.9 4.5




1066 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.221 (PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1) -(PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1)

HMI Name PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1

Definition Upper limit of the first band, lower limit of the second band for ULTBF duration distribution.


Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 <PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 0.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1067 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for UL TBFduration distribution


Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_1 <PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_2 <PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 1




1068 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for UL TBFduration distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1069 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for UL TBFduration distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 3




1070 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1071 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 10




1072 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1073 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 50




1074 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_8 <PD_UL_TBF_DURATION_THR_9


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.5 16383.5 100




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1075 / 1278


6.2.230 (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1) - (PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1)

HMI Name PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1Parameter Name

Logical Name PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1

Definition Upper limit of the 1st band, lower limit of the 2nd band for LLCvolume carried by an UL TBF distribution


Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 500




1076 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 2nd band, lower limit of the 3rd band for LLCvolume carried by an UL TBF distribution


Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_1 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_2 <PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_3


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 1000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1077 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 3rd band, lower limit of the 4th band for LLC volumecarried by an UL TBF distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 2000




1078 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09





Definition Upper limit of the 4th band, lower limit of the 5th band for LLC volumecarried by an UL TBF distribution




Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 3000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1079 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 5000




1080 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 10000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1081 / 1278









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 20000




1082 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09









Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 50000




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1083 / 1278





Definition Upper limit of the 9th band, lower limit of the 10th band for LLCvolume carried by an UL TBF distribution


Mandatory rules PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_8 < PD_UL_TBF_VOLUME_THR_9


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


byte 1 99999999 100000




1084 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.239 (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1) - (PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1)

HMI Name PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1Parameter Name

Logical Name PERSISTENCE_LEVEL_1

Definition This parameter indicates the values of the access persistence levelfor radio priority 1.

Coding rules Values : 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 16 coded on 4bits0 0 0 0 : persistence level 0, 0 0 0 1: persistence level 1, 0 01 0:persistence level 2, 0 0 1 1: persistence level 3, 0 1.0.0 :persistence level 4. . . . 1 1 1 0 : persistence level 14, 1 1 1 1: persistence level 16

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 16 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1085 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 16 0




1086 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 16 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1087 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 16 0




1088 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.243 (PFC_T6) - (PFC_T6)

HMI Name PFC_T6Parameter Name

Logical Name PFC_T6

Definition Timer guarding the Download-BSS-PFC procedure


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.1 10 0.5




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1089 / 1278


6.2.244 (PFC_T8) - (PFC_T8)

HMI Name PFC_T8Parameter Name

Logical Name PFC_T8

Definition Timer guarding the Modify-BSS-PFC procedure


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.1 10 0.5




1090 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.245 (PRACH_BUSY_THRES) - (PRACH_BUSY_THRES)

HMI Name PRACH_BUSY_THRESParameter Name

Logical Name PRACH_BUSY_THRES

Definition Received level above which a PRACH block is deemed busy.

Coding rules This parameter is encoded with a step size of 4 dB as follows:0: -110 dBm1: -106 dBm2: -102 dBm3: -98 dBm4: -94 dBm5: -90 dBm6: -86 dBm7: -82 dBm8: -78 dBm9: -74 dBm10: -70 dBm11: -66 dBm12: -62 dBm13: -58 dBm14: -54 dBm15: -50 dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm -110 -50 -106

External Comment Parameter used in dynamic allocation of secondary MasterPDCHalgorithm.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1091 / 1278


6.2.246 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS)

HMI Name PRIORITY_CLASSParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS

Definition HCS priority of the cell, used in NC0.

Coding rules Coded on 3 bits.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




1092 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.247 (PRIORITY_CLASS) - (GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n))

HMI Name PRIORITY_CLASSParameter Name

Logical Name GPRS_PRIORITY_CLASS(n)

Definition HCS priority of the adjacent cell, used in NC0.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None 0 7 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1093 / 1278


6.2.248 (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX) - (PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX)

HMI Name PS_PREF_BCCH_TRXParameter Name

Logical Name PS_PREF_BCCH_TRX

Definition Indicates whether or not the PS requests shall be preferentiallyserved with PDCH(s) of the BCCH TRX

Coding rules 0: No preference. The TRX ranking algorithm handles the BCCHTRX as a non-BCCH TRX.

1: PS requests preferentially served on BCCH TRX. The TRXranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the highestpreference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carryPS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX).

2 : PS requests served on BCCH TRX with lowest priority. TheTRX ranking algorithm ensures that the BCCH TRX has the lowestpreference to carry PS traffic (provided that the BCCH TRX can carryPS traffic, i.e. TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on that TRX).

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping /radio-hopping cell, Alcatel recommend to set this parameter to ’0’ inorder to reduce the likelihood of having to reduce the GMSK outputpower (see external comment).If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, setting thisparameter to ’0’ does not reduce the likelihood of having to reducethe GMSK output power since PS capable TRXs will hop on theBCCH carrier.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 2 0

1094 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


External Comment When set to ’1’ or ’2’, this parameter is only relevant if the BCCH TRXsupports PS traffic (i.e. if TRX_PREF_MARK = 0 on the BCCH TRX).If EGPRS is activated in a non-hopping or a non-hopping /radio-hopping cell, if the BCCH TRX can carry PS traffic and if theBCCH TRX is associated to a TRE hardware allowing the usage of8-PSK, the operator shall ensure that the difference in the meanoutput powers between GSMK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dBin order to be compliant with 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008requirements (or 4 dB if an SDCCH timeslot is defined on timeslotnumber 7 of the BCCH TRX).If EGPRS is activated in a base-band hopping cell, the operatorshall ensure that the difference in the mean output powers betweenGMSK and 8-PSK signals is less than 2 dB in order to be compliantwith 3GPP TS 45.005 and 3GPP TS 45.008 requirements (or 4 dB iftimeslot number 7 is not part of the PDCH groups).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1095 / 1278


6.2.249 (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN) - (QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN)

HMI Name QOS_SAFETY_MARGINParameter Name

Logical Name QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN

Definition Additional capacity (in terms of radio bandwidth and in terms oftransmission resources) which is reserved for a streaming TBF (RTPFC) to correctly fulfil its AGBR contract and to possibly convey othermultiplexed NRT PFC(s) of the same TBF. The part of this marginthat is not used by the streaming TBF may be used by other TBF(s).


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Setting QOS_SAFETY_MARGIN to 0% is not recommended (theGBR of some RT PFCs may turn out to be impossible to guarantee inthis case).

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


% 0 100 20

External Comment In case of IP transport in the BSS, UDP/IP headers are taken intoaccount in the bandwidth computation



1096 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.250 (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_EGPRS)

HMI Name R_AVERAGE_EGPRSParameter Name

Logical Name R_AVERAGE_EGPRS

Definition Average bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS

Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher thanthe useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_EGPRS_MCS (e.g. ifMAX_EGPRS_MCS = MCS9 => R_AVERAGE_EGPRS shall notbe higher than 59,2kbps).

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


bit/s 0 59200 30000

External Comment This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted,per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. Itis recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the averagemeasured bit rate in the cell.The default value corresponds to MCS-6.The max value corresponds to MCS-9.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1097 / 1278


6.2.251 (R_AVERAGE_GPRS) - (R_AVERAGE_GPRS)

HMI Name R_AVERAGE_GPRSParameter Name

Logical Name R_AVERAGE_GPRS

Definition Average bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in this cell

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS

Recommended rules R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher thanthe useful bitrate corresponding to MAX_GPRS_CS (e.g. ifMAX_GPRS_CS = CS2 => R_AVERAGE_GPRS shall not be higherthan 12kbps).

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


bit/s 0 20000 12000

External Comment This parameter represents the average bit rate that is targeted,per PDCH, in the cell with respect to the cell radio planning. Itis recommended not to set this bit rate higher than the averagemeasured bit rate in the cell.The default value corresponds to CS-2.The max value corresponds to CS-4.



1098 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.252 (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS) - (RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS)

HMI Name RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESISParameter Name

Logical Name RA_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS

Definition This parameter indicates in both STANDBY and READY state theadditional hysteresis which applies when selecting a cell in a newRouting Area.

Coding rules step size = 2 dB, Coded on 3 bits. 000=0 dB, 001=2 dB, ...111=14 dB

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dB 0 14 8




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1099 / 1278


6.2.253 (RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTER) - (RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS))

HMI Name RACH/PRACH_TA_FILTERParameter Name

Logical Name RACH_TA_FILTER (MFS)

Definition Timing Advance threshold for CHANNEL REQUIRED and PACKETCHANNEL REQUEST filtering.

Coding rules 64: no filtering

Mandatory rules Equal to RACH_TA_FILTER (BSC)

Recommended rules Disable the filtering for extended cells.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


bper 0 64 64

External Comment One unit corresponds to a distance of about 550m. CHANNELREQUIRED or PACKET CHANNEL REQUEST messages withTiming Advance greater or equal to RACH_TA_FILTER arediscarded.



1100 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.254 (RMIN_EGPRS) - (RMIN_EGPRS)

HMI Name RMIN_EGPRSParameter Name

Logical Name RMIN_EGPRS

Definition Minimal bitrate per PDCH for Edge capable terminals in this cell (at95 % or 90% confidence level or less %, depending on tolerable risk)

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules RMIN_EGPRS <= R_AVERAGE_EGPRS

Recommended rules If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = Falsethen the following condition must be respected: RMIN_EGPRS<= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS,TBF_DL_INIT_MCS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can bedowngraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP.R_MIN_EGPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than theuseful bitrate corresponding to Max_EGPRS_MCS. If the aboverecommended rule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can beaccepted by the BSS whereas it will not be possible to handle theirassociated GBR. This may result in RT PFC downgrades to BestEffort.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


bit/s 0 59200 20800

External Comment This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streamingPFC for Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. Itshould be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning.The default value corresponds to a bitrate between MCS-4 andMCS-5.The max value corresponds to MCS-9.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1101 / 1278


6.2.255 (RMIN_GPRS) - (RMIN_GPRS)

HMI Name RMIN_GPRSParameter Name

Logical Name RMIN_GPRS

Definition Minimal bitrate per PDCH for non-Edge capable terminals in thiscell cell (at 95 % or 90% confidence level or less, depending ontolerable risk)

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules RMIN_GPRS <= R_AVERAGE_GPRS

Recommended rules If EN_STREAMING = 1 and EN_CS_ADAPTATION_ACK = Falsethen the following condition must be respected: RMIN_GPRS<= useful bitrate corresponding to min (TBF_UL_INIT_CS,TBF_DL_INIT_CS). Otherwise the streaming PFC can bedowngraded to the Defaut Best Effort ABQP.R_MIN_GPRS shall not be set to a bitrate higher than the usefulbitrate corresponding to Max_GPRS_CS. If the above recommendedrule is not fulfilled, then some RT PFCs can be accepted by the BSSwhereas it will not be possible to handle their associated GBR. Thismay result in RT PFC downgrades to Best Effort.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


bit/s 0 20000 8000

External Comment This parameter is used to provide a guaranted Bit rate of streamingPFC for Non Edge capable MS, in the worst case radio condition. Itshould be set appropriately with respect to the cell radio planning.The default value corresponds to CS-1.The max value corresponds to CS-4.



1102 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.256 (Round trip delay MFS-MS) - (round_trip_delay)

HMI Name Round trip delay MFS-MSParameter Name

Logical Name round_trip_delay

Definition Round trip delay between the MFS and a MS, in TDM and IP mode.

Coding rules step size=10 ms

Mandatory rules - T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec- If GPRS traffic is carried between BTS and MFSthrough satellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), andAbis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the corresponding BT, thenEN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS must be equal to enabled


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 80 940 160

External Comment The round-trip delay is used by the RRM layers. The OMC-R and theMFS also use this parameter to determine whether or not GPRStraffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links as follows:- If round_trip_delay < 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFS considerthat GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestrial links,- If round_trip_delay >= 500 ms, the OMC-R and the MFSconsider that GPRS traffic is carried through one satellite link:either through Abis satellite links or Ater satellite links in caseAbis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM); or through a satellite linkbetween BTS and MFS in case Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP).

When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite linksin the serving cell, it is recommended to set the round_trip_delayparameter to [Delay due to satellite (540 ms) + Delay due to MFS-MSlink (160 ms)] = 700 ms.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1103 / 1278


6.2.257 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (BSC))

HMI Name Routing Area Code for GPRSParameter Name

Logical Name RA_CODE (BSC)

Definition Routing Area Code for GPRS.

Coding rules The initial special value -1 means that the RA code has still not beenset by the operator.

Mandatory rules - Equal to RA_CODE (MFS)- A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None -1 255 0




1104 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.258 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE (MFS))


Logical Name RA_CODE (MFS)

Definition Routing Area Code.

Coding rules 0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60)other values: external or unknown cell

Mandatory rules - Equal to RA_CODE (BSC)- A couple of mate extended cells (Extended inner + extended outer)shall have the same RA_CODE when they are PS capable


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None -1 255 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1105 / 1278


6.2.259 (Routing Area Code for GPRS) - (RA_CODE(n))


Logical Name RA_CODE(n)

Definition Routing Area Code of neighbour cells.

Coding rules 0...255 (significant value: 3GPP TS 04.60);other values: external or unknown cell.The special value of "-1" means that the RA code has still notbeen valued by the network provider or that the MFS shall set theSAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field to 0.

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If i) the target and serving cells belong to different PLMNs and ii) theRAC and LAC of the target cell are equal to the RAC and LAC of theserving cell, and iii) there is a PBCCH established in the servingcell, and iv) a cell reselection adjacency link is defined between theserving cell and the target cell, then it is recommended to set theRA_CODE to ’-1’. Otherwise, the MFS considers that the serving celland the target cell belong to the same routing area when settingthe SAME_RA_AS_SERVING_CELL field in the 04.60 PACKETSYSTEM INFORMATION TYPE 3/3bis messages.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


None -1 255 0

External Comment The special value of -1 means that the RA code has still not beenvalued by the operator or that the routing area of the serving cell isdifferent from the routing area of the target cell.



1106 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.260 (Routing Area Colour for GPRS) - (RA_COLOUR)

HMI Name Routing Area Colour for GPRSParameter Name

Logical Name RA_COLOUR

Definition Routing Area Colour for GPRS.

Coding rules Coded over 3 bits. the initial special value -1 means that the RAcodecolour has not yet been valued by the network provider.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0

External Comment Default value depends on the configuration. The value indicated hereis for implementation purposes.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1107 / 1278


6.2.261 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS))


Logical Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS)



Mandatory rules RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm -110 -47 -100




1108 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.262 (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN) - (RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS))


Logical Name RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS)



Mandatory rules RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(MFS) = RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN(n)(BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance adj


dBm -110 -47 -100




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1109 / 1278


6.2.263 (S) - (S)

HMI Name SParameter Name

Logical Name S

Definition Number of slots between 2 successive PACKET CHANNELREQUEST.

Coding rules Possible values are : 12, 15, 20, 30, 41, 55, 76, 109, 163, 217respectively binary coded : 0000, 0001, 0010,... ,1001

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater terrestrial links,it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successivePacket Channel Request messages is longer than 900 ms.

When the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellite links,it is recommended to set S so that the time between two successivePacket Channel Request messages is longer than 1400 ms.

The number of slots belonging to the MS’s PRACH between 2successive Packet Channel Request messages is a random valuedrawn randomly for each new retransmission with uniform distributionin the set (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1) with T = Tx_INT. The time in secondsbetween two Packet Channel Request messages is determined asa function of S, TX_INT and of the BS_PRACH_BLKS parameter.BS_PRACH_BLKS defines the number of blocks statically allocatedto the PRACH per 52 multiframe on each PCCCH.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 12 217 30




1110 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.264 (SGSNR) - (SGSNR)

HMI Name SGSNRParameter Name

Logical Name SGSNR

Definition Year corresponding to the version of ETSI/3GPP recommendationsused to implement SGSN software.

Coding rules 0 = SGSN is release ’98 or older; 1 = SGSN is release ’99 onwards

Mandatory rules EN_GB_FLEX is enabled only if SGSNR = 1.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment Any modification of the parameter leads the MFS to resetautonomously all the GPUs connected to this BSS.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1111 / 1278


6.2.265 (SMS_PRIORITY) - (SMS_PRIORITY)

HMI Name SMS_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name SMS_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined "SMS" PFC.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 15




1112 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.266 (T stop frame relay emission) - (T_STOP_FR_EMISSION)

HMI Name T stop frame relay emissionParameter Name

Logical Name T_STOP_FR_EMISSION

Definition Timer used to trigger restart of emission on a PVC (Frame Relay).


Mandatory rules Not changeable after MFS system initialization.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance PVC


ms 10 5000 100




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1113 / 1278


6.2.267 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (BSC))

HMI Name T_AVG_TParameter Name

Logical Name T_AVG_T (BSC)

Definition Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode.

Coding rules binary coded on 5 bits

Mandatory rules Equal to T_AVG_T (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 25 12




1114 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.268 (T_AVG_T) - (T_AVG_T (MFS))

HMI Name T_AVG_TParameter Name

Logical Name T_AVG_T (MFS)

Definition Signal strength filter period for power control in packet transfer mode.


Mandatory rules Equal to T_AVG_T (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 25 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1115 / 1278


6.2.269 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (BSC))

HMI Name T_AVG_WParameter Name

Logical Name T_AVG_W (BSC)

Definition Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode.


Mandatory rules Equal to T_AVG_W (MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 25 20




1116 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.270 (T_AVG_W) - (T_AVG_W (MFS))

HMI Name T_AVG_WParameter Name

Logical Name T_AVG_W (MFS)

Definition Signal strength filter period for power control in packet idle mode.


Mandatory rules Equal to T_AVG_W (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 25 20




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1117 / 1278


6.2.271 (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN) - (T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN)

HMI Name T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUANParameter Name

Logical Name T_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN

Definition This timer defines the duration of the delay introduced by the BSSto send the final Packet UL Ack/Nack message when releasing anUL TBF.

Coding rules step size : 100 ms ; 0 = 0 msec, 1 = 100 msec, 2 = 200 msec, etc

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


ms 0 2000 400

External Comment - The feature "delayed emission of the final Packet UL Ack/Nack"can be inhibited by setting the value 0 to the parameterT_DELAYED_FINAL_PUAN. When the feature is enabled, the timerduration should be long enough to let the server send its response tothe uplink PDUs received from the MS, while remaining short enoughin order not to jeopardise the sending of further uplink PDUs by theMS.- If GPRS traffic between one BTS and the MFS is carriedthrough satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), andAbis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the concerned BTS, and ifT_delayed_Final_PUAN < 540ms then the MS will wait for a delayequal to Max (540ms, T_delayed_Final_PUAN). This is due to thedelayed PMU-PTU interworking when in IP mode (PMU at MFS side,PTU at BTS side).Note: 540ms is the RTD with a satellite link.



1118 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.272 (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport)

HMI Name T_DL_GPRS_MeasReportParameter Name

Logical Name T_DL_GPRS_MeasReport

Definition Time period to request for a Packet Downlink Ack/Nack withmeasurements.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 60 3000 400




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1119 / 1278


6.2.273 (T_FLOW_CTRL_CELL) - (T_flow_ctrl_cell)

HMI Name T_FLOW_CTRL_CELLParameter Name

Logical Name T_flow_ctrl_cell

Definition Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-BVC message toSGSN.

Coding rules step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0 10 0




1120 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.274 (T_FLOW_CTRL_MS) - (T_flow_ctrl_ms)

HMI Name T_FLOW_CTRL_MSParameter Name

Logical Name T_flow_ctrl_ms

Definition Periodicity of emission of NM- FLOW-CONTROL-MS messagetowards the SGSN for GPRS and EGPRS Mobile Stations.

Coding rules step size=1sec, 0 means infinite timer

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0 250 10

External Comment 1) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS is set to "0", then the MS flow controlmechanism is inhibited;2) if T_Flow_Ctrl_MS has a non-null value, then "C< T_flow_ctrl_ms< Th". The parameters C and Th are defined in the 3GPP TS 08.18.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1121 / 1278


6.2.275 (T_GCH_CORR) - (Tcorr)

HMI Name T_GCH_CORRParameter Name

Logical Name Tcorr

Definition Timer to supervise clock drift correction loop for 16k channel.

Coding rules step size=100ms

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Tcorr > Trelease+240ms and Tcorr > Testab+240mswhere 240 ms represents the maximum delay in MAC layer betweenthe notification for a DBN correction and the application of this DBNcorrection.

It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- Tcorr = 0.8 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Aterterrestrial links in the serving cell,- Tcorr = 1.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellitelinks or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 0.5 2 0.8

External Comment HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCHchannels. Former HMI name Tcorr.



1122 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.276 (T_GCH_ESTAB) - (Testab)

HMI Name T_GCH_ESTABParameter Name

Logical Name Testab

Definition Supervision of loss of GCH link establishment for 16k channels.

Coding rules step size= 100 ms

Mandatory rules Treq_pending > Testab

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- Testab = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Aterterrestrial links in the serving cell,- Testab = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellitelinks or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 0.1 2 0.4

External Comment HMI name changed to precise that this timer is valid for GCHchannels. Former HMI name Testab.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1123 / 1278


6.2.277 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY)

HMI Name T_GCH_INACTIVITYParameter Name

Logical Name T_GCH_INACTIVITY

Definition Timer to postpone the release of the "unused" GCHs of the M-EGCHlink of a TRX (the condition for some GCHs of the M-EGCH link ofa TRX to become "unused" is that some TBFs established on thatTRX were released).


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules T_GCH_INACTIVITY > T_CANDIDATE_TBF_REALLOC in all thecells of the BSS.This constraints avoids as much as possible that some GCHs arereleased and reestablished again some moments later. This way, theT3 and T4 TBF reallocations can benefit from the GCHs which arecurrently unused, but still established.

If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in theGPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100%is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY andT_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 1 100 3

External Comment The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer comes to makea trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecomperformance:- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the higher is the GCHresource usage on the Ater interface.- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY timer, the lower is theaverage duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially ifthe GPRS traffic is carried through satellite.



1124 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.278 (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST) - (T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST)

HMI Name T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LASTParameter Name

Logical Name T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST

Definition Timer to postpone the release of the lastN_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS GCHs established in acell, when the last TBF has been released in the cell. There isno more (E)GPRS traffic in the cell, but keeping some GCHsestablished will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumptionin the cell (e.g. WAP, WEB).


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules If it is seen as an important goal to save Ater resources in theGPU, a value of Ater_Usage_Threshold_Short_Data < 100%is coherent with a low value of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY andT_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timers.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 1 200 20

External Comment That timer is relevant only if EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS isdisabled.

The setting of the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer comes to makea trade-off between the GCH resource usage and the Telecomperformance:- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the higher isthe GCH resource usage on the Ater interface.- The higher is the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer, the lower is theaverage duration of TBF establishments on (P)CCCH, especially ifthe GPRS traffic is carried through satellite links.This parameter may also be used to ensure that the BSS reserves atleast one GCH resource in the serving cell while the MS is engagedin a Web browsing session.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1125 / 1278


6.2.279 (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL) - (T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL)

HMI Name T_MAX_EXTENDED_ULParameter Name

Logical Name T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL

Definition Maximum duration of the extended uplink TBF phase


Mandatory rules T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- between 1 sec and 2 sec if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis andAter terrestrial links,- between 1.5 sec and 2.5 sec if GPRS traffic is carried either throughAbis satellite links or Ater satellite links.If Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for the concerned BTS, theoperator shall ensure that T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL +round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 100 4000 2000

External Comment If GPRS traffic between BTS and MFS is carried through satellite link(round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) =1 (IP) for the corresponding BTS, the duration of the extended ULphase in the MS is equal to this timer + 540ms. This is due to thedelayed PMU-PTU interworking when in IP mode (PMU at MFS side,PTU at BTS side).Note: 540ms is the RTD with a satellite link.



1126 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.280 (T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING) -(T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING)

HMI Name T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERINGParameter Name

Logical Name T_MAX_STREAMING_BUFFERING

Definition Time which multiplied by the GBR defines a buffer level above whichwe may consider the BSS failed to provide the GBR


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 8 100 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1127 / 1278


6.2.281 (T_NC_PING_PONG) - (T_NC_PING_PONG)

HMI Name T_NC_PING_PONGParameter Name

Logical Name T_NC_PING_PONG

Definition Time during which the ping-pong offset is applied.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 0 20000 5000




1128 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.282 (T_NC_REJ_CELL) - (T_NC_REJ_CELL)

HMI Name T_NC_REJ_CELLParameter Name

Logical Name T_NC_REJ_CELL

Definition Time during which a NC cell reselection is inhibited towards that celldue to a previous NC cell reselection failure on that cell.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 0 20000 5000

External Comment -



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1129 / 1278


6.2.283 (T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME) -(T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME)

HMI Name T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIMEParameter Name

Logical Name T_NETWORK_RESPONSE_TIME

Definition Maximum expected response time of a network server as seen fromthe MFS.

Coding rules step size: 100 ms

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


ms 100 5000 1600

External Comment 1) The response time corresponds to T1 T2 where T2 correspondsto the time at which a command is sent to the SGSN and T1 the timeat which the response is received on the MFS side. This command/ response is e.g. the LLC PDU containing an FTP GET and thefirst LLC PDU starting the file transfer. It can also be the LLC PDUcontaining an HTTP GET and the first LLC PDU starting the pagedownload.

2) The value of this timer defines the duration of the Delayed DL TBFRelease procedure. In case the servers to which the GGSN servingthe MFS is connected are not located at the same place, then themaximum server response time should be entered. However, notethat the higher this timer is, the longer TBF releases will be delayedand therefore the more resources are used up.



1130 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.284 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (BSC))

HMI Name T_PAG_PSParameter Name

Logical Name T_PAG_PS (BSC)

Definition This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message canremain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delayon Gb and A-bis interface.


Mandatory rules Equal to T_PAG_PS (MFS)

Recommended rules T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 0 25.5 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1131 / 1278


6.2.285 (T_PAG_PS) - (T_PAG_PS (MFS))

HMI Name T_PAG_PSParameter Name

Logical Name T_PAG_PS (MFS)

Definition This timer indicates the maximum time a PS PAGING message canremain in a Paging Group Queue. It includes the round-trip delayon Gb and A-bis interface.


Mandatory rules Equal to T_PAG_PS (BSC)

Recommended rules T_PAG_PS < T3313 (SGSN timer)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 0 25.5 3




1132 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.286 (T_PSI_PACCH) - (T_PSI_PACCH)

HMI Name T_PSI_PACCHParameter Name

Logical Name T_PSI_PACCH

Definition Scheduling period of PSI1, PSI13 or PSI14 on PACCH.

Coding rules step size =1sec,00000 == Deactivated PSI scheduling on PACCH,00001 == 1s,...11110 == T_PSI_PACCH = 30 sec

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0 30 14




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1133 / 1278


6.2.287 (T_RESEL) - (T_RESEL)

HMI Name T_RESELParameter Name

Logical Name T_RESEL

Definition Timer whose expiry allows a MS, which has performed an abnormalrelease with cell reselection, to reselect the previous cell.

Coding rules coded on 3 bits, 000= 5 sec, 001= 10 sec, 010 = 15 sec, 011 = 20sec, 100= 30 sec, 101 = 60 sec, 110 = 120 sec, 111 = 300 sec

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 5 300 5




1134 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.288 (T_RIM_DISABILITY) - (T_RIM_DISABILITY)

HMI Name T_RIM_DISABILITYParameter Name

Logical Name T_RIM_DISABILITY

Definition Timer supervising the disability of the adjacent target cell. When noRAN information has been received (no answer at the end of theretries or unknown destination), this parameter corresponds to theduration it is not possible to use the RIM NACC procedure for thistarget cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


mn 1 360 60




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1135 / 1278


6.2.289 (T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT) - (T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT)

HMI Name T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORTParameter Name

Logical Name T_RIM_MULTIPLE_REPORT

Definition Timer supervising reception of the following RAN Information withmultiple report. It allows to resynchronize the System Informationmessages with the remote entity in case of restart of the remoteentity.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


mn 15 360 60




1136 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.290 (T_RIM_RI) - (T_RIM_RI)

HMI Name T_RIM_RIParameter Name

Logical Name T_RIM_RI

Definition Timer supervising reception of RAN Information ACK

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 1 255 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1137 / 1278


6.2.291 (T_RIM_RIR) - (T_RIM_RIR)

HMI Name T_RIM_RIRParameter Name

Logical Name T_RIM_RIR

Definition Timer supervising reception of RAN Information

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 1 255 10




1138 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.292 (T_ul_assign_PCCCH) - (T_ul_assign_pccch)

HMI Name T_ul_assign_PCCCHParameter Name

Logical Name T_ul_assign_pccch

Definition The duration between the reception of the (EGPRS) Packet ChannelRequest message and one uplink radio block allocated to the MS.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- T_ul_asssign_pccch = 0.4 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abisand Ater terrestrial links in the serving cell,- T_ul_assign_pccch = 0.7 s if GPRS traffic is carried either throughAbis satellite links or Ater satellite links in the serving cell.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 0.1 0.7 0.4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1139 / 1278


6.2.293 (T3168) - (T3168 (BSC))



Definition This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packetUL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (caseof two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a ChannelRequest Description Information Element in a Packet DownlinkAck/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF).Broadcast in SI13 within the GPRS Cell Options IE.

Coding rules Coded on 3 bits as follows:001: 1000 ms010: 1500 ms011: 2000 ms100: 2500 ms101: 3000 ms110: 3500 ms111: 4000 ms.

Mandatory rules Equal to T3168 (MFS)

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Aterterrestrial links in the serving cell,- T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Atersatellite links (round_trip_delay >= 500ms) in the serving cell andAbis_transport_mode(MFS) = 0 (TDM).- T3168 = 2 s if GPRS traffic between the corresponding BTS and theMFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms),and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for this BTS.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


sec 1 4 1

External Comment The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS forgranting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also coverthe round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFSbefore the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the MobileStation. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this releaseof the Alcatel BSS.

1140 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1141 / 1278


6.2.294 (T3168) - (T3168 (MFS))


Logical Name T3168 (MFS)

Definition This timer defines the maximum time the MS waits for a packetUL assignment, after sending a Packet Resource Request (caseof two-phase UL TBF establishment) or after including a ChannelRequest Description Information Element in a Packet DownlinkAck/Nack (case of UL TBF establishment on a concurrent DL TBF).Broadcast in PSI1 within the GPRS Cell Options IE.

Coding rules Coded on 3 bits as follows:001: 1000 ms010: 1500 ms011: 2000 ms100: 2500 ms101: 3000 ms110: 3500 ms111: 4000 ms.

Mandatory rules Equal to T3168 (BSC)

Recommended rules It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:- T3168 = 1 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Aterterrestrial links,- T3168 = 1.5 s if GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks (round_trip_delay >= 500ms), and Abis_transport_mode(MFS)= 0 (TDM).- T3168 = 2 s if GPRS traffic between the corresponding BTS and theMFS is carried through satellite link (round_trip_delay >= 500ms),and Abis_transport_mode(MFS) = 1 (IP) for this BTS.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 1 4 1

External Comment The setting of T3168 should leave sufficient time to the MFS forgranting PDCHs for serving the UL TBF request, plus also coverthe round trip time and the possible queuing delay within the MFSbefore the Packet Uplink Assignment can be sent to the MobileStation. Therefore a value of 500 ms is not allowed in this releaseof the Alcatel BSS.

1142 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1143 / 1278


6.2.295 (T3192) - (T3192 (BSC))



Definition Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception ofthe final block by the MS.

Coding rules Coded on 3 bits as follows:0 0 0: 500 msec0 0 1: 1000 msec0 1 0: 1500 msec1 1 1: 200 msec

Mandatory rules Equal to T3192 (MFS)T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec

Recommended rules T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms)It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestriallinks in the serving cell:i) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and thedelayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. ifDRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)ii) T3192 = 500 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or thedelayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. ifDRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1)iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then :- some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayedphase, and- the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS,which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its readystate.

==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links orAter satellite links in the serving cell:i) T3192 = 1500 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and thedelayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. ifDRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)ii) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or thedelayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. ifDRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1)

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell

1144 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09



ms 200 1500 500

External Comment The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are notsupported in this release of the Alcatel BSS:0 1 1: 0 msec1 0 0: 80 msec1 0 1: 120 msec1 1 0: 160 msec



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1145 / 1278


6.2.296 (T3192) - (T3192 (MFS))



Definition Wait for release of the downlink TBF on MS side after reception ofthe final block by the MS.

Coding rules Coded on 3 bits as follows:0 0 0: 500 msec0 0 1: 1000 msec0 1 0: 1500 msec1 1 1: 200 msec

Mandatory rules Equal to T3192 (BSC)T3192 + T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay < 5 sec

Recommended rules T3192>MS-BSS roundtrip delay + RRBP maximum duration (60 ms)It is recommended to set this parameter as follows dependingwhether or not GPRS traffic is carried through Abis or Ater satellitelinks:==> Case GPRS traffic is carried through Abis and Ater terrestriallinks in the serving cell:i) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and thedelayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. ifDRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)ii) T3192 = 500 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or thedelayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. ifDRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1)iii) however, if T3192 is finally set to 200 msec, then :- some abnormal DL TBF release may occur during the delayedphase, and- the MS may not receive the NC2 deactivation order from the BSS,which may lead the MS to send useless PMR before leaving its readystate.

==> Case GPRS traffic is carried either through Abis satellite links orAter satellite links in the serving cell:i) T3192 = 1500 ms if the non-DRX mode is not activated and thedelayed DL TBF release mode is not activated in the cell (i.e. ifDRX_TIMER_MAX = 0 and EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 0)ii) T3192 = 1000 ms if the non-DRX mode is activated or thedelayed DL TBF release mode is activated in the cell (i.e. ifDRX_TIMER_MAX > 0 or EN_DELAYED_DL_TBF_REL = 1).

In IP mode, the operator shall ensure that T3192 +T_MAX_EXTENDED_UL + round_trip_delay_bts_ms < 5 sec.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell

1146 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09



ms 200 1500 500

External Comment The following values ofT3192 defined in the 3GPP TS 04.60 are notsupported in this release of the Alcatel BSS:0 1 1: 0 msec1 0 0: 80 msec1 0 1: 120 msec1 1 0: 160 msec



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1147 / 1278


6.2.297 (T3212) - (T3212 (MFS))



Definition This timer indicates to the MS the delay between two consecutivePeriodic Location Update procedures.

Coding rules 0: no periodic location update, coded on 8 bits

Mandatory rules Equal to T3212 (BSC)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


6 mn 0 255 30




1148 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.298 (TBF_CS_DL) - (TBF_CS_DL)

HMI Name TBF_CS_DLParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_CS_DL

Definition Threshold defining the number of consecutive PACKET DOWNLINKACK/NACK not received above which the Coding Scheme of a DLacknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to CS-1.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 15 8

External Comment If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Aterterrestrial link, in case where N3105_LIMIT < TBF_CS_DL thenthe loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger linkadaptation but TBF release.If the GPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Ater satellitelink, in case where N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_CS_DL thenthe loss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger linkadaptation but TBF release.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1149 / 1278


6.2.299 (TBF_CS_UL) - (TBF_CS_UL)

HMI Name TBF_CS_ULParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_CS_UL

Definition Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times thenetwork receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing fromthe MS having a monoslot GPRS TBF before changing the codingscheme to CS1. For a multislot GPRS TBF, TBF_CS_UL_limit :=TBF_CS_UL x n_allocated


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 64 32




1150 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.300 (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD)

HMI Name TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_CS3_BLER_PERIOD

Definition Defines the window size required to estimate the CS3 BLER. Thewindow size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 512 32




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1151 / 1278


6.2.301 (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD) - (TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD)

HMI Name TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_CS4_BLER_PERIOD

Definition Defines the window size required to estimate the CS4 BLER. Thewindow size is expressed as a number of DL RLC data blocks.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 512 32




1152 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.302 (TBF_DL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_CS)

HMI Name TBF_DL_INIT_CSParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_DL_INIT_CS

Definition Value of the downlink coding scheme when the link adaptationalgorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in caseof TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of thedownlink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm isenabled.

Coding rules 0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4

Mandatory rules TBF_DL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 4 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1153 / 1278


6.2.303 (TBF_MCS_DL) - (TBF_MCS_DL)

HMI Name TBF_MCS_DLParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_MCS_DL

Definition Threshold defining the number of consecutive EGPRS PACKETDOWNLINK ACK/NACK not received above which the MCS of a DLacknowledged or unacknowledged DL TBF is changed to MCS-1.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 15 12

External Comment If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis terrestrial link and Aterterrestrial link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DLthen the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DL ACK/NACK will nottrigger link adaptation but TBF release.If the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abis satellitel link or Atersatellite link, in case where EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE< TBF_MCS_DL then the loss of consecutive EGPRS Packet DLACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation but TBF release.



1154 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.304 (TBF_MCS_UL) - (TBF_MCS_UL)

HMI Name TBF_MCS_ULParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_MCS_UL

Definition Threshold defining the maximum number of consecutive times thenetwork receives an invalid UL RLC data block or nothing from theMS having a monoslot EGPRS TBF before changing the codingscheme to MCS1. For a multislot EGPRS TBF, TBF_MCS_UL_limit:= TBF_MCS_UL x n_allocated_timeslots.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 192 32




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1155 / 1278


6.2.305 (TBF_UL_INIT_CS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_CS)

HMI Name TBF_UL_INIT_CSParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_UL_INIT_CS

Definition Value of the uplink coding scheme when the link adaptation algorithmis disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or in case of TBFresumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of the uplinkcoding scheme when the link adaptation algorithm is enabled.

Coding rules 0 : CS1, 1 : CS2, 2 : CS3, 3 : CS4

Mandatory rules TBF_UL_INIT_CS <= MAX_GPRS_CS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 4 2

External Comment Exception cases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH whenlink adaptation is enabled.



1156 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.306 (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING) - (THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING)

HMI Name THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKINGParameter Name

Logical Name THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING

Definition Threshold above which the load of the serving cell is considered in ahigh load situation in the NC2 cell ranking process

Coding rules Step size of 10%0 : 0%; 1: 10%; .... 10 : 100%

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 100 0

External Comment This parameter is only relevant if the parameterNETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "2: NC2 modeof operation for R99 onwards MS" or "3: NC2 mode of operation forall MS".

The serving cell is considered in a low load situation whenTHR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING = 0 %. The value of 0 % deactivatesthe load evaluation in the serving cell.

The load situation of external cells is unknown in the serving cell.The BSS then computes the NC2 load of those cells as follows:- If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to a value lowerthan 100 %, then the cell is considered in a low load situation.- If the threshold THR_NC2_LOAD_RANKING is set to 100 %, thenthe cell is considered in an high load situation



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1157 / 1278


6.2.307 (TOM8_PRIORITY) - (TOM8_PRIORITY)

HMI Name TOM8_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name TOM8_PRIORITY

Definition Defines the relative priority used for the pre-defined TOM8 PacketFlow Context

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 4 15 15




1158 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.308 (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR)

HMI Name TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THRParameter Name

Logical Name TX_EFFICIENCY_ACK_THR

Definition Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a badtransmission efficiency in acknowledged mode.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


% 0 100 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1159 / 1278


6.2.309 (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR)

HMI Name TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THRParameter Name

Logical Name TX_EFFICIENCY_NACK_THR

Definition Threshold below which the TBF is released because of a badtransmission efficiency in unacknowledged mode.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


% 0 100 15




1160 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.310 (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)

HMI Name TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD

Definition Number of received RLC data blocks for GPRS TBF after whichTX_EFFICIENCY is computed.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 500 200




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1161 / 1278


6.2.311 (TX_INT) - (TX_INT)

HMI Name TX_INTParameter Name

Logical Name TX_INT

Definition Number of PRACH timeslots to spread transmission of PACKETCHANNEL REQUEST.

Coding rules Possible values are : 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25,32, 50, coded from 0000 to 1111

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules It is recommended to set TX_INT so that the correspondingspreading time is about 240 ms.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 2 50 8




1162 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.312 (TX_INTEGER) - (Tx_integer (MFS))

HMI Name TX_INTEGERParameter Name

Logical Name Tx_integer (MFS)

Definition Number of RACH timeslots that spread transmission of CHANNELREQUEST.

Coding rules Possible values are:3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32,50 respectively binary coded from 0000 to 1111

Mandatory rules Equal to Tx_Integer (BSC)

Recommended rules When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater terrestrial links, itis recommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF= 0TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1.

When the GPRS is supported through Abis or Ater satellite links, it isrecommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 whatever the configuration of the CCCH.

The number of slots belonging to the MS’s RACH between 2successive Channel Request messages is a random value drawnrandomly for each new retransmission with uniform distribution in theset (S, S+1, ...,S+T-1). With T = Tx_Integer and S depending on theCCCH configuration as shown below:

1) for non combined CCCH:- Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 –> S = 55 RACH frames (i.e. 253.8 ms)- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 –> S = 76 RACH frames (i.e. 349.6 ms)- Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 –> S = 109 RACH frames (i.e. 501.4 ms)- Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 –> S = 163 RACH frames (i.e. 749.8 ms)Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 –> S = 217 RACH frames (i.e. 998.2 ms)

2) for combined CCCH:- Tx_Integer = 3, 8, 14, 50 –> S = 41 RACH frames (i.e. 357.5 ms)- Tx_Integer = 4, 9, 16 –> S = 52 RACH frames (i.e. 453.4 ms)- Tx_Integer = 5, 10, 20 –> S = 58 RACH frames (i.e. 505.7 ms)- Tx_Integer = 6, 11, 25 –> S = 86 RACH frames (i.e. 749.9 ms)- Tx_Integer = 7, 12, 32 –> S = 115 RACH frames (i.e. 1002.8 ms)

Note:- In the non-combined CCCH configuration, there are 51 RACHframes per 51-multiframe- In the combined CCCH configuration, there are 27 RACH framesper 51-multiframe.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1163 / 1278


Instance cell


None 3 50 32

External Comment When EN_GPRS=1, it is recommended to set:TX_INTEGER = 32 if the CCCH is not combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF= 0TX_INTEGER = 12 if the CCCH is combined, i.e. CCCH_CONF = 1



1164 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.313 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject) - (WI_PR)

HMI Name Wait Indication for Packet Access RejectParameter Name

Logical Name WI_PR

Definition Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECTor PACKET ACCESS REJECT in the nominal case (see theWI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD parameter for the particular cases).

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 0 255 3




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1165 / 1278


6.2.314 (Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject when CPU overload)- (WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD)

HMI Name Wait Indication for Packet Access Reject whenCPU overload

Parameter Name

Logical Name WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD

Definition Wait indication used in IMMEDIATE ASSIGNMENT REJECT orPACKET ACCESS REJECT in case of PPC CPU or memoryoverload.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules WI_PR <= WI_PR_CPU_OVERLOAD


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


sec 0 255 10




1166 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


6.2.315 (Weight_P10) - (Weight_P10)

HMI Name Weight_P10Parameter Name

Logical Name Weight_P10

Definition Weight to be used for a TBF/PFC of priority 10


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules weight_Px >= weight_Py if x<y

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1167 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 5




1168 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1169 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 3




1170 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 2




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1171 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 1




1172 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 12




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1173 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 11




1174 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 10




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1175 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 9




1176 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 8




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1177 / 1278







Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 15 7




1178 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

7 E-GPRS Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1179 / 1278


7.1 Network (CDE)

7.1.1 (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS) - (EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS)

HMI Name EN_DL_RETRANS_BTSParameter Name

Logical Name EN_DL_RETRANS_BTS

Definition This flag enables / disables downlink retransmission in the BTS.


Mandatory rules –



Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0 1 1

External Comment DL retransmission in the BTS will be disabled by the MFS in thecells having an Abis or an Ater satellite link (whatever the TRE type).In a cell with terrestrial Abis and Ater links, this feature is disabledfor G3 TREs only.



1180 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.1.2 (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN) - (MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN)

HMI Name MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAINParameter Name

Logical Name MIN_THROUGHPUT_GAIN

Definition Minimum throughput gain required to be provided to the MS whenperforming a T2 or T3 TBF reallocation.

Coding rules step size = 0,1

Mandatory rules –



Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 0,1 5 0,3

External Comment Increasing the value of this parameter above 0,3 might block somereallocations for mobiles having a high multislot class (multislot class>= 30).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1181 / 1278


7.1.3 (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS) - (N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS)

HMI Name N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESSParameter Name

Logical Name N_GCH_FAST_PS_ACCESS

Definition Two definitions are possible :- If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "enabled" : number ofGCHs required to be established due to the "Fast Initial PS Access"feature,- If EN_FAST_INITIAL_GPRS_ACCESS = "disabled" : number ofGCHs to keep established when there is no more (E)GPRS traffic ina cell (while the T_GCH_INACTIVITY_LAST timer is running). ThoseGCHs will be useful in case of (E)GPRS traffic resumption in the cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –



Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance MFS


None 1 5 1




1182 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2 Site (CAE)

7.2.1 (ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION) -(ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION)

HMI Name ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATIONParameter Name

Logical Name ALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION

Definition Allows EDA operations for mobile stations in DTM mode.

Coding rules 0: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is not allowed,1: the usage of EDA for mobile stations in DTM mode is allowed.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment This flag is relevant only if DTM and EDA are both activated.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1183 / 1278


7.2.2 (BEP_PERIOD) - (BEP_PERIOD)

HMI Name BEP_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name BEP_PERIOD

Definition Filter constant for EGPRS channel quality measurements.

Coding rules coded on 4 bits as follows:0: 11: 22: 33: 44: 55: 76: 107: 128: 159: 2010: 2511: Reserved for future use12: Reserved for future use13: Reserved for future use14: Reserved for future use15: Reserved for future use

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 25 10

External Comment The BEP_PERIOD parameter defines the forgetting factor used inthe MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP averaging at the MS side.In case of cell without frequency hopping and without "fast" mobiles(i.e. not motorway or TGV coverage), it is advised to set a highervalue (e.g. 25) in order to avoid spurious MCS changes causinghigher BLER and throughput loss.



1184 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2.3 (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD) - (E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD)

HMI Name E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name E_TX_EFFICIENCY_PERIOD

Definition Number of received radio blocks for an EGPRS TBF after whichE_TX_EFFICIENCY is computed.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 500 200




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1185 / 1278


7.2.4 (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL) - (EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL)

HMI Name EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVELParameter Name

Logical Name EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL

Definition Activation level of Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).

Coding rules 0: EDA activated for all mobile stations (supporting the feature),1: EDA activated for R’99-onwards mobile stations (supporting thefeature),2: EDA activated for Rel-4-onwards mobile stations (supporting thefeature).

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 2 0

External Comment -This parameter is relevant only if EDA is activated (EN_EDAparameter).-The activation level may provide an artificial mean to limit theinter-operability risks due to mobile stations with uncorrected EDAimplementation (EDA is a R’97 feature but has been completelyclarified in Rel-6).- R’99 is detected through the Revision Level Indicator.- A mobile station is considered as Rel4-onwards compliant if itindicates the field "GERAN Feature Package 1" in its MS RadioAccess Capability.



1186 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2.5 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT) - (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT)

HMI Name EGPRS_N3105_LIMITParameter Name

Logical Name EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT

Definition For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abisterrestrial link and Ater terrestrial link, this parameter defines themaximum number of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or PacketControl Acknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radiointerface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. Thisparameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delayto decide if the DL TBF shall be released.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 32 20

External Comment If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT < TBF_MCS_DL then the loss ofconsecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger link adaptation butTBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit has to be set in order not torelease a DL TBF in case of transient bad radio conditions.The pollingfrequency depends on Ack_factor, T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MSmultislot class and on the number of TBFs per PDCH.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1187 / 1278


7.2.6 (EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE) -(EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE)

HMI Name EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITEParameter Name

Logical Name EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE

Definition For a DL EGPRS TBF, if the EGPRS traffic is carried through Abissatellite link or Ater satellite link, this parameter defines the maximumnumber of expected Packet Downlink ACK/NACK or Packet ControlAcknowledgement messages consecutively lost on the radiointerface, before triggering an abnormal release of the DL TBF. Thisparameter is used in conjunction with the MIN_RLF_TIME_DL delayto decide if the DL TBF shall be released.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 32 24

External Comment If EGPRS_N3105_LIMIT_SATELLITE < TBF_MCS_DL then theloss of consecutive packet DL ACK/NACK will not trigger linkadaptation but TBF release. EGPRS_N3105_Limit_Satellite hasto be set in order not to release a DL TBF in case of transient badradio conditions.The polling frequency depends on Ack_factor,T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport, MS multislot class and on the numberof TBFs per PDCH.



1188 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2.7 (EN_EDA) - (EN_EDA)

HMI Name EN_EDAParameter Name

Logical Name EN_EDA

Definition Enables Extended Dynamic Allocation (EDA).

Coding rules 0: EDA not activated,1: EDA activated

Mandatory rules EN_EDA = 0 in case of extended cell


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment When EDA is activated, its activation domain isgiven by the EDA_MS_ACTIVATION_LEVEL andALLOW_DTM_EDA_COMBINATION parameters.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1189 / 1278


7.2.8 (EN_IR_UL) - (EN_IR_UL_per_cell)

HMI Name EN_IR_ULParameter Name

Logical Name EN_IR_UL_per_cell

Definition Enables/Disables Incremental redundancy for the uplink TBF in theBSS.

Coding rules 0: Disable, 1: Enable

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Among the features Incremental Redundancy inuplink (EN_IR_UL) and RLC resegmentation in uplink(EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell), Alcatel recommends toenable first the Incremental Redundancy in Uplink. The activationof both at the same time may reduce the gain of the IncrementalRedundancy

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment The Incremental Redundancy for the uplink TBF feature is supportedonly from G4 onwards BTSs.



1190 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2.9 (EN_MCS1_in_CRP) - (EN_MCS1_in_CRP)

HMI Name EN_MCS1_in_CRPParameter Name

Logical Name EN_MCS1_in_CRP

Definition Enables the forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF incontention resolution phase at one-phase access to make this phasemore robust.

Coding rules 0: the BSS does not force uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 duringthe contention resolution phase at one-phase access.1: the BSS forces uplink EGPRS TBF to use MCS-1 during thecontention resolution phase at one-phase access.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 1

External Comment The forced usage of MCS-1 for uplink EGPRS TBF in contentionresolution phase at one-phase access corresponds to the behaviourin B9.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1191 / 1278


7.2.10 (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL) -(EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell)

HMI Name EN_RESEGMENTATION_ULParameter Name

Logical Name EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL_per_cell

Definition Enables/Disables the resegmentation for the uplink TBF in the cell, incase of RLC in acknowledged mode.

Coding rules 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Among the features Incremental Redundancy in uplink (EN_IR_UL)and RLC resegmentation in uplink (EN_RESEGMENTATION_UL),Alcatel recommends to enable first the Incremental Redundancy inUplink. The activation of both at the same time may reduce the gainof the Incremental Redundancy

Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




1192 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2.11 (INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS) -(INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS)

HMI Name INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRSParameter Name

Logical Name INIT_PDCH_SHORT_DATA_EGPRS

Definition Number of PDCHs on which MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DLand MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL are targeted whenestablishing GCHs for an EGPRS TBF associated to a "short data"MS transfer.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 8 3

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- Parameter change: No impact on the telecom service, on goingTBF are not disrupted. Change applied on current TBF and newTBF established after modification



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1193 / 1278


7.2.12 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL) -(MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL)

HMI Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DLParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL

Definition Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the DL EGPRSTBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer.

Coding rules 1: MCS-1 coded as 02: MCS-2 coded as 13: MCS-3 coded as 24: MCS-4 coded as 35: MCS-5 coded as 46: MCS-6 coded as 57: MCS-7 coded as 68: MCS-8 coded as 79: MCS-9 coded as 8

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In order to avoid establishing too many GCHs duringthe "short data" MS transfer phases, it is recommendedthat MAX [MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL,MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL] <= MIN[TBF_DL_INIT_MCS, TBF_UL_INIT_MCS].This rule also tends to reduce the TBF blockingrate in the cell (by recommending low values forMAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL/UL) and to simplifythe cell configuration.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 9 1

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- Setting this parameter to MCS-2 might introduce some problems(because a MCS-2 block consumes exactly 1.00 GCH and mighttherefore block some of the MFS-BTS signalling messages to besent in the M-EGCH link in DL).- If MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_DL is strictly higher thanMAX_EGPRS_MCS, then MAX_EGPRS_MCS is used instead.- Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impacton the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in caseof value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferringwith the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupteddue to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.

1194 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1195 / 1278


7.2.13 (MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL) -(MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL)

HMI Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_ULParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL

Definition Maximum Modulation and Coding Scheme used for the UL EGPRSTBFs associated to a "short data" MS transfer.

Coding rules 1: MCS-1 coded as 02: MCS-2 coded as 13: MCS-3 coded as 24: MCS-4 coded as 35: MCS-5 coded as 46: MCS-6 coded as 57: MCS-7 coded as 68: MCS-8 coded as 79: MCS-9 coded as 8

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 9 2

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- If MAX_EGPRS_MCS_SHORT_DATA_UL is strictly higher thanMAX_EGPRS_MCS, then MAX_EGPRS_MCS is used instead.- Parameter change: In case of value increasing, there is no impacton the telecom service, on going TBF are not disrupted. But in caseof value decreasing, the established TBF will continue transferringwith the previous limit, so it may happen that some TBF are disrupteddue to the possible minimum number of GCH decreasing.



1196 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2.14 (MCS_AVG_PERIOD) - (MCS_AVG_PERIOD)

HMI Name MCS_AVG_PERIODParameter Name

Logical Name MCS_AVG_PERIOD

Definition Filtering period used for calculation of the forgetting factor applied tothe current UL MEAN_BEP and CV_BEP samples in the averagingModulation and Coding Scheme adaptation filter


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


sec 0.02 5 0.1




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1197 / 1278


7.2.15 (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU) - (N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU)

HMI Name N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPUParameter Name

Logical Name N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU

Definition Number of free 64k Ater TSs that are kept "in reserve" in order tobe able to serve some prioritary requests in cells managed by theGPU. The prioritary requests are the GCH establishment requestslaunched when the first TBF has to be established in a cell (useful toguarantee that MM traffic will be supported in any cell at any time).

In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU = 0, then no Ater margin ismanaged.In case N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU > 0, RRM will ensure thatN_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU 64k Ater TSs are always free (i.e. notused by a GCH in the GPU). From then on, only prioritary requestswill be allowed to establish some GCHs with those Ater resources.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 0 10 2

External Comment - Applicable only to TDM mode.- Increasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU will make theaverage number of unused Ater nibbles in the GPU increase. Thatcorresponds to a loss of Ater resources on the field, as the on-goingTBF traffic will never "benefit from the margin of Ater resources". But,on the other hand, the likelihood of not serving a prioritary request inthe GPU will be become very low.- Decreasing the value of N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU (to a nonnull value) will make it possible that prioritary requests cannot beserved in case several such requests have to be served in a shortperiod of time (i.e. before having had the time to "fill the Ater margin"up again), especially if the requests have to be served on severaldifferent DSPs (one 64k Ater TS will be consumed by each DSP).- Setting N_ATER_TS_MARGIN_GPU to 0 will make it possible thecases where prioritary requests cannot be served at all.



1198 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2.16 (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA) - (N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA)

HMI Name N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDAParameter Name

Logical Name N_UL_BIAS_FOR_EDA

Definition Minimum number of consecutive significantly-uplink biases observedduring a transfer to allow a mobile station to use Extended DynamicAllocation.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance BSS


None 1 64 1

External Comment This parameter can allow using EDA only in case of big UL transfers



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1199 / 1278


7.2.17 (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport) - (T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport)

HMI Name T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReportParameter Name

Logical Name T_DL_EGPRS_MeasReport

Definition Time period to request for an EGPRS Packet Downlink Ack/Nackwith measurements.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


ms 60 3000 200




1200 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


7.2.18 (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_DL_INIT_MCS)

HMI Name TBF_DL_INIT_MCSParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_DL_INIT_MCS

Definition Value of the downlink modulation and coding scheme when the linkadaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start or incase of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) of thedownlink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptationalgorithm is enabled.

Coding rules 0 : MCS-11 : MCS-22 : MCS-33 : MCS-44 : MCS-55 : MCS-66 : MCS-77 : MCS-88 : MCS-9

Mandatory rules TBF_DL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 9 3

External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1201 / 1278


7.2.19 (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS) - (TBF_UL_INIT_MCS)

HMI Name TBF_UL_INIT_MCSParameter Name

Logical Name TBF_UL_INIT_MCS

Definition Value of the uplink modulation and coding scheme when the linkadaptation algorithm is disabled or initial value (e.g. at TBF start orin case of TBF resumption with CS_MAX_IDLE_PERIOD expiry) ofthe uplink modulation and coding scheme when the link adaptationalgorithm is enabled.

Coding rules 0 : MCS-11 : MCS-22 : MCS-33 : MCS-44 : MCS-55 : MCS-66 : MCS-77 : MCS-88 : MCS-9

Mandatory rules TBF_UL_INIT_MCS <= MAX_EGPRS_MCS


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


None 1 9 3

External Comment The parameter is significant only if EN_EGPRS is enabled. Exceptioncases apply for uplink TBF establishment on PACCH when linkadaptation is enabled.



1202 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

8 DTM Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1203 / 1278


8.1 Site (CAE)

8.1.1 (EN_DTM) - (EN_DTM)

HMI Name EN_DTMParameter Name

Logical Name EN_DTM

Definition Enables/disables the support of dual transfer mode


Mandatory rules EN_DTM may be set to 1 only if :-CELL_RANGE = 0-MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD > 1


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment ((E)GPRS is mandatory for DTM operation, and at least 2 PDCHsare required in the PS zone for allocation of DTM resources to (atleast) one DTM call, therefore, MAX_PDCH_HIGH_LOAD shall atleast be equal to 2.



1204 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


8.1.2 (MAX_LAPDM) - (MAX_LAPDM)

HMI Name MAX_LAPDMParameter Name

Logical Name MAX_LAPDM

Definition Maximum number of LAPDm frames on which a layer 3 can besegmented into and be sent on the main DCCH.

Coding rules Coded on 3 bits:000 : 5001 : 6....111 : 12

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 5 12 7




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1205 / 1278


8.1.3 (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30) - (N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30)

HMI Name N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30Parameter Name

Logical Name N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30

Definition Number of TCH usage information update periods to be waited bythe BSC before moving the TCH of a DTM capable MS from the PSzone to the CS zone (intracell handover cause 30)."zero" means that the feature "avoid ping-pong between CS and PSzones for DTM MS" is not activated.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 10 0

External Comment - Parameter change : no impact on the telecom service. Changeapplied on the handovers cause 30 detected after the modification(didn’t apply on running timers).- Function available on BSC Evolution only.- the delay applied by the BSC is betweenN_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 * TCH_INFO_PERIOD and(N_DELAYED_HO_CAUSE30 + 1) * TCH_INFO_PERIOD



1206 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

9 2G-LTE Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1207 / 1278


9.1 Site (CAE)

9.1.1 (CI_LTE) - (CI_LTE)

HMI Name CI_LTEParameter Name

Logical Name CI_LTE

Definition This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of an external LTE (FDDor TDD) cell as defined in 3GPP TS 36.300.

Coding rules Binary value on 28 bits is expanded to 32 bits (with the four MostSignificant Bits set to "1").

Mandatory rules (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE and CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify aLTE cell inside the OMC


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


None 0 268435455 None

External Comment - The CI_LTE is equivalent to the long/standard eNode-B Id.- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.



1208 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.2 (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) - (DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G)

HMI Name DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3GParameter Name

Logical Name DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G

Definition Default priority associated to any UARFCN not explicitelybroadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capableMS/UE.

Coding rules step size = 1"0" is the lowest priority,"7" the highest

Mandatory rules The DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G of a given BSS shall be different fromany priority (GERAN_PRIORITY) of its related 2G cells (which has atleast one neighbour 3G or LTE cell for reselection), and different fromany priority (PRIORITY_3G and PRIORITY_LTE) of all those targetneighbour 3G and LTE cells for reselection.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 7 3

External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts SystemInformation Broadcasting. Change applied immediately aftermodification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicatedPacket Measurement Order messages of the current calls.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1209 / 1278


9.1.3 (DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G) - (DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G)

HMI Name DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3GParameter Name

Logical Name DEFAULT_QRXLEVMIN_3G

Definition Default minimum received level associated to any UARFCN notexplicitly broadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by aLTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules Coded_value = (dBm + 119) / 2, step size = 2 dBm

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


dBm -119 -57 -119




1210 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.4 (DEFAULT_THRESH_3G) - (DEFAULT_THRESH_3G)

HMI Name DEFAULT_THRESH_3GParameter Name

Logical Name DEFAULT_THRESH_3G

Definition Default threshold associated to any UARFCN not explicitlybroadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capableMS/UE.

Coding rules Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2 dB

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


dB 0 62 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1211 / 1278


9.1.5 (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION) -(EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION)

HMI Name EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION

Definition Enables/Disables the GSM to E-UTRAN FDD cell reselection anddefines the LTE search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state.The adjacent EUARFCNs can be configured at LTE cell level only(ARFCN_LTE).Those EUARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.

Coding rules 0: Disabled,1: Enabled with LTE search activated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state,2: Enabled with LTE search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state,3: Enabled with LTE search activated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1,4: Enabled with LTE search activated with flexible priority while theUE/MS is in GMM ready state.

Mandatory rules - Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-workingare exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the sametime a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cellfor which (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)and (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 orEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0).- EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>disabled at the same time.- EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>disabled at the same time.- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 2and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION = 0.- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or(EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)- It is not allowed to haveEN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 if the cell isowned by a BSC connected to a legacy MFS.- if both EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, thenthey shall have the same value.

Recommended rules Value 3 should be used only in case of good LTE FDD coverage.

Category Site (CAE)

1212 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 4 0

External Comment - If EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If theNETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operationfor R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel4 onwardsMS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the LTE search issystematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode throughthe Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This LTE searchdeactivation is then performed independently of the value of theEN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts SystemInformation Broadcasting. Change applied immediately aftermodification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicatedChannel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of thecurrent calls.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1213 / 1278


9.1.6 (EUARFCN) - (ARFCN_LTE(FDD))

HMI Name EUARFCNParameter Name

Logical Name ARFCN_LTE(FDD)

Definition Downlink FDD E-UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency ChannelNumber (EUARFCN) of an external LTE FDD cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules Only the following downlink EUARFCN ranges are standardized forFDD:I) 0 599 andII) 600 1199 andIII) 1200 1949 andIV) 1950 2399 andV) 2400 2649 andVI) 2650 - 2749 andVII) 2750 - 3449 andVIII) 3450 - 3799 andIX) 3800 4149 andX) 4150 4749 andXI) 4750 4999 andXII) 5000 5179 andXIII) 5180 5279 andXIV) 5280 5379 andXVII) 5730 - 5849

- For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 8 distinctARFCN_LTE(FDD) among all the neighbour LTE FDD cells targetfor reselection.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


None 0 65535 None

1214 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


External Comment - Significant if RAT_LTE is FDD- The FDD EUARFCNs are used on the Air interface.- The FDD EUARFCNs of the LTE neighbour cells configured forreselection are broadcast on BCCH.- Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts SystemInformation Broadcasting. Change applied immediately aftermodification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicatedChannel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of thecurrent calls.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1215 / 1278


9.1.7 (GERAN_PRIORITY) - (GERAN_PRIORITY)

HMI Name GERAN_PRIORITYParameter Name

Logical Name GERAN_PRIORITY

Definition Gives the priority for the serving cell. Used for cell reselection by aLTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules step size = 1,"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest

Mandatory rules When a given serving 2G cell has at least one neighbour 3G orLTE cell for reselection, then GERAN_PRIORITY shall be differentfrom any priority (PRIORITY_3G and PRIORITY_LTE) of itsneighbour 3G and LTE cells for reselection, and different from theDEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G of its BSS.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 7 0




1216 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.8 (H_PRIO) - (H_PRIO)

HMI Name H_PRIOParameter Name

Logical Name H_PRIO

Definition Hysteresis used in the priority reselection algorithm by a LTE-capableMS/UE.

Coding rules step size = 1Coded value (decimal): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC0: 6: Rule disabled1: 5: 5 dB2: 4: 4 dB3: 3: 3 dB

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


dB 3 6 6




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1217 / 1278


9.1.9 (MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH) - (MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH)

HMI Name MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTHParameter Name

Logical Name MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH

Definition Number of resources blocks (NRB) over which an MS/UELTE-capable could measure.

Coding rules 0 (coded) = 61 (coded) = 152 (coded) = 253 (coded) = 504 (coded) = 755 (coded) = 100

Mandatory rules All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTEshall be given the same MEASUREMENT_BANDWIDTH value (tobe checked on a per RAT basis).


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


None 6 100 6




1218 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.10 (Mobile Country Code (MCC) for LTE cell) - (MCC_LTE)

HMI Name Mobile Country Code (MCC) for LTE cellParameter Name

Logical Name MCC_LTE

Definition Mobile Country Code of a neighbour external LTE (FDD or TDD) cellof the own or of a foreign PLMN.


Mandatory rules - The MCC_LTE is computed by the OMC-R as a function of thePLMN id selected by the operator in the set of own or foreign PLMNs- (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE, CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify aLTE cell inside the OMC


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


None 0 999 None

External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1219 / 1278


9.1.11 (Mobile Network Code (MNC) for LTE cell) - (MNC_LTE)

HMI Name Mobile Network Code (MNC) for LTE cellParameter Name

Logical Name MNC_LTE

Definition Mobile Network Code of a neighbour external LTE (FDD or TDD) cellof the own PLMN or of a foreign PLMN.


Mandatory rules - The MNC_LTE is computed by the OMC-R as a function of thePLMN id selected by the operator in the set of own or foreign PLMNs.- (MCC_LTE, MNC_LTE, CI_LTE) shall together uniquely identify aLTE cell inside the OMC


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


None 0 999 None

External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only- The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (Fbinary coded 1111)MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9).



1220 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.12 (PRIORITY_3G) - (PRIORITY_3G)

HMI Name PRIORITY_3GParameter Name

Logical Name PRIORITY_3G

Definition Priority associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcasted by theBSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules step size = 1,"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest.

Mandatory rules - All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSCEvolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the samePRIORITY_3G value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).- The PRIORITY_3G of a given 3G cell, neighbour for reselection toone/several 2G serving cell(s) S, shall be different from any priority(GERAN_PRIORITY) of the cell(s) S, and different from any priority(DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) of the BSS(s) owning the cell(s) S, anddifferent from any priority (PRIORITY_LTE) of the LTE cell(s) (if any)neighbour for reselection to the cell(s) S.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 7 4




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1221 / 1278


9.1.13 (PRIORITY_LTE) - (PRIORITY_LTE)

HMI Name PRIORITY_LTEParameter Name

Logical Name PRIORITY_LTE

Definition Priority associated to a given EUARFCN explicitly broadcasted bythe BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules step size = 1,"0" is the lowest priority, "7" the highest.

Mandatory rules - All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTEshall be given the same PRIORITY_LTE value (to be checked on aper RAT basis).- The PRIORITY_LTE of a given LTE cell, neighbour for reselectionto one/several 2G serving cell(s) S, shall be different from any priority(GERAN_PRIORITY) of the cell(s) S, and different from any priority(DEFAULT_PRIORITY_3G) of the BSS(s) owning the cell(s) S, anddifferent from any priority (PRIORITY_3G) of the 3G cell(s) (if any)neighbour for reselection to the cell(s) S.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


None 0 7 7




1222 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.14 (QRXLEVMIN_3G) - (QRXLEVMIN_3G)

HMI Name QRXLEVMIN_3GParameter Name

Logical Name QRXLEVMIN_3G

Definition Minimum received level required for a given UARFCN broadcastedby the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.


Mandatory rules All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSCEvolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the sameQRXLEVMIN_3G value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


dBm -119 -57 -119




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1223 / 1278


9.1.15 (QRXLEVMIN_LTE) - (QRXLEVMIN_LTE)

HMI Name QRXLEVMIN_LTEParameter Name

Logical Name QRXLEVMIN_LTE

Definition Minimum received level required for a given EUARFCN broadcastedby the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.


Mandatory rules All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTEshall be given the same QRXLEVMIN_LTE value (to be checkedon a per RAT basis).


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


dBm -140 -78 -140




1224 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.16 (Qsearch_P_LTE) - (Qsearch_P_LTE)

HMI Name Qsearch_P_LTEParameter Name

Logical Name Qsearch_P_LTE

Definition Threshold for searching for LTE cells in GPRS depending whetherthe received level average of the serving cell is below or above thethreshold.Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC0: -98: -98 dBm (below)1: -94: -94 dBm (below)2: -90: -90dBm (below)3: -86: -86dBm (below)4: -82: -82 dBm (below)5: -78: -78 dBm (below)6: -74: -74 dBm (below)7: -70: Always search for LTE neighbour cells8: -78: -78 dBm (above)9: -74: -74 dBm (above)10: -70: -70 dBm (above)11: -66: -66 dBm (above)12: -62: -62 dBm (above)13: -58: -58 dBm (above)14: -54: -54 dBm (above)15: -50: Never search for LTE neighbour cells

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -98 -50 -50




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1225 / 1278


9.1.17 (RAT_LTE) - (RAT_LTE)

HMI Name RAT_LTEParameter Name

Logical Name RAT_LTE

Definition This parameter defines the radio access technology of an externalLTE cell.

Coding rules 0: FDD1: TDD

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.



1226 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.18 (T_RESELECTION) - (T_RESELECTION)

HMI Name T_RESELECTIONParameter Name

Logical Name T_RESELECTION

Definition Period during which the cell reselection criteria of the priorityalgorithm must be verified to allow the cell reselection; used by aLTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules Coded_value = (sec / 5) - 1, step size = 5

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


sec 5 20 5

External Comment - Parameter available on BSC Evolution only.- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1227 / 1278


9.1.19 (THRESH_2G_LOW) - (THRESH_2G_LOW)

HMI Name THRESH_2G_LOWParameter Name

Logical Name THRESH_2G_LOW

Definition Gives the threshold of the GSM serving cell (and all measuredGSM cells). Used in the priority algorithm for cell reselection by aLTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules step size = 2 dBCoded value (decimal): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC0: 0: 0 dB1: 2: 2 dB2: 4: 4 dB3: 6: 6 dB4: 8: 8 dB5: 10: 10 dB6: 12: 12 dB7: 14: 14 dB8: 16: 16 dB9: 18: 18 dB10: 20: 20 dB11: 22: 22 dB12: 24: 24 dB13: 26: 26 dB14: 28: 28 dB15: 30: always select a LTE cell is possible

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 30 30




1228 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.20 (THRESH_3G_HIGH) - (THRESH_3G_HIGH)

HMI Name THRESH_3G_HIGHParameter Name

Logical Name THRESH_3G_HIGH

Definition Threshold (high) associated to a given UARFCN explicitlybroadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capableMS/UE.

Coding rules Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2

Mandatory rules - All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSCEvolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the sameTHRESH_3G_HIGH value (to be checked on a per RAT basis).- THRESH_3G_LOW <= THRESH_3G_HIGH


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


dB 0 62 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1229 / 1278


9.1.21 (THRESH_3G_LOW) - (THRESH_3G_LOW)

HMI Name THRESH_3G_LOWParameter Name

Logical Name THRESH_3G_LOW

Definition Threshold (low) associated to a given UARFCN explicitly broadcastedby the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules Coded_value = dB / 2, step size = 2

Mandatory rules - All 3G cells managed by the OMC (and neighbour to a BSCEvolution) having the same ARFCN_3G shall be given the sameTHRESH_3G_LOW value (to be checked at Network level and on aper RAT basis).- THRESH_3G_LOW <= THRESH_3G_HIGH


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


dB 0 62 30




1230 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.22 (THRESH_LTE_HIGH) - (THRESH_LTE_HIGH)

HMI Name THRESH_LTE_HIGHParameter Name

Logical Name THRESH_LTE_HIGH

Definition Threshold (high) associated to a given EUARFCN explicitlybroadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capableMS/UE.


Mandatory rules - All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTEshall be given the same THRESH_LTE_HIGH value (to be checkedon a per RAT basis).- THRESH_LTE_LOW <= THRESH_LTE_HIGH


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


dB 0 62 30




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1231 / 1278


9.1.23 (THRESH_LTE_LOW) - (THRESH_LTE_LOW)

HMI Name THRESH_LTE_LOWParameter Name

Logical Name THRESH_LTE_LOW

Definition Threshold (low) associated to a given EUARFCN explicitlybroadcasted by the BSS. Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capableMS/UE.


Mandatory rules - All LTE cells managed by the OMC having the same ARFCN_LTEshall be given the same THRESH_LTE_LOW value (to be checkedon a per RAT basis).- THRESH_LTE_LOW <= THRESH_LTE_HIGH


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance LTE cell


dB 0 62 30




1232 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


9.1.24 (THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH) - (THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH)

HMI Name THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCHParameter Name

Logical Name THRESH_PRIORITY_SEARCH

Definition Threshold for the serving cell that controls inter-RAT measurements.Used for cell reselection by a LTE-capable MS/UE.

Coding rules step size = 3 dBmCoded value (decimal): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC0: -98: -98 dBm1: -95: -95 dBm2: -92: -92 dBm3: -89: -89 dBm4: -86: -86 dBm5: -83: -83 dBm6: -80: -80 dBm7: -77: -77 dBm8: -74: -74 dBm9: -71: -71 dBm10: -68: -68 dBm11: -65: -65 dBm12: -62: -62 dBm13: -59: -59 dBm14: -56: -56 dBm15: -53: Always

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -98 -53 -53




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1233 / 1278


1234 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

10 2G-3G Telecom Parameters


3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1235 / 1278


10.1 Network (CDE)

10.1.1 (CGI_3G_REQUIRED) - (CGI_3G_REQD)

HMI Name CGI_3G_REQUIREDParameter Name

Logical Name CGI_3G_REQD

Definition Controls the format of an external 3G cell identification, sent to theMSC on the A interface for 2G to 3G handover.

Coding rules 0: CGI not used, 1: CGI used

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules Alcatel-Lucent recommend to set the CGI_3G_REQD parameter to 1provided that the MSC supports the CGI format. The CGI_3G_REQDparameter shall be set to 1 if the operator wants to allow inter-PLMN2G to 3G handovers. If this parameter needs to be changed, it isrecommended to change it during a migration phase to avoid anyadditional Telecom outage.


Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


None 0 1 1

External Comment Depends on MSC Type. The value indicated here is forimplementation purposes.



1236 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2 Site (CAE)

10.2.1 (A_ECNO_HO) - (A_ECNO_HO)

HMI Name A_ECNO_HOParameter Name

Logical Name A_ECNO_HO

Definition Window size for Ec/No level averages for 2G to 3G handover

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


Samfr 1 31 8


Single 8

Umbrella 8

Concentric 8


Microcell 4

Minicell 8


Cell Type Dependent



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1237 / 1278


10.2.2 (Cell Capacity Class) - (CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS)

HMI Name Cell Capacity ClassParameter Name

Logical Name CELL_CAPACITY_CLASS

Definition Capacity class of the cell, measured on a linear scale, ranging from 1to 100.

Coding rules binary value on 8 bits

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules the Cell Capacity Class shall follow the recommended rule: "In orderto fulfill the 3GPP requirement of having a linear scale in the capacityclass, ranging from 1 to 100:Cell Capacity Class is a linear function of the Cell capacity: value 1shall indicate the minimum capacity class, and 100 shall indicate themaximum capacity class. Capacity class should be measured on alinear scale.

The default value of Cell Capacity Class should depend on thenumber of available TCHs in the cell and since there may be up to126 TCH channels in one GSM cell:

Cell_Capacity_Class = int{[(99/125) x (NTCH - 1)] + 1}

where NTCH is the number of all TCH channels in the Cell."

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 1 100 100




1238 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.3 (CI_3G) - (CI_3G)

HMI Name CI_3GParameter Name

Logical Name CI_3G

Definition This parameter indicates the Cell Identifier of an external 3G (FDDor TDD) cell as defined in 3GPP TS 25.401.

Coding rules Binary value on 16 bits

Mandatory rules (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall togetheruniquely identify a 3G cell


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 65535 None

External Comment Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on going trafficis not disrupted. Change applied immediately after modification.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1239 / 1278


10.2.4 (EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO) -(EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO)

HMI Name EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO

Definition Allows handovers towards 3G cells for a given MS when I.E. ServiceHandover is missing and the load in the serving cell is high (seeTHR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ)

Coding rules 0 : disable, 1 : enable

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




1240 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.5 (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION) -(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION)

HMI Name EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION

Definition Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN FDD cell reselections anddefines the 3G search activation mode for MS in GMM Ready state.The adjacent UARFCNs can be configured either at BSS level(FDD_ARFCN_LIST), or, exclusively, at 3G cell level (ARFCN_3G).Those UARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.

Coding rules 0: Disabled1: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state,2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state.3: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1.4: Enabled with 3G search activated with flexible priority while theUE/MS is in GMM ready state.

Mandatory rules - EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>disabled at the same time.- FDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (FDD) are exclusive:for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time avalid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell whereEN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having,at least, one neighbour 3G FDD cell target for reselection (or both).- Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-workingare exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the sametime a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cellfor which (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)and (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 orEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0).- if both EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, thenthey shall have the same value.- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION= 1 and EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 andEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0.- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or(EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)- if both EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, thenthey shall have the same value.

Recommended rules Value 3 and 4 should be used only in case of good 3G FDD coverage.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1241 / 1278


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 4 0

External Comment - If the NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode ofoperation for R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation forall MS", then the 3G search is systematically deactivated whenactivating the NC2 mode through the Packet Measurement Order[NC2] message.- If EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION = "Enabled with 3Gsearch activated while the UE/MS is in GMM ready state, even ifNetwork_Control_Order > 1", then the 3G search is activated evenwhen activating the NC2 mode (the Packet Measurement Order[NC2] message will not be sent).- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts SystemInformation Broadcasting. Change applied immediately aftermodification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicatedChannel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of thecurrent calls.



1242 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.6 (EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION) -(EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION)

HMI Name EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION

Definition Enables/Disables the GSM to UTRAN TD-SCDMA cell reselectionsand defines the 3G searchactivation mode for MS in GMM Ready state. The adjacentUARFCNs can be configuredeither at BSS level (TDD_ARFCN_LIST), or, exclusively, at 3G celllevel (ARFCN_3G).Those UARFCNs are used in the "blind" search method.

Coding rules 0: Disabled1: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state,2: Enabled with 3G search deactivated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state.3: Enabled with 3G search activated while the UE/MS is in GMMready state, even if Network_Control_Order > 1.4: Enabled with 3G search activated with flexible priority while theUE/MS is in GMM ready state.

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1243 / 1278


Mandatory rules - EN_2G_3G_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>disabled atthe same time- EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION shall not be <>disabled at the same time.- TDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (TDD) are exclusive:for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time a validTDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell whereEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, andhaving, at least, one neighbour 3G TDD cell target for reselection.- Configuration of TDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-workingare exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the sametime a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cellwhere both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled.- if both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, thenthey shall have the same value.- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION= 1 and EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 andEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0.- It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION = 3 only if(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or(EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or(EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)- For a given 2G cell, where bothEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled, ifFAKE_FDD_MANAGEMENT = 1 then there shall be no morethan 8 distinct ARFCN_3G (TDD) among all the neighbour 3GTDD cells target for reselection and there shall be no more than 4distinct ARFCN_LTE(TDD) among all the neighbour LTE TDDcells target for reselection.

Recommended rules Value 3 and 4 should be used only in case of good 3G TDD coverage.

Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 4 0

1244 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


External Comment - If EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION < 3, and If theNETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER is set to "NC2 mode of operationfor R99 onwards MS" or "NC2 mode of operation for Rel4 onwardsMS" or "NC2 mode of operation for all MS", the 3G search issystematically deactivated when activating the NC2 mode throughthe Packet Measurement Order [NC2] message. This 3G searchdeactivation is then performed independently of the value of theEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION parameter.- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts SystemInformation Broadcasting. Change applied immediately aftermodification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicatedChannel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of thecurrent calls.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1245 / 1278


10.2.7 (EN_3G_DIVERSITY) - (EN_3G_DIVERSITY(FDD))

HMI Name EN_3G_DIVERSITYParameter Name

Logical Name EN_3G_DIVERSITY(FDD)

Definition This parameter indicates if diversity is applied for an external 3GFDD cell.

Coding rules 1 bit:0 diversity is not applied,1 diversity is applied

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 1 0

External Comment - Significant only if RAT_3G is FDD.- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, ongoing traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately aftermodification.



1246 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.8 (EN_3G_HO) - (EN_3G_HO)

HMI Name EN_3G_HOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_3G_HO

Definition This flag enables/disables the 2G to 3G FDD handover.


Mandatory rules For Evolium serving cell :- if the neighborhood of the serving cell for handover is mixed 2G/3G,then there shall be no more than 31 different BCCH 2G frequenciesfor the set of all the target cells for handover.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1247 / 1278


10.2.9 (EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO) -(EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO)

HMI Name EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFOParameter Name

Logical Name EN_COMPRESSED_INTER_RAT_INFO

Definition Allows sending by the MS of Compressed Inter-RAT HO information

Coding rules 0 : disable, 1 : enable

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 1 0

External Comment Shall be set to 1 only if all RNCs neighbour to this BSS support thefeature.



1248 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.10 (EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION) -(EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION)

HMI Name EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_CPICH_2G_3G_RESELECTION

Definition Defines the CPICH measurements used in the 2G to 3G cellreselection

Coding rules 0: Only 1 CPICH measurement is used1: CPICH Ec/No and RSCP measurements must be used

Mandatory rules This parameter can be set on 1 only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <>0


Category Site (CAE)

Type Flag

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 1 0




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1249 / 1278


10.2.11 (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION) - (EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION)

HMI Name EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTIONParameter Name

Logical Name EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION

Definition Enables a fast 3G/LTE (FDD or TDD) cell reselection at 2G CS callrelease.

Coding rules 0:fast 3G/LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is not used.1:only fast 3G cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used.2:only fast LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used.3:fast LTE cell reselection at 2G CS call release is used, 3Gotherwise.

Mandatory rules - It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION= 1 and EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 andEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0.- It is not allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =2 and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_ RESELECTION = 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION = 0.It is allowed to have EN_FAST_3G_RESELECTION =3 only if (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0and EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)or (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0) or(EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 3 0

External Comment - Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts SystemInformation Broadcasting. Change applied immediately aftermodification in dedicated Channel Release messages of the currentcalls.



1250 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.12 (FDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (FDD_ARFCN_LIST)

HMI Name FDD_ARFCN_LISTParameter Name

Logical Name FDD_ARFCN_LIST

Definition List of neighbour Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio FrequencyChannel Numbers (UARFCNs) of any 3G FDD neighbor cell,adjacent to the BSS.Up to 3 FDD UARFCNs can be defined in the list. This list is used for2G to 3G cell reselection ("blind" search method).

Coding rules The value of -1 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy valueindicates that the operator does not provide any UARFCN.

Mandatory rules - The UARFCNs defined in the list (i.e. not set to -1) shall be differentfrom each other.- Only the following downlink FDD UARFCN ranges are standardized:I) 10562-10838 andII) 9662-9938 andIII) 1162-1513 andIV) 1537-1738 andV) 4357-4458 andVI) 4387-4413 andVII) 2237- 2563 andVIII) 2937-3088 andIX) 9237-9387X) 3112-3388XI) 3712-3812XII) 3837- 3903XIII) 4017-4043XIV) 4117-4143- FDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (FDD) are exclusive:for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time avalid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell whereEN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having,at least, one neighbour 3G FDD cell target for reselection (or both).- Configuration of FDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-workingare exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the sametime a valid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cellfor which (EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0)and (EN_2G_TO_LTEFDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0 orEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION <> 0).


Category Site (CAE)


SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS

3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1251 / 1278



None 0 16383 None

External Comment - The FDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.- The FDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast onBCCH.- Significant only if EN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is notdisabled- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts SystemInformation Broadcasting. Change applied immediately aftermodification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicatedChannel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of thecurrent calls.



1252 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.13 (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset) - (FDD_GPRS_Qoffset)

HMI Name FDD_GPRS_QoffsetParameter Name

Logical Name FDD_GPRS_Qoffset

Definition Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and ofthe neighbour GSM cellsfor UTRAN FDD cell re-selection in GPRS

Coding rules Coded value (binary): Value (dB): Text displayed at the OMC0: -32: Always select a 3G cell if possible1: -28: -28 dB2: -24: -24 dB3: -20: -20 dB4: -16: -16 dB5: -12: -12 dB6: -8: -8 dB7: -4: -4 dB8: 0: 0 dB9: 4: 4 dB10: 8: 8 dB11: 12: 12 dB12: 16: 16 dB13: 20: 20 dB14: 24: 24 dB15: 28: 28 dB

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dB -32 28 -32

External Comment This parameter is broadcast on PBCCH if there is a PBCCH allocatedin the serving cell.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1253 / 1278


10.2.14 (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING) - (FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING)

HMI Name FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTINGParameter Name

Logical Name FDD_MULTIRAT_REPORTING

Definition Number of the strongest 3G cells to be reported by the MS in themeasurement report message

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


None 0 3 2

External Comment This parameter is meaningful only if EN_3G_HO is set to enabled. Ifdisabled, this parameter is considered as equal to zero (the MS shallreport only 2G cells).This parameter is broadcast on SACCH.



1254 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.15 (FDD_Qmin) - (FDD_Qmin(BSC))

HMI Name FDD_QminParameter Name

Logical Name FDD_Qmin(BSC)

Definition Minimum threshold for Ec/Io for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.

Coding rules 0 = -20 dB1 = -6 dB2 = -18 dB3 = -8dB4 = -16dB5 = -10dB6 = -14dB7 = -12dB

Mandatory rules Equal to FDD_Qmin(MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -20 -6 -12

External Comment This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is aPBCCH allocated in the serving cell.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1255 / 1278


10.2.16 (FDD_Qmin_Offset) - (FDD_Qmin_Offset)

HMI Name FDD_Qmin_OffsetParameter Name

Logical Name FDD_Qmin_Offset

Definition Applies an offset to FDD_Qmin value

Coding rules coded on 3 bits:0 = 0 dB,1 = 2 dB,2 = 4 dB,3 = 6 dB,4 = 8 dB,5 = 10 dB,6 = 12 dB,7 = 14 dB.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB 0 14 0

External Comment Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection = 1



1256 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.17 (FDD_Qoffset) - (FDD_Qoffset (BSC))

HMI Name FDD_QoffsetParameter Name

Logical Name FDD_Qoffset (BSC)

Definition Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and ofthe neighbour GSM cells for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.


Mandatory rules Equal to FDD_Qoffset(MFS)


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -32 28 -32

External Comment This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is aPBCCH allocated in the serving cell.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1257 / 1278


10.2.18 (FDD_RSCPmin) - (FDD_RSCPmin)

HMI Name FDD_RSCPminParameter Name

Logical Name FDD_RSCPmin

Definition Minimum threshold of RSCP for UTRAN FDD cell re-selection.

Coding rules coded on 4bits:0 = -114 dBm,1 = -112 dBm,2 = -110 dBm,3 = -108 dBm,4 = -106 dBm,5 = -104 dBm,6 = -102 dBm,7 = -100 dBm,8 = -98 dBm,9 = -96 dBm,10 = -94 dBm,11 = -92 dBm,12 = -90 dBm,13 = -88 dBm,14 = -86 dBm,15 = -84 dBm.

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -114 -84 -102

External Comment Available only if EN_CPICH_2G_3G_Reselection=1



1258 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.19 (LAC_3G) - (LAC_3G)

HMI Name LAC_3GParameter Name

Logical Name LAC_3G

Definition This parameter indicates the Location Area Code of an external3G (FDD or TDD) cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 24.008 (in theHANDOVER COMMAND message on A interface).


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 65535 None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1259 / 1278


10.2.20 (Mobile Country Code (MCC) for 3G cell) - (MCC_3G)

HMI Name Mobile Country Code (MCC) for 3G cellParameter Name

Logical Name MCC_3G

Definition Mobile Country Code of a neighbour external 3G cell (FDD or TDD)of the own or of a foreign PLMN.


Mandatory rules - The MCC_3G is computed by the OMC-R as a function of thePLMN id selected by the operator.- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, Local-3G-Cell-Identity) shall togetheruniquely identify a 3G cell inside the OMC.- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall togetheruniquely identify a 3G cell.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 999 None




1260 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.21 (Mobile Network Code (MNC) for 3G cell) - (MNC_3G)

HMI Name Mobile Network Code (MNC) for 3G cellParameter Name

Logical Name MNC_3G

Definition Mobile Network Code of a neighbour external 3G cell (FDD or TDD)of the own PLMN or of a foreign PLMN.


Mandatory rules - The MNC_3G is computed by the OMC-R as a function of thePLMN id selected by the operator.- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, Local-3G-Cell-Identity) shall togetheruniquely identify a 3G cell inside the OMC.- (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall togetheruniquely identify a 3G cell.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Reference

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 999 None

External Comment The operator is allowed to enter 2 or 3 digits MNC in the CDE table.MNC such as yz or Fyz correspond to a 2 digits MNC (y, z = 0..9). (Fbinary coded 1111)MNC such as xyz correspond to a 3 digits MNC (x = 0..9).



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1261 / 1278


10.2.22 (Qsearch_C) - (Qsearch_C)

HMI Name Qsearch_CParameter Name

Logical Name Qsearch_C

Definition Threshold for searching for 3G cells in dedicated mode dependingwhether the received signal level of the serving cell is below or abovethe threshold.

Coding rules Coded value (binary): Value (dBm): Text displayed at the OMC0: -98: -98 dBm (below)1: -94: -94 dBm (below)2: -90: -90dBm (below)3: -86: -86dBm (below)4: -82: -82 dBm (below)5: -78: -78 dBm (below)6: -74: -74 dBm (below)7: -70: Always search for 3G neighbour cells8: -78: -78 dBm (above)9: -74: -74 dBm (above)10: -70: -70 dBm (above)11: -66: -66 dBm (above)12: -62: -62 dBm (above)13: -58: -58 dBm (above)14: -54: -54 dBm (above)15: -50: Never search for 3G neighbour cells

Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In a cell where at least one 2G to 3G adjacency has been defined,Qsearch_C =-70, i.e. always search for 3G neighbour cells

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -98 -50 -70

External Comment This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signallevel is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") orabove (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold.This parameter is broadcast on SACCH



1262 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.23 (Qsearch_I) - (Qsearch_I)

HMI Name Qsearch_IParameter Name

Logical Name Qsearch_I

Definition Threshold for searching for 3G cells depending whether the receivedlevel average of theserving cell is below or above the threshold.


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_I =-70, i.e.always search for 3G neighbour cells

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -98 -50 -50

External Comment This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signallevel is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") orabove (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the threshold.This parameter is broadcast on BCCH



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1263 / 1278


10.2.24 (Qsearch_P) - (Qsearch_P)

HMI Name Qsearch_PParameter Name

Logical Name Qsearch_P

Definition Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS depending whetherthe received level average of the serving cell is below or above thethreshold


Mandatory rules –

Recommended rules In a cell with FDD_ARFCN_list not empty, Qsearch_P =-70, i.e.always search for 3G neighbour cells

Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dBm -98 -50 -50

External Comment This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signallevel is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") orabove (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the thresholdin GPRS.This parameter is broadcast on BCCH and on PBCCH if there is aPBCCH allocated in the serving cell.



1264 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.25 (Qsearch_P_PTM) - (Qsearch_P_PTM)

HMI Name Qsearch_P_PTMParameter Name

Logical Name Qsearch_P_PTM

Definition Threshold for searching for 3G cells in GPRS packet transfer modedepending whether the received level average of the serving cellis below or above the threshold


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem MFS

Instance cell


dBm -98 -50 -50

External Comment This threshold is used to search for 3G cells if the received signallevel is below (-98 dBm to "always search for 3G neighbour cells") orabove (-78 dBm to "never search for neighbour cells") the thresholdin GPRS packet transfer mode.This parameter is sent in Packet Measurement Order on PACCH.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1265 / 1278


10.2.26 (RAT_3G) - (RAT_3G)

HMI Name RAT_3GParameter Name

Logical Name RAT_3G

Definition This parameter defines UMTS radio access technology of an external3G cell.

Coding rules 0: FDD1: TDD

Mandatory rules A 3G TDD cell can be configured for "(blind) cell reselection" only.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Enumerated

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 1 None




1266 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.27 (RNC_ID) - (RNC_ID_3G)

HMI Name RNC_IDParameter Name

Logical Name RNC_ID_3G

Definition This parameter indicates the RNC Identifier or the Extended RNCIdentifier of an external 3G (FDD or TDD) cell, as defined in 3GPP TS25.401 (in HO Required message sent to the MSC on A interface).

Coding rules Binary value on 16 bits.

Mandatory rules (MCC_3G, MNC_3G, RNC_ID_3G and CI_3G) shall togetheruniquely identify a 3G cel.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 65535 None




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1267 / 1278


10.2.28 (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G) - (SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD)

HMI Name SCRAMBLING_CODE_3GParameter Name

Logical Name SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD

Definition This parameter indicates the Primary Scrambling Code of an external3G FDD cell, as defined in 3GPP TS 25.213.

Coding rules Binary value on 9 bits.

Mandatory rules - For a given 2G cell, the couple (ARFCN_3G (FDD),SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD) shall be unique among all theneighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both).


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 511 None

External Comment - Significant if RAT_3G is FDD- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, ongoing traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately aftermodification.



1268 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.29 (T3121) - (T3121)


Logical Name T3121

Definition This timer is started by sending an INTER SYSTEM TO UTRANHANDOVER message to the MS and is normally stopped when theMS has correctly seized the UTRAN channel(s). Its purpose is tokeep the old channels sufficiently long for the MS to be able to returnto the old channels, and to release the channels if the MS is lost.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Timer

SubSystem BSC

Instance BSC


sec 0 25.5 14




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1269 / 1278


10.2.30 (TDD_ARFCN_LIST) - (TDD_ARFCN_LIST)

HMI Name TDD_ARFCN_LISTParameter Name

Logical Name TDD_ARFCN_LIST

Definition List of neighbour Downlink TDD UTRAN Absolute Radio FrequencyChannel Numbers (UARFCNs) of any 3G TDD neighbor cell(TD-SCDMA), adjacent to the BSS.Up to 3 TDD UARFCNs can be defined in the list. This list is used for2G to 3G cell reselection ("blind" search method).

Coding rules The value of -1 is for implementation purpose only; this dummy valueindicates that the operator does not provide any UARFCN.

Mandatory rules - The UARFCNs defined in the list (i.e. not set to 1) shall be differentfrom each other.- Only following downlink TDD UARFCN ranges are standardised :a) 9504-9596 and 10054-10121b) 9254-9546 and 9654-9946c) 9554-9646d) 12854-13096e) 11504-11996f) 9404-9596- TDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (TDD) are exclusive:for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time avalid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell whereEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, andhaving, at least, one neighbour 3G TDD cell target for reselection.- Configuration of TDD_ARFCN_LIST and 2G/LTE inter-workingare exclusive: for a given BSS, we cannot have at the sametime a valid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cellwhere both EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION andEN_2G_TO_LTETDD_CELL_RESELECTION are <> disabled.


Category Site (CAE)


SubSystem BSC

Instance BSS


None 0 16383 None

1270 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


External Comment - The TDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.- The TDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells are broadcast onBCCH.- Significant only if EN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION isnot disabled- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, on goingtraffic is not disrupted. But any modification impacts SystemInformation Broadcasting. Change applied immediately aftermodification, in broadcasted SI2quater messages and in dedicatedChannel Release and Packet Measurement Order messages of thecurrent calls.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1271 / 1278


10.2.31 (TDD_Qoffset) - (TDD_Qoffset)

HMI Name TDD_QoffsetParameter Name

Logical Name TDD_Qoffset

Definition Offset added to the received level average of the serving cell and ofthe neighbour GSMcells for UTRAN TDD cell re-selection.


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -32 28 -32

External Comment This parameter is broadcast on BCCH.



1272 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.32 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT) -(THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT)

HMI Name THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECTParameter Name

Logical Name THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT

Definition Load threshold determining whether a 3G to 2G handover requestshall be rejected in load situation; the feature is deactivated by settingTHR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT to its maximum value 100%.


Mandatory rules THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REJECT shall be lower than the 2G loadthresholds HIGH_TRAFFIC_LOAD or equal to 100%.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 100




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1273 / 1278


10.2.33 (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ) - (THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ)

HMI Name THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQParameter Name

Logical Name THR_CELL_LOAD_3G_REQ

Definition Load threshold on the serving cell below which handovers towards3G cells are forbidden when I.E. Service Handover is missing(whatever EN_2G_3G_HO_NO_SERVICE_HO value)


Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


% 0 100 0

External Comment Value 0 disables the feature.



1274 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


10.2.34 (THR_ECNO_HO) - (THR_ECNO_HO)

HMI Name THR_ECNO_HOParameter Name

Logical Name THR_ECNO_HO

Definition Ec/No threshold above which a handover to UTRAN may be triggered

Coding rules step size = 0.5 dB, coded over 6 bits0: "HO to 3G attempted whatever the Ec/No",1: -24.0,2: -23.5,3: -23,...,48: -0.5,49: 0.0

Mandatory rules –


Category Site (CAE)

Type Threshold

SubSystem BSC

Instance cell


dB -24.5 0 -15




3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1275 / 1278


10.2.35 (UARFCN) - (ARFCN_3G(FDD))

HMI Name UARFCNParameter Name

Logical Name ARFCN_3G(FDD)

Definition Downlink FDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number(UARFCN) of an external 3G FDD cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules - Only the following downlink FDD UARFCN ranges are standardized:I) 10562-10838 andII) 9662-9938 andIII) 1162-1513 andIV) 1537-1738 andV) 4357-4458 andVI) 4387-4413 andVII) 2237- 2563 andVIII) 2937-3088 andIX) 9237-9387X) 3112-3388XI) 3712-3812XII) 3837- 3903XIII) 4017-4043XIV) 4117-4143- For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 3 distinctARFCN_3G (FDD) among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target forhandover (or both).- For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 8 distinctARFCN_3G (FDD) among all the neighbour 3G FDD cells target forreselection (or both).- For a given 2G cell, the couple (ARFCN_3G (FDD),SCRAMBLING_CODE_3G_FDD) shall be unique among all theneighbour 3G FDD cells target for handover (or both).- FDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (FDD) are exclusive:for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time avalid FDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell whereEN_2G_TO_3G_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, and having,at least, one neighbour 3G FDD cell target for reselection (or both).


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 16383 None

1276 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09


External Comment - Significant if RAT_3G is FDD- The FDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.- The FDD UARFCNs of the 3G neighbour cells configured forreselection (or both) are broadcast on BCCH.- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, ongoing traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately aftermodification.



3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09 1277 / 1278


10.2.36 (UARFCN) - (ARFCN_3G(TDD))

HMI Name UARFCNParameter Name

Logical Name ARFCN_3G(TDD)

Definition Downlink TDD UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number(UARFCN) of an external 3G TDD cell.

Coding rules –

Mandatory rules - Only the following downlink UARFCN ranges are standardized:a) 9504-9596 and 10054-10121b) 9254- 9546 and 9654-9946c) 9554-9646d) 12854-13096e) 11504-11996f) 9404-9596- For a given 2G cell, there shall be no more than 8 distinctARFCN_3G (TDD) among all the neighbour 3G TDD cells target forreselection.- TDD_ARFCN_LIST and ARFCN_3G (TDD) are exclusive:for a given BSS, we cannot have at the same time avalid TDD_ARFCN_LIST and, at least, one 2G cell whereEN_2G_TO_3GTDD_CELL_RESELECTION is not disabled, andhaving, at least, one neighbour 3G TDD cell target for reselection.


Category Site (CAE)

Type Number

SubSystem BSC

Instance 3G cell


None 0 16383 None

External Comment - Significant if RAT_3G is TDD- The TDD UARFCNs are used on the Air interface.- The TDD UARFCns of the 3G neighbour cells (configured forreselection) are broadcast on BCCH- Parameter change: no impact on the telecom service, ongoing traffic is not disrupted. Change applied immediately aftermodification.



1278 / 1278 3BK 21624 AAAA PCZZA Ed.09

al parameters

Documents

send useless

definition

round trip

leave sufficient

ater terrestrial

packet uplink

id cn

ater satellite